BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Transcript of BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
SCHOOL OF COMMERCE amp MANAGEMENT
EXAMINATION
amp
DETAILED SYLLABUS BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION
(BBA) 2020
RAJAULATU NAMKUM RANCHI JHARKHAND
Vision Strive to achieve a unique blend of academic excellence and management skills to address the
needs of the business environment in a manner that lets each participant achieve his potential in
a value based character
The BBA program seeks to develop students into leaders ready to tackle the challenges of
todaylsquos global business environment
Adapt and find innovative methods for problem solving to cope with unforeseen events and to
manage in unpredictable environments
Manage contemporary societal and global issues resulting from diversity
Appreciate individual ethical behavior and discharge community responsibilities in
organization and society
Mission To leverage their potential by creating an ecosystem that instills critical thinking and analytical
mind set
To develop leaders of competencies in a rapidly changing business environment
To nurture the future business leaders through imparting high quality value-based teaching
research and practical based training that meets industry expectations
To foster a passion for learning and creative thinking among the student and teaching
community
Identify and formulate research problems and analyze complex management and
communication issues
Design solutions for complex managerial and communication problems and to develop the
same so as to meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for employability
BBA PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES AND OUTCOMES
BBA PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES-
Develop viable alternatives and make effective decisions relating to business ethics and social responsibility
Identify and analyze relevant global factors that influence decision-making
To apply appropriate techniques resources and multimedia tools for enhancement of skills
Apply knowledge based skill to assess and solve social-cultural and legal issues
Understand the impact of the professional management literary and soft skills in societal and
environmental contexts
To adopt and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities
To achieve appropriate communication skills and higher levels of proficiency for
Successful career in Industry Business and Entrepreneurship
BBA PROGRAMME OUTCOMES-
Towards the end of the program students will be able to
Provide students with a broad range of managerial capabilities the capacity for critical
thinking communication and problem‐solving skills legal and ethical behavior
Prepare graduates for diverse careers in global management administration and
entrepreneurship through a well‐rounded business education with a focus on global business
operations emerging markets and technology‐enabled organizations
Analyze socio-political-economic environment of business organizations
Communicate effectively in different contexts
Develop functional and general management skills
Build and Demonstrate leadership teamwork and social skills
Evaluate different business problems using analytical creative and integrative abilities
SEMESTER I
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Ist SEMESTER
Course Details
External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allot
ted
Cred
its
Course Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor
Sessional
L
T
P
Subj
ect
wise
Distr
ibuti
on
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Ma
x
Mar
ks
Min
Mark
s
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mark
s
Theory Group
1Y3BBA101
Ability Enhanc
ement
Compul
sory
Course
MIL Hindi Communication
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA102
Core Course
Organization Behavior 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA103 Core
Course
Introduction to
Business Accountancy
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA104 Core Course
Business Environment
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA105 Core
Course
Principles of
Management 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA102
Organization
Behavior 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
1Y3BBA104 Business
Environment 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Grand
Total 600 20 5 - 24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
MIL HINDI COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 101
fgUnh Okdjk oa laizskk
इकाई-I
हहनदीवयाकरण और रचना सजञा सरवनाम हरशष ाण हिया अवयय कारक रचन सहधउपसगव परतयय
तथासमास
ह गहनणवय पयावयराची शबद हर ोम शबद अन क शबदो क ह ए एक शबद
शबद शदधि राकय शदधि महारर और ोकोदधिया पललरन एर सकष पण
इकाई-II
हनबध क ातथासमसामहयक एरराषटर ीय हरषया परहनबधा खन
इकाई-III
सपर षण (सचार)
-सपर षण की अरधारणऔरमहतव सपरष ाण क ह ए आरशयक शत सपरष ाण क परकार
सपर षणकामाधयम सपर षणक ा सपर षण की तकनीक राचनक ा समाचारराचन साकषातकारक ा
रचनातमक खनका कषय रचनातमक ख ानकाआधार भारऔरहरचारोकीपरसतहत राक क ा की
उपयोहगता
अनशसितपसतक -
रहतवयाकरणभासकर डा 0 रचनद रकमार
रहतहनबधाभासकर डा 0 रचनदर कमार
आधहनकहहनदीवयाकरणऔररचना डा 0 रासद रननदनपरसाद
रचनामानस परो0 राम शवरनाथहतरारी
वयरहाररकहहनदी डा 0 जग बहादरपाणड य
रचनातमक खन डा 0 रमश ागौतम
राजहसहहनदीहनबध परो0 आर0 एन0 गौड़
सफ हहनदीहनबध रतन शवर
हनबध सहचर डा 0 कषमणपरसाद
उपकारमहारर और ाक ोदधियाा पार 0 राज शवरपरसादचतरव दी
कहाहनयोकहारता की परतापअनम
समपर षणपरकहहनदीभाषाहशकषण डा 0 रशनानारग
श ीहरजञान डा 0 सर शकमार
श ीहरजञानपरहतमानऔरहरशल षण डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo
श ीहरजञानकाइहतहास डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo
ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA102
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students study the behaviour of individuals and groups as part of the social and technical system in
the workplace They examine individual and group behaviour communication conflict and various
management styles motivational techniques and coordination in the work environment and apply
these concepts to the development of an organizations human resources
UNIT I
Organization Overview of the concept and relevance of organizational Behaviour meaning Nature
Scope features approaches model challenges and opportunities functions amp Role of manager
Planning process Decision making Process
UNIT II
Foundation of individual Behavior Biography ability personality (determinants and models)
perception (definition components factors affecting perception in decision making) Values
Beliefs etc
UNIT III
Individual Behavior- Attitude Definition importance Types Attitude regarding- Job
Satisfaction Involvement commitment effects of employee attitude changing attitudes
Learning Definition nature theories classical conditioning operant conditioning cognitive
Learning Social learning
UNIT IV
Motivation Concept and theories (Maslow McGregor Herzberg ERG) merits amp demerits Group
dynamics amp Team work Nature theories types of group Definition Stages of Group Development
effectiveness potential problems Analysis of Interpersonal Relationship Transactional Analysis
Johari Window
UNIT- V
Organizational change and development approaches and methods stress nature source effects
conflicts employee counseling approaches extra mural penitential learning programmers case
study
COURSE OUTCOME
To explain group dynamics and demonstrate skills required for working in groups (team building)
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Luthans Fred Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India
bull Mishra MN Behaviour Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
bull Newstrom W John Davis Keith Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India
bull LM Roy Organisational Behaviour S Chand Publication
bull Dr FC Sharma Organisational Behaviour SBPD Publications
INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ACCOUNTING
Course Code 1Y3BBA103
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable students to synthesize related information and evaluate options for most logical and
optimal solution such that they would be able to predict and control cost incurrence and improve
results
UNIT- I
Accounting Basic of Accounting Accounting Mechanics-Double Entry System Classification
Rules for Debit amp Credit Journal Ledger and Trial Balance sub-division of journal Ledger meaning subdivision and mechanics of Posting balancing ledger accounts
UNIT- II
Cash book and Subsidiary books of Accounting Kinds of Cash Book Purchase day book and sale
day Book Bank reconciliation statement Measurement of income- Adjusting entries- rectification of
errors- Adjusted trial balance
UNIT-III
Preparation of financial statements- Trading account Profit amp Loss account Balance Sheet (with
Adjustments) Accounting for Non-profit organization Accounting Procedures Receipts amp payment
accounts income ampexpenditure account problems
UNIT- IV
Depreciation- Meaning Determinant factors Method amp Significance Basic Concepts of hire
purchase amp installments
UNIT- V
Partnership-Preliminary admission of a partner Company Accounts-Issue of shares Debentures
Forfeitures and reissue of shares
COURSE OUTCOME
Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of product and services in the
Organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
SA Siddiqui- Comprehensive Accounting
TS Greval- Introduction to Accounting
Mukherjee and M Accounting (Volume-I)
SN Maheshwar- Introduction to Accounting (Vikas Publication)
CAC Rama Gopal Accounting For Managers (New Age)
BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational
and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business
UNIT I
Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro
environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis
for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business
UNIT II
Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic
systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years
plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent
economic initiatives NitiAyog
UNIT III
Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment
problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance
of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural
Development Problems of Growth
UNIT IV
Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment
Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA
and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act
UNIT V
International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational
Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic
Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-
GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India
COURSE OUTCOME
Outline how an entity operates in a business environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996
Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi
Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan
Chand Delhi
Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA105
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to
articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate
effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the
consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and
quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods
UNIT-I
Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of
Management Functions of the Manager
UNIT- II
Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of
Planning
Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and
type of Policies
Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems
involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques
UNIT- III
Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of
Units and committees
Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship
UNIT- IV
Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training
Directing Nature and purpose and directing
UNIT- V
Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control
process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies
COURSE OUTCOME-
Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques
managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of
managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify
and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own
position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied
audiences
Reference Books
bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher
bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson
Education
bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt
Ltd 4th Ed
bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill
Publications
SEMESTER II
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distributio
n
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor
Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distribu
tion Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Ma
x
Ma
rks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme
nt
Compulsory
Course
English
communication
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA202 Core Course
Management concept amp
Principle
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA203 Core
Course
Environmental
Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA204 Core
Course
Monetary
Economics and
Indian Banking
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA205 Core
Course
Business
Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA205 Business
Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhanceme
nt
Skill Enhancement
Elective
Course-I
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand
Total 600 21 5 - 24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
ENGLISH COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA201
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English
language teaching and content writing sectors
UNIT I
Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning
Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening
UNIT II
Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive
writing expansion of an idea
UNIT III
Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing
(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume
writing covering letter
UNIT IV
Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases
UNIT V
Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb
agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions
(Advanced)
COURSE OUTCOME
To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill
Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul
Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan
Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das
Orient Blackswan
Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press
Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication
MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 202
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and
process of effective controlling in the organization
UNIT I
Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science
Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)
UNIT II
School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and
Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)
Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management
UNIT III
Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing
Staffing Directing and Coordinating
UNIT IV
Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command
Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control
UNIT V
Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure
determination Forms- formal amp informal organization
Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations
COURSE OUTCOME
Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial
functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management
REFERENCE BOOKS
LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management
VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management
James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB
Fred Luthans- OB
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 203
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links
between human and natural systems
UNIT I
Introduction to environmental studies
Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability
and sustainable development
UNIT II
Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an
ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following
ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds
streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)
Unit III
Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to
mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and
over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international
ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate
energy sources growing energy needs case studies
UNIT IV
Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem
diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots
Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and
Informational value
UNIT V
Environmental Pollution
Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution
Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and
Industrial waste Pollution case studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social
and environmental processes
REFERENCE BOOKS
California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London
Routledge
Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security
Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press
Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of
ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006
Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37
McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books
McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the
Twentieth Century
Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders
Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic
Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt
Ltd
Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons
Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi
1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP
Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation
S Chand Publishing New Delhi
MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING
Course Code 1Y3BBA204
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using
statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills
within the contest of subject matter of economics
UNIT I
Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of
Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value
of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income
theory of Money
UNIT II
Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people
Money Market
UNIT III
Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial
Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks
UNIT IV
Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control
methods and Tools of Monetary Policy
UNIT V
RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative
Banks and Rural Banks
COURSE OUTCOME
Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and
mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of
economics
REFERENCE BOOKS
MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi
LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi
Crowther- An Out Line of Money
Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant
KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ
BUSINESS COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA205
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative
scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication
UNIT I
Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports
OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)
UNIT II
Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other
words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis
UNIT III
Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers
Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers
UNIT IV
Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a
Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication
Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)
UNIT V
Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written
Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp
minutes
COURSE OUTCOME
To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical
proficiency in the development of exposition and argument
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wren amp Martin
K Madhukar- Business Communication
VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication
Asha Laul- Business Communication
Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH
SEMESTER III
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotte
d
Credit
s
Course Code Course
Type
Course
Title
Total
Mark
s
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subjec
t wise
Distrib
ution
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA301
Ability
Enhancement
IT Tool for Business
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA302
Core Course
Introduction to Marketing
Management
100 50 17 20 7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA303 Core
Course
Business
Law
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA304 Core
Course
Business
statistics for
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA305
Core
Course
Retail
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA304 Practical
Business
statistics for Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill
Enhancemen
t Elective Course-II
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand Total 600 24
IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 301
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software
components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data
base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT
UNIT-I
Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and
Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World
Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept
UNIT-II
Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different
computer generation
UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and
Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming
Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-
principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart
examples
UNIT-IV
Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation
applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)
Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information
System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems
Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human
Resources Management Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations
Understand the hardware and software components of the computer
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford
2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication
3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication
4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill
INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 302
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply
these to a new or existing business
UNIT I
Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept
amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro
environment
UNIT II
Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of
Product Line amp Product- mix
UNIT III
Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing
decisions Overview of pricing process
UNIT IV
Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product
Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage
UNIT V
Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to
marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct
selling
COURSE OUTCOME
To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct
an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an
appropriate format
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Philip Kotler
2 TN Chabra
3 TK Panda
4 SH Kazmi
5 Arun Kumar
BUSINESS LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 303
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal
environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with
knowledge of legal principles
UNIT-I
Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration
capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts
Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp
Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency
UNIT-II
Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp
Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales
UNIT-III
Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -
Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a
negotiable instrument
UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of
non-registration Dissolution of a firm
UNIT-V
Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of
Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013
COURSE OBJECTIVE
On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to
individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context
Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 ND Kapoor
2 Tulsian
3 MC Kuchhal
4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business
BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 304
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management
UNIT I
Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance
Scope and Limitation of Statistic
UNIT II
Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar
Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive
UNIT III
Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic
Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures
of dispersion
UNIT IV
Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and
Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index
number CPI WPI IIP
UNIT V
Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank
Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series
COURSE OUTCOME
Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically
discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons
2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication
3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication
RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in
India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone
Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT
FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan
Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process
UNIT II
FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail
Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors
Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing
MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer
Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design
and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication
UNIT III
STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty
Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors
UNIT IV
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management
IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service
Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM
Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying
UNIT V
MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at
Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems
at Retail Centers
Course Outcome-
Reference Books
bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education
bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A
Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education
The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge
about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various
aspects of retail operations
After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with
the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the
entire retail operations
SEMESTER IV
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code Course
Type Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subject
wise
Distributio
n
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mark
s
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-401
Ability
Enhanceme
nt
Introduction to
soft skill amp
Team Building
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA-402 Core Course
Introduction to
financial
management
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-403 Core Course
Advertising
and Sales
Promotion
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-404 Core Course
Management
of Human resource
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of
Business
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group
Term End
Practical
Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-404 Practical
Management
of Human
resource
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-405 Practical
Macro
Economics of Business
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
Grand Total 550 22
INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 401
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate
students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners
by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are
learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for
their own learning
UNIT ndash I
General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of
Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences
Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making
Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of
communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of
Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation
UNIT ndash II
Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing
skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice
modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements
General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral
skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive
Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style
UNIT ndash III
Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format
and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in
Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active
Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD
UNIT ndash IV
Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction
Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview
Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing
Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of
Conversation
UNIT ndash V
Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional
Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers
COURSE OUTCOME
To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills
and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin
bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar
INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 402
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital
decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and
raising long-term finance
UNIT I
Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives
Role of finance manager
UNIT II
Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of
investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return
Comparison between NPV amp IRR
UNIT III
Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of
Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning
capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure
UNIT IV
The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage
Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating
Leverage
UNIT V
Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital
estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of
inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order
Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy
COURSE OUTCOME
Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial
manager in the current competitive business scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 IM Pandey
2 P Chandra
3 SP Gupta
4 MY Khan
ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 403
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may
review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos
homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions
UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising
budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for
Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising
UNIT II
Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy
Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role
types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council
of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)
UNIT III
Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring
awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of
design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet
advertising and evaluation of advertising
UNIT IV
Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors
influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option
Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of
consumer schemes and other methods of promotion
UNIT V
Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs
Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales
personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion
COURSE OUTCOME
Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how
these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its
relation to todaylsquos marketplace
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall
Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi
Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi
Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications
MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 404
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource
management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational
setting
UNIT-I
Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with
special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in
strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management
UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge
workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)
Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)
UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of
human resource department and the role of human resource manager
UNITndashIV
Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification
rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation
UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection
(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction
COURSE OUTCOME
To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training
Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical
Behaviour
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi
Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New
Delhi
Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York
HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications
A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications
MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the
important indicators of the economy and their significance
UNIT I
Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of
Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income
Personal and Personal disposable income
UNIT II
Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income
Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and
Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator
Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate
demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy
UNIT III
Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate
demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government
expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary
and fiscal policy
UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary
policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production
Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation
monetary measures fiscal measures
UNIT V
Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and
corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in
open economy
COURSE OUTCOME
To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the
role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson
2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill
3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers
4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson
SEMESTER V
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment
Internal Assessment Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-501
Ability Enhancement
Public Relation amp Corporate Image
50
25
8
10
4
15
6
2
-
-
2
1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and
small Business
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-503
Core Course Principle of
Economics
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-502
Practical Entrepreneurship and
small Business
50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics
50
25 08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Skill Course
Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill Enhancement
Elective Course-III
50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2
Grand Total
600
24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication
1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management
1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India
1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation
1Y3BBA509 Organization Development
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision
1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management
1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA513 Database Management System
1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service
1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy
1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management
1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management
1Y3BBA520 Stores Management
1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA522 Technology Management
1Y3BBA523 Productivity
1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept
1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management
1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System
1Y3BBA529 Health Economics
1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management
(Rural Management Group )
1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity
1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment
1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management
SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES
Non-Technical
Elective No Department Faculty Name
Faculty of Information Technology
I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)
II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)
IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)
V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Management
I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)
II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)
III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development
Faculty of Commerce
I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)
II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Humanities
I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)
II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)
III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Science
I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)
II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)
III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)
IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)
V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Education
I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)
II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)
PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA501
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts
of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling
and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization
UNIT- I
Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash
Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy
Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors
ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public
Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations
UNIT- II
Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service
Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social
Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy
for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation
Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event
Management
UNIT- III
Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash
Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public
Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of
Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control
UNIT IV
Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies
Components of an Individual Image
Advertising and Corporate Image
Public Relations of an Institutions
UNIT V
The Grapevine and Rumours
Stereotype
Propaganda
Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations
applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different
entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling
REFERENCE BOOKS
Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House
Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House
Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University
Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill
This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning
ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-
The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding
processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to
those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic
environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide
evidence which informs those debates
UNIT I
Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of
Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its
environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship
UNIT II
Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship
development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the
Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making
UNIT III
Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that
enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in
Social context Start Up
UNIT IV
Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional
source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital
UNIT V
Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication
2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd
3 Vasant Desai
4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH
PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 503
COURSE OBJECTIVES-
To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production
UNIT- I
Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits
UNIT-II
Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus
movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts
of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications
of demand and supply price rationing price floors
Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price
elasticity cross and income elasticity
UNIT-III
Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility
Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp
Producer surplus
UNIT-IV
Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant
and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue
and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale
UNIT-V
Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of
the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run
equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment
concept
COURSE OUTCOME-
To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011
bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th
edition
2007
bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA
bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press
Oxford
bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore
MARKETING GROUP
INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so
that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to
enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications
UNIT-I
Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC
in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising
appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion
relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship
between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods
Interactive Internet Marketing
UNIT-II
Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach
establishing and allocating promotional budget
UNIT-III
IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different
forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning
creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design
considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client
Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork
UNIT-IV
Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering
key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and
media research
Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration
client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc
UNIT-V
Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing
Communications
COURSE OUTCOME-
To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches
and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to
communicating to target audiences
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc
Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard
D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois
Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing
House
Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and
Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication
Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH
Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing
Communications Pearson Education Limited
Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc
Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House
Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning
Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc
Homewood Illinois
Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic
Approach Cengage Learning
Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India
Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education
SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT
Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE
It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and
distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and
distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners
UNIT-I
Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies
Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling
objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring
Procedure Socialization
UNIT-II
Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program
Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation
Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial
Evaluation of Contest
UNIT-III
Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel
Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales
Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process
UNIT-IV
Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key
tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market
Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation
UNIT-V
Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners
Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict
Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International
Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales
COURSE OUTCOME
Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the
sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans
participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables
REFERENCE BOOKS
Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres
Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books
Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI
L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills
Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets
Greenwood Publishing Group
Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub
ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH
Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing
consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing
research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students
within a course project
UNIT-I
Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing
Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research
Process Marketing Research Designs
UNIT-II
The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques
Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of
Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic
Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical
Analysis Tools
UNIT-III
Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)
ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor
Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental
Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores
Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-
hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number
UNIT-IV
Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product
Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant
Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification
Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing
Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and
their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity
UNIT-V
Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning
in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report
and class presentation of the same
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from
analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor
analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis
REFERENCE BOOKS
Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi
William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi
Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi
Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill
Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research
Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey
Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning
Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp
Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced
in the class
HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP
LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA
Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of
Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity
objectivity and understandings
UNIT-I
The Factories Act 1948
The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923
The Employees State Insurance Act 1948
UNIT-II
The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952
The Payment of gratuity Act 1972
UNIT-III
The Maternity Benefit Act 1961
The Minimum Wages act 1948
UNIT-IV
The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946
The Payment of Bonus Act 1965
UNIT-V
The Apprentices Act 1969
The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959
COURSE OUTCOME ndash
To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour
Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the
organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to
follow the Laws applicable to the establishment
REFERENCE BOOKS
S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications
S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi
Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot
V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House
N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons
INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE
In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our
country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of
Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be
acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the
concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India
UNIT-I
Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors
affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial
relation programme
Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact
of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes
lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry
UNIT-II
Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal
Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective
bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective
collective bargaining collective bargaining in India
UNIT-III
Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education
scheme in India- objectives functions and problems
Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation
schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India
UNIT-IV
Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India
major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions
registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union
UNIT-V
Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery
Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation
submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court
industrial tribunals
Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power
of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute
COURSE OUTCOME
Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective
bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute
resolution
REFERENCE BOOKS
Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts
IIPM Personnel Management in India
Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business
Publication Ltd
Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India
Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India
Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication
Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co
Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law
ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational
culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the
human values in individuals
UNIT-I
Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational
Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development
Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining
and survey research amp feedback methodology
UNIT-II
Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in
organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief
systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development
UNIT-III
Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component
interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief
of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action
UNIT-IV
OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team
building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process
interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions
important for successful OD efforts
UNIT ndash V
HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational
implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional
Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have
improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi
Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York
McGrawhill
Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in
addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a
good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company
UNIT-I
Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm
Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-
Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of
Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering
UNIT-II
Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the
analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount
of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a
Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and
Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis
UNIT-III
Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues
and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements
medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings
Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project
finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing
UNIT-IV
Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of
financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing
Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect
cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization
UNIT-V
Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value
Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic
indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added
Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total
Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)
COURSE OUTCOME
Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and
corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts
REFERENCE BOOKS
Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill
Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons
INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial
environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a
multinational corporation
UNIT-I
Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation
functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial
management International monetary system
UNIT-II
Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories
ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible
exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer
Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options
Currency swaps and interest rate swaps
UNIT-III
Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction
transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction
exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The
national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International
capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)
UNIT-IV
International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic
considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)
Financial risk and cost of capital
Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of
capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-
20 subsidiaries and tax havens
UNIT-V
International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their
comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets
Recent developments in the Euro bond market
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations
and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley
PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall
Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall
Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis
Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co
Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall
Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers
Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath
FINANCIAL INCLUSION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion
such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss
the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to
promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models
UNIT-I
Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting
Access to Financial Services
Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive
Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators
UNIT-II
Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey
Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional
Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card
UNIT-III
Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India
Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations
Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor
UNIT-IV
SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of
microfinance evolved in India
Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial
Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for
Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for
Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People
UNIT-V
Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises
Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion
and Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account
initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage
Publication
Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House
Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech
Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications
Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications
Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing
Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI
Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI
Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag
Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion
Academic Foundation
IT GROUP
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to
manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the
hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment
UNIT-I
The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures
File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base
Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial
Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness
UNIT-II
Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface
with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database
Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design
UNIT-III
Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database
Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database
Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases
UNIT-IV
DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance
Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues
UNIT-V
Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the
field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective
faculty during the coverage of syllabus
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic
concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational
algebra and SQL
REFERENCE BOOKS
Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs
Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan
Press
McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co
MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It
aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing
implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services
UNIT-I
The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development
Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The
Enabling Environment for ITES
UNIT-II
Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled
Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of
Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services
UNIT-III
Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support
Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions
UNIT-IV
International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting
Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in
facilitating Trade in ITESTITES
UNIT-V
Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of
Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of
Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace
Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations
and integrate the learning in handling these complexities
REFERENCE BOOKS
Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat
E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information
technology with various aspects of Software Project Management
UNIT-I
Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision
and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM
Framework
UNIT-II
Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning
Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan
Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration
and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning
UNIT-III
Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an
Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques
Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule
Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools
UNIT-IV
Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance
Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior
Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review
UNIT-V
Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks
Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk
COURSE OUTCOME
Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business
context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business
scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson
Education Ltd
P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp
Tsinghua University Press
R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance
Management Concepts Pub
Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group
B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science
Press
A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications
G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on
understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business
UNIT I
Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm
production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country
UNIT II
Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms
and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business
sector
UNIT III
Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations
relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries
UNIT IV
Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment
and policy
UNIT V
Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies
COURSE OUTCOME
Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper
and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain
REFERENCE BOOKS
Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons
Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ
Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 517
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies
strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms
UNIT I
Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market
structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp
significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of
marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour
UNIT II
Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash
significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product
product life cycle
UNIT III
Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies
and pricing methods
UNIT IV
Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and
standardization
UNIT V
Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural
products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in
agribusiness
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better
understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for
agricultural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH
Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall
Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control
Pearson Edu
Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu
Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India
FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 518
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food
marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen
and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural
political and economic forces over time
UNIT I
Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade
Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of
Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic
factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer
UNIT II
Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling
food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing
in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions
across the chain in food retail food service marketing
UNIT III
4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing
Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system
Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement
Strategies for food retailers
UNIT IV
Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling
Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food
Products
UNIT V
Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training
Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in
retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze
Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing
REFERENCE BOOKS
Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of
India
Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu
Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill
RETAIL GROUP
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in
the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it
UNIT- I
Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management
Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain
networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain
Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network
UNIT- II
Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer
service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs
multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier
Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants
UNIT- III
Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory
models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system
UNIT- IV
COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip
Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION
TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain
Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management
UNIT- V
Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a
Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance
measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics
quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics
COURSE OUTCOME
After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain
which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House
bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers
bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg
bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi
bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan
STORES MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 520
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different
terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned
areas
UNIT- I
Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the
location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design
UNIT- II
Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual
Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors
UNIT- III
Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at
Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores
Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments
UNIT- IV
Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies
Quick Response System
UNIT- V
Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact
on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space
Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization
COURSE OUTCOME
The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern
and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management
bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing
bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach
bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing
bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing
RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 521
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail
Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail
business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management
UNIT I
Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail
equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail
market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-
Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India
UNIT II
Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development
The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and
Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-
Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on
ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response
marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks
The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management
UNIT III
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM
Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch
points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services
Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM
Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding
Common Barriers
UNIT IV
Services Management
Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the
service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-
Supply relationships vehicle routing
UNIT V
Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising
Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping
the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand
management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-
2nd edition 2006
MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational
edititionUS1798
Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education
New Delhi 2003
JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy
Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi
Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy
Pearson Education New Delhi 2004
KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005
Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007
Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House
Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution
rosenbloom and Education Foundation US
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT
TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 522
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
UNIT- I
Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology
Change Implication
UNIT- II
Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying
UNIT- III
Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology
Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management
UNIT- IV
Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology
Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages
UNIT- V
Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise
Level
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to
manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009
bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009
bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson
PRODUCTIVITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 523
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
UNIT- I
Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and
external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work
Contents and Ineffective Time
UNIT- II
Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram
String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart
UNIT- III
Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart
UNIT- IV
Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be
Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement
UNIT- V
Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International
Labour Office Geneva
bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed
bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill
bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India
QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO
Course Code 1Y3BBA 524
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify
the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and
measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current
issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans
UNIT- I
Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives
UNIT- II
Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect
concept
UNIT- III
Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality
UNIT- IV
Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various
control Charts
UNIT- V
Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification
COURSE OUTCOME-
Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to
explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key
aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for
controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp
communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze
the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise
and evaluate quality implementation plans
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay
bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd
bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas
bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd
bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition
7th
Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012
bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM CONCEPTS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 525
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism
To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash
Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp
Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and
development of Tourism through the ages
UNIT II
COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash
Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism
inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious
Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions
incentives sports and adventure tourism
UNIT III
TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash
Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of
motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash
health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and
push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists
UNIT IV
IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash
Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts
- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism
UNIT V
SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-
Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote
Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable
Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and
experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of
tourism experiences
REFERENCES BOOKS
Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling
Publishers Private Limited New Delhi
Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism
Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited
Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill
International
Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors
New Delhi
Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas
Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New
Delhi
TOURISM MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 526
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the basic concept and various components of management
UNIT I
MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-
Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of
management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)
Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management
UNIT II
PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-
Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of
planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by
objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance
and limitation of decision making
UNIT III
ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash
Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of
staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance
appraisal
UNIT IV
DIRECTING ndash
Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation
(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy
theory)
UNIT V
LEADERSHIP-
Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path
Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to
communication
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives
Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of
tourism as well as the impacts of tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc
Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New
Delhi
Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition
AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing
House New Delhi
Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition
Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations
To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism
industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-
Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing
Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and
Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash
Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New
Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING -
Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION -
Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity
Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in
promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level
which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described
REFERENCES BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson
Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition
Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent
learning
UNIT I
Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health
Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural
History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention
UNIT II
Definition and meaning of hospital ndash
Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing
concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of
Hospitals
UNIT III
Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector
Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in
delivering healthcare in India
UNIT IV
Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural
hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description
UNIT V
The reforms of Healthcare System-
The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare
reforms amp Future of Healthcare System
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding
the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the
management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and
organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services
REFERENCE BOOKS
The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991
Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd
Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers
HEALTH ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 529
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and
understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict
peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different
social actions
UNIT I
Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and
importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below
Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits
UNIT II
Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve
techniques and properties of indifference curve
UNIT III
Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash
Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of
Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of
Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of
demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash
Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue
UNIT IV
Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two
variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves
UNIT V
Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash
Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and
monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market
situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price
determination
COURSE OUTCOME
To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from
an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic
evaluation of a health intervention or program
REFERENCE BOOKS
Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR
Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP
Managerial Economics - Gupta GS
Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani
Business Economics - Sharma NK
Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar
Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi
Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL
HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 530
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions
related to records management in the healthcare environment
UNIT I
Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record
keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records
UNIT II
Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health
Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research
UNIT III
Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics
investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing
Pharmacy etc Audits)
UNIT IV
Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems
associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic
Related Groups (DRG)
UNIT V
Medical Registers ndash
Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various
departments amp common problems faced
COURSE OUTCOME
Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New
Delhi 1999
Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995
Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi
George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003
Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 531
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India
To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India
UNIT I
Rural Society in India
Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-
urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and
subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural
life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion
UNIT II
Rural Society
Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social
institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity
and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of
rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT-III
Village India
Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance
contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and
political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology
Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class
UNIT IV
Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics
Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid
growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope
and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -
Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT-V
Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times
Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social
processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India
Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy
Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms
REFERENCE BOOKS
Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi
Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay
PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House
SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication
House Delhi
ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 532
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To explain the nature of environmental studies
To introduce aspects of Natural resources
To introduce aspects of ecosystems
To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation
To introduce aspects of environmental pollution
To create awareness on social issues and environment
To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
UNIT I
Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for
public awareness
UNIT II
Ecosystems
Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and
decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and
Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the
following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic
Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)
UNIT III
Biodiversity and its Conservation
Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification
of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option
Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports
of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-
Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ
Conservation of biodiversity
UNIT IV
Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil
pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste
Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an
individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods
earthquake cyclone and landslides
20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT V
Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water
Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of
People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible
responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and
holocaust
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the nature of environmental studies
Classify renewable and non-renewable resources
Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues
Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation
Analyze aspects of environmental pollution
Describe aspects of social issues and environment
Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner
Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental
Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai
Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA
RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 533
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts
To familiarize Rural marketing strategy
To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems
To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing
To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages
UNIT I
Overview of Rural Marketing
Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing
and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction
Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class
UNIT II
Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for
rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT III
Rural Distribution Systems
Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche
markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of
Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT IV
ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network
(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction
Methodology Group Project work
UNIT V
Market support
Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role
play
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Market their products
Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products
Choose an appropriate distribution system
Apply ICT in rural marketing
Source the finance for rural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India
Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education
Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi
SEMESTER- VI
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allot
ted
Cred
its
Course
Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mark
s
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-601
Core
Course
E- Commerce
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-602 Core
Course
Customer
Relationship Management
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-603 Practical
Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva
Voce
100
50
17
-
-
50
20
- - 4 4
1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Grand Total
550
22
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one
paper presentation certificate in related discipline
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management
1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing
1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA607 Management of Change
1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management
1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management
1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service
1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business
1Y3BBA614 E- Governance
1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management
1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing
1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour
1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning
1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design
1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control
1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan
1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing
1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management
1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care
1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law
(Rural Management Group)
1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System
1Y3BBA632
Panchayati Raj
1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy
E- COMMERCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 601
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is
designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the
technical foundation for understanding information systems
UNIT I
Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting
online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a
business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-
commerce
UNIT II
Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet
(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A
systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing
vs in-house development of a website)
UNIT III
Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension
definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security
intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)
technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and
protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)
UNIT IV
E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards
e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online
banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house
automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments
UNIT V
Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting
online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of
utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online
services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and
entertainment
COURSE OUTCOME-
Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information
systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Management Information System Jawadekar
bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon
bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana
bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)
bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty
CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 602
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of
Customer Relationship Management in the organizations
UNIT- I
Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature
of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive
and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and
evaluating customer business plans
UNIT- II
Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer
database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing
customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively
Planning and making persuasive presentations
UNIT- III
Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality
Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality
managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and
Cross- sell
UNIT- IV
Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations
Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority
setting Target setting setting standards
UNIT- V
Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction
COURSE OUTCOME-
To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship
Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd
Ed Response Books Sage Publication
Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House
Pvt Ltd
Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books
Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management
V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008
Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management
South Western Cengage Learning
Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press
Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age
International
Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan
Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of
India Private Limted New Delhi 2011
S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private
Limted New Delhi 2008
ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 603
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to
work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn
the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final
semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by
the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a
student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their
analytical capabilities and experience
DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)
Title of the study (Cover Page)
Declaration
Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)
Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)
Acknowledgement
Table of Contents
Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used
1 INTRODUCTION
11 Introduction
12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research
12 Significance of the study
13 Scope of the study
14 Research Problem
15 Objective of the study
17 Hypothesis
18 Limitations of the study
2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students
to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they
learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After
the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is
evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report
should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to
provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also
able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business
operations and come up with the ways to tap the
Opportunities
3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
31 Introduction
32 Population of the study
33 Sampling Design
331 Sampling Technique
332 Sampling Method
333 Sample Size
34 Research Instrument
35 Sources of data
351 Primary Data
352 Secondary Data
4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION
5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION
Bibliography
COURSE OUTCOME-
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able
to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and
come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities
MARKETING GROUP
PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 604
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the
context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product
manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions
UNIT- I
Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused
organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management
Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-
cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product
Development
UNIT- II
Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods
of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in
international Market
UNIT- III
Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity
concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand
Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image
UNIT- IV
Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system
measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement
Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market
segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining
and establishing brand values
UNIT- V
Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand
extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time
Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand
Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation
COURSE OUTCOME
The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of
Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for
Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning
implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer
Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi
Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi
Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi
Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education
New Delhi
Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi
Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata
McGraw Hill New Delhi
Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi
STRATEGIC MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 605
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and
implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and
managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver
superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation
through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills
UNIT- I
Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash
Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of
Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying
Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting
Marketing Objectives
UNIT-II
Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching
Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy
Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle
Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies
UNIT-III
Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp
Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models
UNIT- IV
Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives
Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy
Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing
UNIT- V
Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at
different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by
executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and
interdisciplinary nature
REFERENCE BOOKS
Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt
D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin
OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage
Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill
Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp
Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson
Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann
Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India
George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press
J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and
Programs McGraw-Hill Companies
Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub
Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon
P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave
E-MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 606
COURSE OBJECTIVE
It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance
enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns
UNIT- I
Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics
Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan
Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing
UNIT- II
Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in
India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within
communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing
UNIT- III
Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet
as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet
User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-
branding
UNIT- IV
Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-
marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools
Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent
Trends in e-customer service
UNIT- V
Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web
Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing
campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising
Course Outcome
Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics
online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its
implication on marketing strategy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a
networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill
Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall
Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning
Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books
Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial
Times
HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 607
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be
Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students
Understand the importance of managing change
UNIT- I
Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-
Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of
human resource strategies in implementing Change
UNIT-II
Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR
implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation
and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions
UNIT-III
HR Processes amp Change
Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned
change
Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change
UNIT- IV
Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in
employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management
of change implications of downsizing
UNIT- V
Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to
promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and
feedback
Course Outcome
Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more
effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change
process
REFERENCE BOOKS
A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human
Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education
Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill
Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage
South Asia Edition
K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation
Response Books
VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books
CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 608
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical
relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand
anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions
to ensure the organizational and individual success
UNIT-I
Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of
organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business
environment
UNIT-II
Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars
Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations
UNIT- III
Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock
Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system
(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)
UNIT- IV
Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and
repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally
appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural
negotiation and conflicts management
UNIT- V
Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual
countries Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development
of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning
Private Limited
G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill
Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley
Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing
Co
Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell
Business
Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times
McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp
Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation
Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson
Education India
GROUP DYNAMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 609
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group
dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group
effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of
resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding
UNIT-I
Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group
dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B
UNIT-II
Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group
Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash
Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress
UNIT-III
Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group
decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash
conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict
UNIT- IV
Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De
individuation theory
UNIT- V
Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources
of Change in groups
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups
REFERENCE BOOKS
Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley
Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass
Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co
Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE
Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and
application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax
along with basic concepts of VAT
UNIT-I
Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of
Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment
of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-II
Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature
and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax
planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business
UNIT-III
Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net
Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and
Penalties (Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-IV
Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for
service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of
Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)
UNIT- V
VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview
of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT
Law)
COURSE OUTCOME
Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields
REFERENCE BOOKS
Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications
Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub
Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House
T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India
BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson
S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann
R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _
INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 611
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important
components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO
Analysis etc
UNIT-I
INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian
Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role
in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)
UNIT-II
FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different
Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players
Different types of Instruments
UNIT-III
CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI
Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank
UNIT- IV
COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp
Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A
REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA
UNIT- V
NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies
Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture
Capital Funds
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment
Banking companies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication
Financial Services MY Khan TMH
Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication
S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran
ML Seth
FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 612
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and
prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of
uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding
of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role
of internal audit assessments
UNIT I
Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview
UNIT II
Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax
fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and
inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds
UNIT III
Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion
investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports
UNIT IV
Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using
Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)
UNIT V Case Study
1 Two Indian
2 Two international cases
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread
nature of fraud and its economic impact
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation
Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination
Cengage Learning
IT GROUP
INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 613
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security
managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues
in the information assurance field
UNIT I
Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian
Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its
application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law
Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour
Laws E-Media and Print Media
UNIT II
E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security
Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature
UNIT III
Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil
Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-
detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of
Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA
UNIT IV
IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal
issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base
UNIT V
Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of
Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules
COURSE OUTCOME-
Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House
Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co
John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River
Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher
Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University
E-GOVERNANCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 614
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information
Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an
awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the
issues concerning the Cyber security
UNIT I
Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National
E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status
UNIT II
E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process
Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges
UNIT III
E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-
Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics
UNIT IV
Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic
data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber
audit implications for e-governance
Unit V
Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and
construction of a joining table
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill
Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing
Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in
India ICFAI Press Hyderabad
B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill
H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications
V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd
IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 615
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization
UNIT I
IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT
Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo
Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for
IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library
UNIT II
Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service
Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support
Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change
Management Release Management
UNIT III
Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve
Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine
Recovery Data Retention
UNIT IV
Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security
Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection
UNIT V
IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and
Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and
Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of
Internet on Technical Support
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology
REFERENCE BOOKS
Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce
(OGC) TSO UK
Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos
Management Tata McGraw Hill
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 616
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques
and their management
UNIT I
Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations
of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and
distribution
UNIT II
Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and
factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging
of foods
UNIT III
Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food
industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO
etc
UNIT IV
Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products
cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking
confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of
fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH
Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie
Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing
Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH
MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 617
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing
concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs
UNIT I
Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution
channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-
farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing
UNIT II
Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds
Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of
NSC and State Seed Corporation
UNIT III
Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers
Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash
marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer
marketing
UNIT IV
Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash
marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of
electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity
UNIT V
Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm
machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines
implementsEquipmentlsquos
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with
various functional areas of agribusiness
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp
IBH
Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management
Kalyani
Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ
House
FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 618
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis
of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions
UNIT I
Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management
decisions farm management problems
UNIT II
Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle
principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc
UNIT III
Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm
records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement
farm efficiency measures
UNIT IV
Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc
UNIT V
Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to
counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks
and uncertainty
COURSE OUTCOME
Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses
REFERENCE BOOKS
Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall
Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ
Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ
Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ
RETAIL GROUP
BUYER BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA 619
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer
decisions making
UNIT-I
A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic
Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market
Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making
UNIT-II
Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles
of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer
Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and
Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product
Relationship
UNIT-III
Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to
information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-
Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors
Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications
UNIT-IV
Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing
Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-
Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions
Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy
UNIT-V
Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics
lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they
experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and
impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour
COURSE OUTCOME
Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the
choices consumers make
REFERENCE BOOKS
JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata
Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006
Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context
Excel Books NewDelhi-2001
Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous
DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing
Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi
Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining
Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005
Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000
RETAIL PLANNING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 620
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational
decision-making processes in the organized retail
UNIT I
Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail
Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-
Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative
methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management
UNIT II
Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics
Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp
non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion
designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting
Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-
Management of Obsolete goods
UNIT III
Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer
psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical
Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices
UNIT IV
Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-
Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp
Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective
Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer
Rights- Consumer Protection Acts
UNIT V
Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing
Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-
Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels
REFERENCE BOOKS
Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies
Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies
Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson
Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund
amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson
Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice
Hall of India New Delhi
Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies
Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best
People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd
RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 621
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the
value it creates
UNIT I
Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When
How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience
Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency
UNIT II
Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated
Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-
Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-
UNIT III
Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on
Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-
Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display
Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-
UNIT IV
Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium
Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and
Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-
Trade Dealing
UNIT V
Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-
Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating
Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing
to act in ways that increase loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -
Prentice-Hall
Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology
Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales
Promotion Techniques
Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate
Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page
Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books
George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing
Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill
PRODUCTION GROUP
PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL
Course Code 1Y3BBA 622
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a
basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of
facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality
control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an
understanding of the concept of aggregate planning
UNIT- I
Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors
Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-
requisites of PPC
UNIT- II
Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in
Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining
Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control
Models)
UNIT- III
Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection
Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master
production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of
software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II
UNIT- IV
Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n
job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling
Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)
UNIT- V
Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control
function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications
bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi
Deep and Deep Publications
PROCESS REENGINEERING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 623
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of
business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering
projects
UNIT- I
Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp
pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR
UNIT- II
Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering
project organizing for process reengineering
UNIT- III
Process analysis and design
a) Process analysis
(b) Process design
UNIT- IV
Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition
tracking and measuring process performance
UNIT- V
Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology
Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact
measurement
COURSE OUTCOME
To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the
considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-
engineering project
REFERENCE BOOKS
Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata
McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater
Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester
John Wiley amp Sons
WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn
the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time
standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering
to design of work systems
UNIT- I
Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos
productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity
Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time
Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities
Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was
developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph
UNIT- II
Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting
up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion
Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand
Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and
Design of Tools amp Equipment
UNIT- III
Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard
from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and
Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work
Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling
UNIT- IV
Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage
Incentive Plans
The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for
Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action
UNIT-V
Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion
Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System
Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts
Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional
including understanding the need for quality
REFERENCE BOOKS
iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill
ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation
Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp
Sons
Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall
Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall
Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press
Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall
Mall East and London
Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN
Course Code 1Y3BBA 625
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in
it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative
impacts of tourism development
UNIT I
Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism
Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of
Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in
Tourism Development
UNIT II
Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning
system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos
Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-
Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in
learning system
UNIT III
Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable
development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist
Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash
The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash
Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities
UNIT IV
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage
of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment
UNIT IV
Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the
Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National
Policy on Ecology and Environment
COURSE OUTCOME
To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global
perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international
tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for
sustainable tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash
Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications
Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers
Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William
Heinemann Ltd
Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices
London Pitman Publishing
Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York
Kendall Hunt Publishing Company
Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan
Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman
Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford
University Press
New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable
Development Approach VNR and New York
TOURISM MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 626
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism
and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing
that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products
before the stakeholders of tourism industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing
Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and
Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market
Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing
Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for
different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing
Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales
promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital
communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future
It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are
needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be
a part of this growth
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar
Thomson Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd
edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of
Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry
UNIT I
HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of
Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads
ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and
marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents
UNIT II
RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief
History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway
Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway
station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains
express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world
heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes
UNIT III
AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth
Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled
Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature
Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players
Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and
performance marketing strategies of Air India
UNIT IV
WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover
crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going
traffic) ndash National waterways
UNIT V
CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing
stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and
Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation
COURSE OUTCOME
Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of
the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management
REFERENCE BOOKS
RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 628
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of
its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing
knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital
Management
UNIT I
Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its
impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need
principles purpose
UNIT II
Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and
their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply
department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health
and patient safety
UNIT III
Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of
biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules
standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging
transportation amp storage
UNIT IV
Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier
methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal
decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of
wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan
UNIT V
Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party
insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash
meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural
disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague
typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics
COURSE OUTCOME
To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost
containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges
arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs
and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its
various components
REFERENCE BOOKS
Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication
First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn
Park k - Preventive and social medicine
Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot
MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 629
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted
advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public
relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any
potential crisis that may arise
UNIT I
Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches
to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of
marketing functions of marketing
UNIT II
Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment
Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market
segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash
positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing
UNIT III
Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior
(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying
decision process
UNIT IV
Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp
deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product
development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling
UNIT V
Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing
policies and strategies
Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management
decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels
COURSE OUTCOME
Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an
integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare
professionals and the public
REFERENCE BOOKS
Philip Kotler - marketing management
Wiliam jStanton - marketing management
Sherleker S A - marketing management
J C Gandhi - marketing management
Davar - modern marketing management
Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub
P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research
Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research
HOSPITALS RELATED LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 630
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of
common-law development
UNIT ndash I
Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties
sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance
act trust act societies registration act
UNIT ndashII
Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of
human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act
1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971
mental health act patient consent
UNIT ndash III
Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948
narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods
act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration
UNIT ndash IV
Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act
1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916
maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing
order) act trade union act industrial disputes act
UNIT ndashV
Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in
hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical
negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical
establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal
pronouncements rulings and regulations
REFERENCE BOOKS
Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer
Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law
Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 631
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India
To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural
Production system in India
To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India
To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development
UNIT -1
Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions
ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology
Case analysis and discussion
UNIT II
Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash
Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture
UNIT III
Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-
Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India
UNIT IV
Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of
holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus
land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas
UNIT V
Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash
Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and
schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM
COURSE OUTCOMES
Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management
Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India
Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development
REFERENCE BOOKS
Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution
Can We Make London Department for International Development
Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House
PANCHAYATI RAJ
Course Code 1Y3BBA632
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration
To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites
To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance
To provide insights on Rural Administration
To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes
UNIT I
Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction
Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges
Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration
(Official and non-official) and report submission
UNIT III
Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission
UNIT IV
Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and
Block- Panchayat relationship
Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play
UNIT V
Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government
Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan
Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
COURSE OUTCOMES
Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village
Development interventions
Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its
power Structure
Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and
Plans
Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes
32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959
Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise
Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi
Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New
Delhi
RURAL ECONOMY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 633
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy
To help students understand their role in rural economic development
To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources
To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation
To create awareness on rural economic development
UNIT I
Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-
Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries
(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in
agriculture individual production other production services
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-
Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash
Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land
Reforms
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
UNIT III
Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation
programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs
UNIT IV
Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work
UNIT V
Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing
ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for
the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy
Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village
Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues
Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation
Facilities
Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi
Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi
Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic
Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New
Delhi
INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER
Mid Semester Examination (MSE)
There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5
descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered
End Semester Examination (ESE)
There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks
each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of
10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered
Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations
The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment
Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be
applicable
(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )
Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type
End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size
Vision Strive to achieve a unique blend of academic excellence and management skills to address the
needs of the business environment in a manner that lets each participant achieve his potential in
a value based character
The BBA program seeks to develop students into leaders ready to tackle the challenges of
todaylsquos global business environment
Adapt and find innovative methods for problem solving to cope with unforeseen events and to
manage in unpredictable environments
Manage contemporary societal and global issues resulting from diversity
Appreciate individual ethical behavior and discharge community responsibilities in
organization and society
Mission To leverage their potential by creating an ecosystem that instills critical thinking and analytical
mind set
To develop leaders of competencies in a rapidly changing business environment
To nurture the future business leaders through imparting high quality value-based teaching
research and practical based training that meets industry expectations
To foster a passion for learning and creative thinking among the student and teaching
community
Identify and formulate research problems and analyze complex management and
communication issues
Design solutions for complex managerial and communication problems and to develop the
same so as to meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for employability
BBA PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES AND OUTCOMES
BBA PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES-
Develop viable alternatives and make effective decisions relating to business ethics and social responsibility
Identify and analyze relevant global factors that influence decision-making
To apply appropriate techniques resources and multimedia tools for enhancement of skills
Apply knowledge based skill to assess and solve social-cultural and legal issues
Understand the impact of the professional management literary and soft skills in societal and
environmental contexts
To adopt and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities
To achieve appropriate communication skills and higher levels of proficiency for
Successful career in Industry Business and Entrepreneurship
BBA PROGRAMME OUTCOMES-
Towards the end of the program students will be able to
Provide students with a broad range of managerial capabilities the capacity for critical
thinking communication and problem‐solving skills legal and ethical behavior
Prepare graduates for diverse careers in global management administration and
entrepreneurship through a well‐rounded business education with a focus on global business
operations emerging markets and technology‐enabled organizations
Analyze socio-political-economic environment of business organizations
Communicate effectively in different contexts
Develop functional and general management skills
Build and Demonstrate leadership teamwork and social skills
Evaluate different business problems using analytical creative and integrative abilities
SEMESTER I
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Ist SEMESTER
Course Details
External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allot
ted
Cred
its
Course Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor
Sessional
L
T
P
Subj
ect
wise
Distr
ibuti
on
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Ma
x
Mar
ks
Min
Mark
s
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mark
s
Theory Group
1Y3BBA101
Ability Enhanc
ement
Compul
sory
Course
MIL Hindi Communication
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA102
Core Course
Organization Behavior 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA103 Core
Course
Introduction to
Business Accountancy
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA104 Core Course
Business Environment
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA105 Core
Course
Principles of
Management 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA102
Organization
Behavior 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
1Y3BBA104 Business
Environment 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Grand
Total 600 20 5 - 24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
MIL HINDI COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 101
fgUnh Okdjk oa laizskk
इकाई-I
हहनदीवयाकरण और रचना सजञा सरवनाम हरशष ाण हिया अवयय कारक रचन सहधउपसगव परतयय
तथासमास
ह गहनणवय पयावयराची शबद हर ोम शबद अन क शबदो क ह ए एक शबद
शबद शदधि राकय शदधि महारर और ोकोदधिया पललरन एर सकष पण
इकाई-II
हनबध क ातथासमसामहयक एरराषटर ीय हरषया परहनबधा खन
इकाई-III
सपर षण (सचार)
-सपर षण की अरधारणऔरमहतव सपरष ाण क ह ए आरशयक शत सपरष ाण क परकार
सपर षणकामाधयम सपर षणक ा सपर षण की तकनीक राचनक ा समाचारराचन साकषातकारक ा
रचनातमक खनका कषय रचनातमक ख ानकाआधार भारऔरहरचारोकीपरसतहत राक क ा की
उपयोहगता
अनशसितपसतक -
रहतवयाकरणभासकर डा 0 रचनद रकमार
रहतहनबधाभासकर डा 0 रचनदर कमार
आधहनकहहनदीवयाकरणऔररचना डा 0 रासद रननदनपरसाद
रचनामानस परो0 राम शवरनाथहतरारी
वयरहाररकहहनदी डा 0 जग बहादरपाणड य
रचनातमक खन डा 0 रमश ागौतम
राजहसहहनदीहनबध परो0 आर0 एन0 गौड़
सफ हहनदीहनबध रतन शवर
हनबध सहचर डा 0 कषमणपरसाद
उपकारमहारर और ाक ोदधियाा पार 0 राज शवरपरसादचतरव दी
कहाहनयोकहारता की परतापअनम
समपर षणपरकहहनदीभाषाहशकषण डा 0 रशनानारग
श ीहरजञान डा 0 सर शकमार
श ीहरजञानपरहतमानऔरहरशल षण डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo
श ीहरजञानकाइहतहास डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo
ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA102
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students study the behaviour of individuals and groups as part of the social and technical system in
the workplace They examine individual and group behaviour communication conflict and various
management styles motivational techniques and coordination in the work environment and apply
these concepts to the development of an organizations human resources
UNIT I
Organization Overview of the concept and relevance of organizational Behaviour meaning Nature
Scope features approaches model challenges and opportunities functions amp Role of manager
Planning process Decision making Process
UNIT II
Foundation of individual Behavior Biography ability personality (determinants and models)
perception (definition components factors affecting perception in decision making) Values
Beliefs etc
UNIT III
Individual Behavior- Attitude Definition importance Types Attitude regarding- Job
Satisfaction Involvement commitment effects of employee attitude changing attitudes
Learning Definition nature theories classical conditioning operant conditioning cognitive
Learning Social learning
UNIT IV
Motivation Concept and theories (Maslow McGregor Herzberg ERG) merits amp demerits Group
dynamics amp Team work Nature theories types of group Definition Stages of Group Development
effectiveness potential problems Analysis of Interpersonal Relationship Transactional Analysis
Johari Window
UNIT- V
Organizational change and development approaches and methods stress nature source effects
conflicts employee counseling approaches extra mural penitential learning programmers case
study
COURSE OUTCOME
To explain group dynamics and demonstrate skills required for working in groups (team building)
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Luthans Fred Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India
bull Mishra MN Behaviour Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
bull Newstrom W John Davis Keith Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India
bull LM Roy Organisational Behaviour S Chand Publication
bull Dr FC Sharma Organisational Behaviour SBPD Publications
INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ACCOUNTING
Course Code 1Y3BBA103
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable students to synthesize related information and evaluate options for most logical and
optimal solution such that they would be able to predict and control cost incurrence and improve
results
UNIT- I
Accounting Basic of Accounting Accounting Mechanics-Double Entry System Classification
Rules for Debit amp Credit Journal Ledger and Trial Balance sub-division of journal Ledger meaning subdivision and mechanics of Posting balancing ledger accounts
UNIT- II
Cash book and Subsidiary books of Accounting Kinds of Cash Book Purchase day book and sale
day Book Bank reconciliation statement Measurement of income- Adjusting entries- rectification of
errors- Adjusted trial balance
UNIT-III
Preparation of financial statements- Trading account Profit amp Loss account Balance Sheet (with
Adjustments) Accounting for Non-profit organization Accounting Procedures Receipts amp payment
accounts income ampexpenditure account problems
UNIT- IV
Depreciation- Meaning Determinant factors Method amp Significance Basic Concepts of hire
purchase amp installments
UNIT- V
Partnership-Preliminary admission of a partner Company Accounts-Issue of shares Debentures
Forfeitures and reissue of shares
COURSE OUTCOME
Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of product and services in the
Organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
SA Siddiqui- Comprehensive Accounting
TS Greval- Introduction to Accounting
Mukherjee and M Accounting (Volume-I)
SN Maheshwar- Introduction to Accounting (Vikas Publication)
CAC Rama Gopal Accounting For Managers (New Age)
BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational
and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business
UNIT I
Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro
environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis
for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business
UNIT II
Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic
systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years
plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent
economic initiatives NitiAyog
UNIT III
Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment
problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance
of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural
Development Problems of Growth
UNIT IV
Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment
Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA
and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act
UNIT V
International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational
Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic
Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-
GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India
COURSE OUTCOME
Outline how an entity operates in a business environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996
Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi
Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan
Chand Delhi
Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA105
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to
articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate
effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the
consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and
quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods
UNIT-I
Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of
Management Functions of the Manager
UNIT- II
Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of
Planning
Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and
type of Policies
Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems
involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques
UNIT- III
Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of
Units and committees
Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship
UNIT- IV
Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training
Directing Nature and purpose and directing
UNIT- V
Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control
process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies
COURSE OUTCOME-
Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques
managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of
managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify
and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own
position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied
audiences
Reference Books
bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher
bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson
Education
bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt
Ltd 4th Ed
bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill
Publications
SEMESTER II
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distributio
n
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor
Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distribu
tion Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Ma
x
Ma
rks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme
nt
Compulsory
Course
English
communication
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA202 Core Course
Management concept amp
Principle
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA203 Core
Course
Environmental
Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA204 Core
Course
Monetary
Economics and
Indian Banking
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA205 Core
Course
Business
Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA205 Business
Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhanceme
nt
Skill Enhancement
Elective
Course-I
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand
Total 600 21 5 - 24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
ENGLISH COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA201
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English
language teaching and content writing sectors
UNIT I
Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning
Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening
UNIT II
Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive
writing expansion of an idea
UNIT III
Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing
(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume
writing covering letter
UNIT IV
Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases
UNIT V
Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb
agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions
(Advanced)
COURSE OUTCOME
To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill
Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul
Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan
Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das
Orient Blackswan
Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press
Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication
MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 202
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and
process of effective controlling in the organization
UNIT I
Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science
Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)
UNIT II
School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and
Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)
Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management
UNIT III
Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing
Staffing Directing and Coordinating
UNIT IV
Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command
Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control
UNIT V
Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure
determination Forms- formal amp informal organization
Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations
COURSE OUTCOME
Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial
functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management
REFERENCE BOOKS
LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management
VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management
James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB
Fred Luthans- OB
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 203
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links
between human and natural systems
UNIT I
Introduction to environmental studies
Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability
and sustainable development
UNIT II
Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an
ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following
ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds
streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)
Unit III
Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to
mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and
over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international
ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate
energy sources growing energy needs case studies
UNIT IV
Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem
diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots
Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and
Informational value
UNIT V
Environmental Pollution
Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution
Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and
Industrial waste Pollution case studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social
and environmental processes
REFERENCE BOOKS
California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London
Routledge
Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security
Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press
Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of
ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006
Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37
McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books
McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the
Twentieth Century
Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders
Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic
Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt
Ltd
Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons
Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi
1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP
Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation
S Chand Publishing New Delhi
MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING
Course Code 1Y3BBA204
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using
statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills
within the contest of subject matter of economics
UNIT I
Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of
Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value
of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income
theory of Money
UNIT II
Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people
Money Market
UNIT III
Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial
Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks
UNIT IV
Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control
methods and Tools of Monetary Policy
UNIT V
RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative
Banks and Rural Banks
COURSE OUTCOME
Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and
mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of
economics
REFERENCE BOOKS
MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi
LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi
Crowther- An Out Line of Money
Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant
KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ
BUSINESS COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA205
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative
scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication
UNIT I
Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports
OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)
UNIT II
Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other
words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis
UNIT III
Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers
Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers
UNIT IV
Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a
Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication
Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)
UNIT V
Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written
Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp
minutes
COURSE OUTCOME
To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical
proficiency in the development of exposition and argument
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wren amp Martin
K Madhukar- Business Communication
VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication
Asha Laul- Business Communication
Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH
SEMESTER III
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotte
d
Credit
s
Course Code Course
Type
Course
Title
Total
Mark
s
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subjec
t wise
Distrib
ution
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA301
Ability
Enhancement
IT Tool for Business
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA302
Core Course
Introduction to Marketing
Management
100 50 17 20 7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA303 Core
Course
Business
Law
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA304 Core
Course
Business
statistics for
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA305
Core
Course
Retail
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA304 Practical
Business
statistics for Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill
Enhancemen
t Elective Course-II
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand Total 600 24
IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 301
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software
components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data
base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT
UNIT-I
Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and
Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World
Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept
UNIT-II
Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different
computer generation
UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and
Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming
Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-
principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart
examples
UNIT-IV
Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation
applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)
Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information
System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems
Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human
Resources Management Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations
Understand the hardware and software components of the computer
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford
2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication
3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication
4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill
INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 302
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply
these to a new or existing business
UNIT I
Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept
amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro
environment
UNIT II
Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of
Product Line amp Product- mix
UNIT III
Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing
decisions Overview of pricing process
UNIT IV
Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product
Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage
UNIT V
Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to
marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct
selling
COURSE OUTCOME
To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct
an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an
appropriate format
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Philip Kotler
2 TN Chabra
3 TK Panda
4 SH Kazmi
5 Arun Kumar
BUSINESS LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 303
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal
environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with
knowledge of legal principles
UNIT-I
Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration
capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts
Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp
Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency
UNIT-II
Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp
Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales
UNIT-III
Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -
Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a
negotiable instrument
UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of
non-registration Dissolution of a firm
UNIT-V
Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of
Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013
COURSE OBJECTIVE
On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to
individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context
Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 ND Kapoor
2 Tulsian
3 MC Kuchhal
4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business
BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 304
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management
UNIT I
Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance
Scope and Limitation of Statistic
UNIT II
Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar
Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive
UNIT III
Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic
Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures
of dispersion
UNIT IV
Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and
Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index
number CPI WPI IIP
UNIT V
Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank
Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series
COURSE OUTCOME
Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically
discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons
2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication
3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication
RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in
India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone
Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT
FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan
Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process
UNIT II
FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail
Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors
Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing
MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer
Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design
and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication
UNIT III
STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty
Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors
UNIT IV
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management
IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service
Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM
Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying
UNIT V
MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at
Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems
at Retail Centers
Course Outcome-
Reference Books
bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education
bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A
Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education
The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge
about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various
aspects of retail operations
After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with
the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the
entire retail operations
SEMESTER IV
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code Course
Type Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subject
wise
Distributio
n
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mark
s
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-401
Ability
Enhanceme
nt
Introduction to
soft skill amp
Team Building
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA-402 Core Course
Introduction to
financial
management
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-403 Core Course
Advertising
and Sales
Promotion
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-404 Core Course
Management
of Human resource
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of
Business
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group
Term End
Practical
Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-404 Practical
Management
of Human
resource
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-405 Practical
Macro
Economics of Business
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
Grand Total 550 22
INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 401
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate
students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners
by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are
learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for
their own learning
UNIT ndash I
General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of
Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences
Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making
Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of
communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of
Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation
UNIT ndash II
Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing
skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice
modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements
General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral
skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive
Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style
UNIT ndash III
Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format
and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in
Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active
Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD
UNIT ndash IV
Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction
Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview
Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing
Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of
Conversation
UNIT ndash V
Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional
Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers
COURSE OUTCOME
To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills
and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin
bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar
INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 402
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital
decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and
raising long-term finance
UNIT I
Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives
Role of finance manager
UNIT II
Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of
investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return
Comparison between NPV amp IRR
UNIT III
Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of
Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning
capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure
UNIT IV
The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage
Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating
Leverage
UNIT V
Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital
estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of
inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order
Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy
COURSE OUTCOME
Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial
manager in the current competitive business scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 IM Pandey
2 P Chandra
3 SP Gupta
4 MY Khan
ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 403
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may
review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos
homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions
UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising
budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for
Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising
UNIT II
Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy
Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role
types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council
of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)
UNIT III
Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring
awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of
design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet
advertising and evaluation of advertising
UNIT IV
Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors
influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option
Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of
consumer schemes and other methods of promotion
UNIT V
Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs
Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales
personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion
COURSE OUTCOME
Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how
these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its
relation to todaylsquos marketplace
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall
Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi
Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi
Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications
MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 404
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource
management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational
setting
UNIT-I
Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with
special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in
strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management
UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge
workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)
Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)
UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of
human resource department and the role of human resource manager
UNITndashIV
Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification
rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation
UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection
(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction
COURSE OUTCOME
To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training
Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical
Behaviour
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi
Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New
Delhi
Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York
HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications
A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications
MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the
important indicators of the economy and their significance
UNIT I
Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of
Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income
Personal and Personal disposable income
UNIT II
Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income
Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and
Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator
Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate
demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy
UNIT III
Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate
demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government
expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary
and fiscal policy
UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary
policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production
Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation
monetary measures fiscal measures
UNIT V
Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and
corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in
open economy
COURSE OUTCOME
To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the
role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson
2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill
3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers
4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson
SEMESTER V
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment
Internal Assessment Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-501
Ability Enhancement
Public Relation amp Corporate Image
50
25
8
10
4
15
6
2
-
-
2
1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and
small Business
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-503
Core Course Principle of
Economics
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-502
Practical Entrepreneurship and
small Business
50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics
50
25 08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Skill Course
Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill Enhancement
Elective Course-III
50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2
Grand Total
600
24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication
1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management
1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India
1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation
1Y3BBA509 Organization Development
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision
1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management
1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA513 Database Management System
1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service
1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy
1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management
1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management
1Y3BBA520 Stores Management
1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA522 Technology Management
1Y3BBA523 Productivity
1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept
1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management
1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System
1Y3BBA529 Health Economics
1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management
(Rural Management Group )
1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity
1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment
1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management
SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES
Non-Technical
Elective No Department Faculty Name
Faculty of Information Technology
I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)
II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)
IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)
V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Management
I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)
II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)
III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development
Faculty of Commerce
I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)
II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Humanities
I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)
II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)
III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Science
I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)
II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)
III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)
IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)
V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Education
I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)
II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)
PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA501
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts
of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling
and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization
UNIT- I
Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash
Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy
Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors
ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public
Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations
UNIT- II
Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service
Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social
Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy
for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation
Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event
Management
UNIT- III
Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash
Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public
Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of
Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control
UNIT IV
Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies
Components of an Individual Image
Advertising and Corporate Image
Public Relations of an Institutions
UNIT V
The Grapevine and Rumours
Stereotype
Propaganda
Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations
applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different
entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling
REFERENCE BOOKS
Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House
Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House
Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University
Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill
This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning
ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-
The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding
processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to
those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic
environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide
evidence which informs those debates
UNIT I
Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of
Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its
environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship
UNIT II
Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship
development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the
Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making
UNIT III
Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that
enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in
Social context Start Up
UNIT IV
Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional
source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital
UNIT V
Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication
2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd
3 Vasant Desai
4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH
PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 503
COURSE OBJECTIVES-
To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production
UNIT- I
Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits
UNIT-II
Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus
movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts
of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications
of demand and supply price rationing price floors
Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price
elasticity cross and income elasticity
UNIT-III
Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility
Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp
Producer surplus
UNIT-IV
Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant
and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue
and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale
UNIT-V
Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of
the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run
equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment
concept
COURSE OUTCOME-
To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011
bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th
edition
2007
bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA
bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press
Oxford
bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore
MARKETING GROUP
INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so
that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to
enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications
UNIT-I
Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC
in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising
appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion
relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship
between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods
Interactive Internet Marketing
UNIT-II
Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach
establishing and allocating promotional budget
UNIT-III
IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different
forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning
creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design
considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client
Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork
UNIT-IV
Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering
key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and
media research
Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration
client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc
UNIT-V
Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing
Communications
COURSE OUTCOME-
To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches
and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to
communicating to target audiences
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc
Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard
D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois
Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing
House
Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and
Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication
Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH
Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing
Communications Pearson Education Limited
Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc
Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House
Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning
Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc
Homewood Illinois
Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic
Approach Cengage Learning
Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India
Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education
SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT
Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE
It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and
distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and
distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners
UNIT-I
Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies
Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling
objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring
Procedure Socialization
UNIT-II
Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program
Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation
Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial
Evaluation of Contest
UNIT-III
Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel
Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales
Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process
UNIT-IV
Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key
tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market
Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation
UNIT-V
Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners
Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict
Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International
Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales
COURSE OUTCOME
Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the
sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans
participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables
REFERENCE BOOKS
Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres
Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books
Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI
L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills
Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets
Greenwood Publishing Group
Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub
ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH
Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing
consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing
research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students
within a course project
UNIT-I
Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing
Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research
Process Marketing Research Designs
UNIT-II
The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques
Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of
Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic
Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical
Analysis Tools
UNIT-III
Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)
ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor
Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental
Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores
Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-
hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number
UNIT-IV
Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product
Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant
Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification
Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing
Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and
their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity
UNIT-V
Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning
in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report
and class presentation of the same
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from
analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor
analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis
REFERENCE BOOKS
Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi
William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi
Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi
Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill
Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research
Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey
Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning
Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp
Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced
in the class
HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP
LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA
Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of
Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity
objectivity and understandings
UNIT-I
The Factories Act 1948
The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923
The Employees State Insurance Act 1948
UNIT-II
The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952
The Payment of gratuity Act 1972
UNIT-III
The Maternity Benefit Act 1961
The Minimum Wages act 1948
UNIT-IV
The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946
The Payment of Bonus Act 1965
UNIT-V
The Apprentices Act 1969
The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959
COURSE OUTCOME ndash
To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour
Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the
organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to
follow the Laws applicable to the establishment
REFERENCE BOOKS
S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications
S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi
Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot
V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House
N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons
INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE
In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our
country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of
Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be
acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the
concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India
UNIT-I
Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors
affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial
relation programme
Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact
of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes
lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry
UNIT-II
Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal
Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective
bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective
collective bargaining collective bargaining in India
UNIT-III
Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education
scheme in India- objectives functions and problems
Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation
schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India
UNIT-IV
Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India
major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions
registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union
UNIT-V
Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery
Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation
submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court
industrial tribunals
Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power
of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute
COURSE OUTCOME
Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective
bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute
resolution
REFERENCE BOOKS
Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts
IIPM Personnel Management in India
Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business
Publication Ltd
Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India
Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India
Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication
Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co
Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law
ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational
culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the
human values in individuals
UNIT-I
Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational
Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development
Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining
and survey research amp feedback methodology
UNIT-II
Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in
organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief
systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development
UNIT-III
Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component
interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief
of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action
UNIT-IV
OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team
building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process
interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions
important for successful OD efforts
UNIT ndash V
HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational
implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional
Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have
improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi
Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York
McGrawhill
Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in
addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a
good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company
UNIT-I
Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm
Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-
Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of
Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering
UNIT-II
Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the
analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount
of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a
Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and
Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis
UNIT-III
Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues
and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements
medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings
Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project
finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing
UNIT-IV
Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of
financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing
Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect
cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization
UNIT-V
Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value
Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic
indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added
Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total
Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)
COURSE OUTCOME
Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and
corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts
REFERENCE BOOKS
Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill
Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons
INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial
environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a
multinational corporation
UNIT-I
Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation
functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial
management International monetary system
UNIT-II
Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories
ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible
exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer
Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options
Currency swaps and interest rate swaps
UNIT-III
Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction
transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction
exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The
national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International
capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)
UNIT-IV
International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic
considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)
Financial risk and cost of capital
Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of
capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-
20 subsidiaries and tax havens
UNIT-V
International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their
comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets
Recent developments in the Euro bond market
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations
and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley
PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall
Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall
Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis
Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co
Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall
Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers
Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath
FINANCIAL INCLUSION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion
such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss
the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to
promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models
UNIT-I
Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting
Access to Financial Services
Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive
Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators
UNIT-II
Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey
Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional
Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card
UNIT-III
Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India
Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations
Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor
UNIT-IV
SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of
microfinance evolved in India
Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial
Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for
Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for
Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People
UNIT-V
Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises
Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion
and Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account
initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage
Publication
Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House
Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech
Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications
Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications
Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing
Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI
Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI
Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag
Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion
Academic Foundation
IT GROUP
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to
manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the
hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment
UNIT-I
The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures
File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base
Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial
Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness
UNIT-II
Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface
with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database
Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design
UNIT-III
Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database
Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database
Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases
UNIT-IV
DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance
Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues
UNIT-V
Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the
field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective
faculty during the coverage of syllabus
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic
concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational
algebra and SQL
REFERENCE BOOKS
Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs
Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan
Press
McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co
MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It
aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing
implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services
UNIT-I
The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development
Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The
Enabling Environment for ITES
UNIT-II
Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled
Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of
Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services
UNIT-III
Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support
Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions
UNIT-IV
International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting
Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in
facilitating Trade in ITESTITES
UNIT-V
Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of
Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of
Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace
Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations
and integrate the learning in handling these complexities
REFERENCE BOOKS
Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat
E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information
technology with various aspects of Software Project Management
UNIT-I
Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision
and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM
Framework
UNIT-II
Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning
Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan
Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration
and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning
UNIT-III
Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an
Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques
Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule
Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools
UNIT-IV
Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance
Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior
Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review
UNIT-V
Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks
Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk
COURSE OUTCOME
Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business
context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business
scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson
Education Ltd
P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp
Tsinghua University Press
R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance
Management Concepts Pub
Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group
B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science
Press
A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications
G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on
understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business
UNIT I
Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm
production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country
UNIT II
Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms
and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business
sector
UNIT III
Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations
relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries
UNIT IV
Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment
and policy
UNIT V
Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies
COURSE OUTCOME
Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper
and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain
REFERENCE BOOKS
Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons
Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ
Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 517
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies
strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms
UNIT I
Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market
structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp
significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of
marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour
UNIT II
Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash
significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product
product life cycle
UNIT III
Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies
and pricing methods
UNIT IV
Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and
standardization
UNIT V
Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural
products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in
agribusiness
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better
understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for
agricultural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH
Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall
Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control
Pearson Edu
Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu
Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India
FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 518
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food
marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen
and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural
political and economic forces over time
UNIT I
Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade
Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of
Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic
factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer
UNIT II
Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling
food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing
in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions
across the chain in food retail food service marketing
UNIT III
4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing
Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system
Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement
Strategies for food retailers
UNIT IV
Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling
Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food
Products
UNIT V
Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training
Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in
retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze
Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing
REFERENCE BOOKS
Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of
India
Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu
Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill
RETAIL GROUP
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in
the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it
UNIT- I
Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management
Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain
networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain
Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network
UNIT- II
Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer
service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs
multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier
Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants
UNIT- III
Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory
models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system
UNIT- IV
COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip
Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION
TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain
Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management
UNIT- V
Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a
Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance
measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics
quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics
COURSE OUTCOME
After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain
which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House
bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers
bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg
bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi
bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan
STORES MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 520
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different
terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned
areas
UNIT- I
Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the
location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design
UNIT- II
Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual
Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors
UNIT- III
Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at
Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores
Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments
UNIT- IV
Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies
Quick Response System
UNIT- V
Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact
on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space
Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization
COURSE OUTCOME
The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern
and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management
bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing
bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach
bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing
bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing
RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 521
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail
Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail
business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management
UNIT I
Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail
equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail
market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-
Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India
UNIT II
Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development
The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and
Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-
Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on
ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response
marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks
The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management
UNIT III
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM
Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch
points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services
Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM
Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding
Common Barriers
UNIT IV
Services Management
Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the
service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-
Supply relationships vehicle routing
UNIT V
Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising
Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping
the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand
management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-
2nd edition 2006
MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational
edititionUS1798
Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education
New Delhi 2003
JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy
Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi
Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy
Pearson Education New Delhi 2004
KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005
Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007
Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House
Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution
rosenbloom and Education Foundation US
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT
TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 522
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
UNIT- I
Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology
Change Implication
UNIT- II
Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying
UNIT- III
Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology
Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management
UNIT- IV
Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology
Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages
UNIT- V
Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise
Level
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to
manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009
bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009
bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson
PRODUCTIVITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 523
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
UNIT- I
Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and
external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work
Contents and Ineffective Time
UNIT- II
Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram
String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart
UNIT- III
Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart
UNIT- IV
Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be
Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement
UNIT- V
Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International
Labour Office Geneva
bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed
bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill
bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India
QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO
Course Code 1Y3BBA 524
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify
the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and
measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current
issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans
UNIT- I
Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives
UNIT- II
Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect
concept
UNIT- III
Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality
UNIT- IV
Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various
control Charts
UNIT- V
Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification
COURSE OUTCOME-
Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to
explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key
aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for
controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp
communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze
the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise
and evaluate quality implementation plans
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay
bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd
bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas
bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd
bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition
7th
Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012
bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM CONCEPTS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 525
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism
To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash
Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp
Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and
development of Tourism through the ages
UNIT II
COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash
Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism
inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious
Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions
incentives sports and adventure tourism
UNIT III
TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash
Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of
motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash
health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and
push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists
UNIT IV
IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash
Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts
- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism
UNIT V
SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-
Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote
Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable
Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and
experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of
tourism experiences
REFERENCES BOOKS
Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling
Publishers Private Limited New Delhi
Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism
Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited
Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill
International
Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors
New Delhi
Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas
Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New
Delhi
TOURISM MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 526
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the basic concept and various components of management
UNIT I
MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-
Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of
management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)
Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management
UNIT II
PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-
Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of
planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by
objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance
and limitation of decision making
UNIT III
ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash
Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of
staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance
appraisal
UNIT IV
DIRECTING ndash
Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation
(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy
theory)
UNIT V
LEADERSHIP-
Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path
Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to
communication
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives
Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of
tourism as well as the impacts of tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc
Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New
Delhi
Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition
AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing
House New Delhi
Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition
Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations
To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism
industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-
Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing
Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and
Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash
Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New
Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING -
Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION -
Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity
Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in
promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level
which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described
REFERENCES BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson
Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition
Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent
learning
UNIT I
Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health
Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural
History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention
UNIT II
Definition and meaning of hospital ndash
Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing
concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of
Hospitals
UNIT III
Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector
Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in
delivering healthcare in India
UNIT IV
Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural
hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description
UNIT V
The reforms of Healthcare System-
The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare
reforms amp Future of Healthcare System
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding
the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the
management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and
organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services
REFERENCE BOOKS
The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991
Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd
Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers
HEALTH ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 529
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and
understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict
peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different
social actions
UNIT I
Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and
importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below
Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits
UNIT II
Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve
techniques and properties of indifference curve
UNIT III
Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash
Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of
Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of
Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of
demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash
Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue
UNIT IV
Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two
variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves
UNIT V
Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash
Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and
monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market
situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price
determination
COURSE OUTCOME
To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from
an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic
evaluation of a health intervention or program
REFERENCE BOOKS
Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR
Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP
Managerial Economics - Gupta GS
Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani
Business Economics - Sharma NK
Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar
Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi
Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL
HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 530
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions
related to records management in the healthcare environment
UNIT I
Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record
keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records
UNIT II
Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health
Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research
UNIT III
Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics
investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing
Pharmacy etc Audits)
UNIT IV
Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems
associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic
Related Groups (DRG)
UNIT V
Medical Registers ndash
Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various
departments amp common problems faced
COURSE OUTCOME
Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New
Delhi 1999
Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995
Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi
George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003
Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 531
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India
To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India
UNIT I
Rural Society in India
Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-
urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and
subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural
life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion
UNIT II
Rural Society
Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social
institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity
and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of
rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT-III
Village India
Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance
contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and
political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology
Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class
UNIT IV
Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics
Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid
growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope
and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -
Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT-V
Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times
Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social
processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India
Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy
Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms
REFERENCE BOOKS
Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi
Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay
PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House
SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication
House Delhi
ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 532
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To explain the nature of environmental studies
To introduce aspects of Natural resources
To introduce aspects of ecosystems
To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation
To introduce aspects of environmental pollution
To create awareness on social issues and environment
To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
UNIT I
Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for
public awareness
UNIT II
Ecosystems
Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and
decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and
Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the
following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic
Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)
UNIT III
Biodiversity and its Conservation
Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification
of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option
Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports
of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-
Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ
Conservation of biodiversity
UNIT IV
Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil
pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste
Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an
individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods
earthquake cyclone and landslides
20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT V
Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water
Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of
People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible
responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and
holocaust
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the nature of environmental studies
Classify renewable and non-renewable resources
Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues
Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation
Analyze aspects of environmental pollution
Describe aspects of social issues and environment
Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner
Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental
Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai
Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA
RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 533
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts
To familiarize Rural marketing strategy
To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems
To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing
To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages
UNIT I
Overview of Rural Marketing
Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing
and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction
Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class
UNIT II
Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for
rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT III
Rural Distribution Systems
Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche
markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of
Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT IV
ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network
(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction
Methodology Group Project work
UNIT V
Market support
Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role
play
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Market their products
Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products
Choose an appropriate distribution system
Apply ICT in rural marketing
Source the finance for rural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India
Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education
Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi
SEMESTER- VI
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allot
ted
Cred
its
Course
Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mark
s
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-601
Core
Course
E- Commerce
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-602 Core
Course
Customer
Relationship Management
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-603 Practical
Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva
Voce
100
50
17
-
-
50
20
- - 4 4
1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Grand Total
550
22
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one
paper presentation certificate in related discipline
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management
1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing
1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA607 Management of Change
1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management
1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management
1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service
1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business
1Y3BBA614 E- Governance
1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management
1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing
1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour
1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning
1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design
1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control
1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan
1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing
1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management
1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care
1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law
(Rural Management Group)
1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System
1Y3BBA632
Panchayati Raj
1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy
E- COMMERCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 601
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is
designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the
technical foundation for understanding information systems
UNIT I
Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting
online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a
business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-
commerce
UNIT II
Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet
(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A
systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing
vs in-house development of a website)
UNIT III
Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension
definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security
intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)
technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and
protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)
UNIT IV
E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards
e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online
banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house
automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments
UNIT V
Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting
online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of
utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online
services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and
entertainment
COURSE OUTCOME-
Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information
systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Management Information System Jawadekar
bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon
bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana
bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)
bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty
CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 602
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of
Customer Relationship Management in the organizations
UNIT- I
Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature
of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive
and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and
evaluating customer business plans
UNIT- II
Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer
database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing
customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively
Planning and making persuasive presentations
UNIT- III
Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality
Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality
managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and
Cross- sell
UNIT- IV
Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations
Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority
setting Target setting setting standards
UNIT- V
Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction
COURSE OUTCOME-
To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship
Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd
Ed Response Books Sage Publication
Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House
Pvt Ltd
Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books
Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management
V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008
Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management
South Western Cengage Learning
Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press
Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age
International
Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan
Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of
India Private Limted New Delhi 2011
S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private
Limted New Delhi 2008
ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 603
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to
work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn
the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final
semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by
the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a
student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their
analytical capabilities and experience
DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)
Title of the study (Cover Page)
Declaration
Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)
Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)
Acknowledgement
Table of Contents
Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used
1 INTRODUCTION
11 Introduction
12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research
12 Significance of the study
13 Scope of the study
14 Research Problem
15 Objective of the study
17 Hypothesis
18 Limitations of the study
2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students
to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they
learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After
the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is
evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report
should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to
provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also
able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business
operations and come up with the ways to tap the
Opportunities
3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
31 Introduction
32 Population of the study
33 Sampling Design
331 Sampling Technique
332 Sampling Method
333 Sample Size
34 Research Instrument
35 Sources of data
351 Primary Data
352 Secondary Data
4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION
5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION
Bibliography
COURSE OUTCOME-
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able
to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and
come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities
MARKETING GROUP
PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 604
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the
context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product
manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions
UNIT- I
Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused
organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management
Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-
cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product
Development
UNIT- II
Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods
of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in
international Market
UNIT- III
Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity
concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand
Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image
UNIT- IV
Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system
measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement
Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market
segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining
and establishing brand values
UNIT- V
Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand
extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time
Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand
Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation
COURSE OUTCOME
The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of
Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for
Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning
implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer
Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi
Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi
Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi
Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education
New Delhi
Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi
Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata
McGraw Hill New Delhi
Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi
STRATEGIC MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 605
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and
implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and
managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver
superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation
through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills
UNIT- I
Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash
Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of
Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying
Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting
Marketing Objectives
UNIT-II
Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching
Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy
Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle
Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies
UNIT-III
Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp
Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models
UNIT- IV
Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives
Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy
Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing
UNIT- V
Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at
different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by
executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and
interdisciplinary nature
REFERENCE BOOKS
Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt
D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin
OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage
Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill
Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp
Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson
Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann
Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India
George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press
J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and
Programs McGraw-Hill Companies
Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub
Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon
P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave
E-MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 606
COURSE OBJECTIVE
It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance
enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns
UNIT- I
Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics
Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan
Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing
UNIT- II
Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in
India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within
communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing
UNIT- III
Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet
as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet
User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-
branding
UNIT- IV
Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-
marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools
Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent
Trends in e-customer service
UNIT- V
Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web
Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing
campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising
Course Outcome
Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics
online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its
implication on marketing strategy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a
networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill
Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall
Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning
Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books
Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial
Times
HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 607
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be
Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students
Understand the importance of managing change
UNIT- I
Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-
Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of
human resource strategies in implementing Change
UNIT-II
Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR
implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation
and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions
UNIT-III
HR Processes amp Change
Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned
change
Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change
UNIT- IV
Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in
employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management
of change implications of downsizing
UNIT- V
Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to
promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and
feedback
Course Outcome
Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more
effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change
process
REFERENCE BOOKS
A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human
Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education
Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill
Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage
South Asia Edition
K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation
Response Books
VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books
CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 608
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical
relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand
anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions
to ensure the organizational and individual success
UNIT-I
Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of
organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business
environment
UNIT-II
Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars
Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations
UNIT- III
Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock
Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system
(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)
UNIT- IV
Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and
repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally
appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural
negotiation and conflicts management
UNIT- V
Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual
countries Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development
of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning
Private Limited
G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill
Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley
Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing
Co
Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell
Business
Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times
McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp
Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation
Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson
Education India
GROUP DYNAMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 609
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group
dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group
effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of
resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding
UNIT-I
Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group
dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B
UNIT-II
Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group
Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash
Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress
UNIT-III
Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group
decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash
conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict
UNIT- IV
Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De
individuation theory
UNIT- V
Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources
of Change in groups
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups
REFERENCE BOOKS
Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley
Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass
Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co
Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE
Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and
application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax
along with basic concepts of VAT
UNIT-I
Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of
Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment
of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-II
Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature
and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax
planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business
UNIT-III
Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net
Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and
Penalties (Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-IV
Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for
service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of
Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)
UNIT- V
VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview
of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT
Law)
COURSE OUTCOME
Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields
REFERENCE BOOKS
Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications
Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub
Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House
T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India
BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson
S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann
R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _
INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 611
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important
components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO
Analysis etc
UNIT-I
INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian
Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role
in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)
UNIT-II
FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different
Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players
Different types of Instruments
UNIT-III
CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI
Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank
UNIT- IV
COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp
Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A
REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA
UNIT- V
NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies
Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture
Capital Funds
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment
Banking companies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication
Financial Services MY Khan TMH
Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication
S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran
ML Seth
FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 612
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and
prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of
uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding
of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role
of internal audit assessments
UNIT I
Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview
UNIT II
Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax
fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and
inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds
UNIT III
Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion
investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports
UNIT IV
Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using
Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)
UNIT V Case Study
1 Two Indian
2 Two international cases
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread
nature of fraud and its economic impact
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation
Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination
Cengage Learning
IT GROUP
INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 613
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security
managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues
in the information assurance field
UNIT I
Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian
Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its
application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law
Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour
Laws E-Media and Print Media
UNIT II
E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security
Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature
UNIT III
Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil
Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-
detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of
Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA
UNIT IV
IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal
issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base
UNIT V
Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of
Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules
COURSE OUTCOME-
Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House
Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co
John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River
Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher
Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University
E-GOVERNANCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 614
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information
Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an
awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the
issues concerning the Cyber security
UNIT I
Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National
E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status
UNIT II
E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process
Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges
UNIT III
E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-
Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics
UNIT IV
Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic
data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber
audit implications for e-governance
Unit V
Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and
construction of a joining table
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill
Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing
Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in
India ICFAI Press Hyderabad
B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill
H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications
V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd
IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 615
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization
UNIT I
IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT
Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo
Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for
IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library
UNIT II
Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service
Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support
Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change
Management Release Management
UNIT III
Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve
Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine
Recovery Data Retention
UNIT IV
Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security
Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection
UNIT V
IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and
Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and
Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of
Internet on Technical Support
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology
REFERENCE BOOKS
Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce
(OGC) TSO UK
Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos
Management Tata McGraw Hill
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 616
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques
and their management
UNIT I
Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations
of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and
distribution
UNIT II
Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and
factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging
of foods
UNIT III
Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food
industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO
etc
UNIT IV
Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products
cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking
confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of
fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH
Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie
Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing
Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH
MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 617
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing
concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs
UNIT I
Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution
channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-
farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing
UNIT II
Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds
Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of
NSC and State Seed Corporation
UNIT III
Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers
Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash
marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer
marketing
UNIT IV
Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash
marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of
electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity
UNIT V
Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm
machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines
implementsEquipmentlsquos
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with
various functional areas of agribusiness
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp
IBH
Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management
Kalyani
Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ
House
FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 618
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis
of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions
UNIT I
Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management
decisions farm management problems
UNIT II
Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle
principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc
UNIT III
Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm
records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement
farm efficiency measures
UNIT IV
Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc
UNIT V
Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to
counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks
and uncertainty
COURSE OUTCOME
Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses
REFERENCE BOOKS
Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall
Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ
Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ
Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ
RETAIL GROUP
BUYER BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA 619
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer
decisions making
UNIT-I
A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic
Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market
Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making
UNIT-II
Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles
of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer
Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and
Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product
Relationship
UNIT-III
Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to
information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-
Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors
Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications
UNIT-IV
Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing
Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-
Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions
Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy
UNIT-V
Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics
lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they
experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and
impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour
COURSE OUTCOME
Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the
choices consumers make
REFERENCE BOOKS
JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata
Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006
Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context
Excel Books NewDelhi-2001
Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous
DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing
Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi
Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining
Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005
Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000
RETAIL PLANNING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 620
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational
decision-making processes in the organized retail
UNIT I
Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail
Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-
Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative
methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management
UNIT II
Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics
Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp
non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion
designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting
Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-
Management of Obsolete goods
UNIT III
Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer
psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical
Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices
UNIT IV
Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-
Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp
Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective
Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer
Rights- Consumer Protection Acts
UNIT V
Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing
Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-
Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels
REFERENCE BOOKS
Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies
Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies
Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson
Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund
amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson
Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice
Hall of India New Delhi
Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies
Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best
People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd
RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 621
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the
value it creates
UNIT I
Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When
How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience
Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency
UNIT II
Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated
Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-
Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-
UNIT III
Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on
Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-
Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display
Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-
UNIT IV
Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium
Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and
Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-
Trade Dealing
UNIT V
Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-
Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating
Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing
to act in ways that increase loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -
Prentice-Hall
Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology
Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales
Promotion Techniques
Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate
Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page
Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books
George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing
Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill
PRODUCTION GROUP
PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL
Course Code 1Y3BBA 622
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a
basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of
facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality
control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an
understanding of the concept of aggregate planning
UNIT- I
Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors
Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-
requisites of PPC
UNIT- II
Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in
Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining
Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control
Models)
UNIT- III
Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection
Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master
production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of
software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II
UNIT- IV
Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n
job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling
Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)
UNIT- V
Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control
function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications
bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi
Deep and Deep Publications
PROCESS REENGINEERING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 623
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of
business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering
projects
UNIT- I
Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp
pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR
UNIT- II
Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering
project organizing for process reengineering
UNIT- III
Process analysis and design
a) Process analysis
(b) Process design
UNIT- IV
Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition
tracking and measuring process performance
UNIT- V
Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology
Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact
measurement
COURSE OUTCOME
To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the
considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-
engineering project
REFERENCE BOOKS
Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata
McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater
Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester
John Wiley amp Sons
WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn
the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time
standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering
to design of work systems
UNIT- I
Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos
productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity
Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time
Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities
Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was
developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph
UNIT- II
Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting
up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion
Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand
Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and
Design of Tools amp Equipment
UNIT- III
Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard
from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and
Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work
Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling
UNIT- IV
Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage
Incentive Plans
The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for
Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action
UNIT-V
Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion
Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System
Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts
Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional
including understanding the need for quality
REFERENCE BOOKS
iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill
ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation
Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp
Sons
Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall
Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall
Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press
Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall
Mall East and London
Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN
Course Code 1Y3BBA 625
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in
it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative
impacts of tourism development
UNIT I
Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism
Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of
Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in
Tourism Development
UNIT II
Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning
system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos
Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-
Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in
learning system
UNIT III
Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable
development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist
Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash
The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash
Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities
UNIT IV
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage
of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment
UNIT IV
Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the
Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National
Policy on Ecology and Environment
COURSE OUTCOME
To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global
perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international
tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for
sustainable tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash
Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications
Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers
Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William
Heinemann Ltd
Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices
London Pitman Publishing
Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York
Kendall Hunt Publishing Company
Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan
Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman
Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford
University Press
New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable
Development Approach VNR and New York
TOURISM MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 626
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism
and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing
that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products
before the stakeholders of tourism industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing
Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and
Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market
Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing
Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for
different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing
Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales
promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital
communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future
It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are
needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be
a part of this growth
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar
Thomson Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd
edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of
Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry
UNIT I
HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of
Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads
ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and
marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents
UNIT II
RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief
History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway
Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway
station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains
express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world
heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes
UNIT III
AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth
Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled
Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature
Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players
Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and
performance marketing strategies of Air India
UNIT IV
WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover
crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going
traffic) ndash National waterways
UNIT V
CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing
stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and
Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation
COURSE OUTCOME
Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of
the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management
REFERENCE BOOKS
RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 628
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of
its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing
knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital
Management
UNIT I
Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its
impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need
principles purpose
UNIT II
Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and
their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply
department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health
and patient safety
UNIT III
Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of
biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules
standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging
transportation amp storage
UNIT IV
Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier
methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal
decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of
wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan
UNIT V
Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party
insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash
meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural
disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague
typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics
COURSE OUTCOME
To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost
containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges
arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs
and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its
various components
REFERENCE BOOKS
Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication
First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn
Park k - Preventive and social medicine
Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot
MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 629
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted
advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public
relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any
potential crisis that may arise
UNIT I
Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches
to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of
marketing functions of marketing
UNIT II
Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment
Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market
segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash
positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing
UNIT III
Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior
(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying
decision process
UNIT IV
Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp
deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product
development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling
UNIT V
Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing
policies and strategies
Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management
decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels
COURSE OUTCOME
Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an
integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare
professionals and the public
REFERENCE BOOKS
Philip Kotler - marketing management
Wiliam jStanton - marketing management
Sherleker S A - marketing management
J C Gandhi - marketing management
Davar - modern marketing management
Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub
P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research
Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research
HOSPITALS RELATED LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 630
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of
common-law development
UNIT ndash I
Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties
sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance
act trust act societies registration act
UNIT ndashII
Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of
human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act
1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971
mental health act patient consent
UNIT ndash III
Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948
narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods
act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration
UNIT ndash IV
Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act
1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916
maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing
order) act trade union act industrial disputes act
UNIT ndashV
Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in
hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical
negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical
establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal
pronouncements rulings and regulations
REFERENCE BOOKS
Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer
Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law
Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 631
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India
To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural
Production system in India
To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India
To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development
UNIT -1
Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions
ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology
Case analysis and discussion
UNIT II
Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash
Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture
UNIT III
Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-
Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India
UNIT IV
Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of
holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus
land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas
UNIT V
Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash
Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and
schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM
COURSE OUTCOMES
Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management
Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India
Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development
REFERENCE BOOKS
Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution
Can We Make London Department for International Development
Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House
PANCHAYATI RAJ
Course Code 1Y3BBA632
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration
To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites
To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance
To provide insights on Rural Administration
To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes
UNIT I
Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction
Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges
Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration
(Official and non-official) and report submission
UNIT III
Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission
UNIT IV
Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and
Block- Panchayat relationship
Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play
UNIT V
Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government
Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan
Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
COURSE OUTCOMES
Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village
Development interventions
Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its
power Structure
Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and
Plans
Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes
32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959
Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise
Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi
Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New
Delhi
RURAL ECONOMY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 633
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy
To help students understand their role in rural economic development
To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources
To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation
To create awareness on rural economic development
UNIT I
Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-
Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries
(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in
agriculture individual production other production services
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-
Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash
Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land
Reforms
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
UNIT III
Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation
programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs
UNIT IV
Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work
UNIT V
Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing
ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for
the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy
Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village
Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues
Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation
Facilities
Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi
Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi
Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic
Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New
Delhi
INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER
Mid Semester Examination (MSE)
There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5
descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered
End Semester Examination (ESE)
There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks
each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of
10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered
Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations
The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment
Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be
applicable
(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )
Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type
End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size
BBA PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES AND OUTCOMES
BBA PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES-
Develop viable alternatives and make effective decisions relating to business ethics and social responsibility
Identify and analyze relevant global factors that influence decision-making
To apply appropriate techniques resources and multimedia tools for enhancement of skills
Apply knowledge based skill to assess and solve social-cultural and legal issues
Understand the impact of the professional management literary and soft skills in societal and
environmental contexts
To adopt and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities
To achieve appropriate communication skills and higher levels of proficiency for
Successful career in Industry Business and Entrepreneurship
BBA PROGRAMME OUTCOMES-
Towards the end of the program students will be able to
Provide students with a broad range of managerial capabilities the capacity for critical
thinking communication and problem‐solving skills legal and ethical behavior
Prepare graduates for diverse careers in global management administration and
entrepreneurship through a well‐rounded business education with a focus on global business
operations emerging markets and technology‐enabled organizations
Analyze socio-political-economic environment of business organizations
Communicate effectively in different contexts
Develop functional and general management skills
Build and Demonstrate leadership teamwork and social skills
Evaluate different business problems using analytical creative and integrative abilities
SEMESTER I
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Ist SEMESTER
Course Details
External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allot
ted
Cred
its
Course Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor
Sessional
L
T
P
Subj
ect
wise
Distr
ibuti
on
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Ma
x
Mar
ks
Min
Mark
s
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mark
s
Theory Group
1Y3BBA101
Ability Enhanc
ement
Compul
sory
Course
MIL Hindi Communication
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA102
Core Course
Organization Behavior 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA103 Core
Course
Introduction to
Business Accountancy
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA104 Core Course
Business Environment
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA105 Core
Course
Principles of
Management 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA102
Organization
Behavior 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
1Y3BBA104 Business
Environment 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Grand
Total 600 20 5 - 24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
MIL HINDI COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 101
fgUnh Okdjk oa laizskk
इकाई-I
हहनदीवयाकरण और रचना सजञा सरवनाम हरशष ाण हिया अवयय कारक रचन सहधउपसगव परतयय
तथासमास
ह गहनणवय पयावयराची शबद हर ोम शबद अन क शबदो क ह ए एक शबद
शबद शदधि राकय शदधि महारर और ोकोदधिया पललरन एर सकष पण
इकाई-II
हनबध क ातथासमसामहयक एरराषटर ीय हरषया परहनबधा खन
इकाई-III
सपर षण (सचार)
-सपर षण की अरधारणऔरमहतव सपरष ाण क ह ए आरशयक शत सपरष ाण क परकार
सपर षणकामाधयम सपर षणक ा सपर षण की तकनीक राचनक ा समाचारराचन साकषातकारक ा
रचनातमक खनका कषय रचनातमक ख ानकाआधार भारऔरहरचारोकीपरसतहत राक क ा की
उपयोहगता
अनशसितपसतक -
रहतवयाकरणभासकर डा 0 रचनद रकमार
रहतहनबधाभासकर डा 0 रचनदर कमार
आधहनकहहनदीवयाकरणऔररचना डा 0 रासद रननदनपरसाद
रचनामानस परो0 राम शवरनाथहतरारी
वयरहाररकहहनदी डा 0 जग बहादरपाणड य
रचनातमक खन डा 0 रमश ागौतम
राजहसहहनदीहनबध परो0 आर0 एन0 गौड़
सफ हहनदीहनबध रतन शवर
हनबध सहचर डा 0 कषमणपरसाद
उपकारमहारर और ाक ोदधियाा पार 0 राज शवरपरसादचतरव दी
कहाहनयोकहारता की परतापअनम
समपर षणपरकहहनदीभाषाहशकषण डा 0 रशनानारग
श ीहरजञान डा 0 सर शकमार
श ीहरजञानपरहतमानऔरहरशल षण डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo
श ीहरजञानकाइहतहास डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo
ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA102
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students study the behaviour of individuals and groups as part of the social and technical system in
the workplace They examine individual and group behaviour communication conflict and various
management styles motivational techniques and coordination in the work environment and apply
these concepts to the development of an organizations human resources
UNIT I
Organization Overview of the concept and relevance of organizational Behaviour meaning Nature
Scope features approaches model challenges and opportunities functions amp Role of manager
Planning process Decision making Process
UNIT II
Foundation of individual Behavior Biography ability personality (determinants and models)
perception (definition components factors affecting perception in decision making) Values
Beliefs etc
UNIT III
Individual Behavior- Attitude Definition importance Types Attitude regarding- Job
Satisfaction Involvement commitment effects of employee attitude changing attitudes
Learning Definition nature theories classical conditioning operant conditioning cognitive
Learning Social learning
UNIT IV
Motivation Concept and theories (Maslow McGregor Herzberg ERG) merits amp demerits Group
dynamics amp Team work Nature theories types of group Definition Stages of Group Development
effectiveness potential problems Analysis of Interpersonal Relationship Transactional Analysis
Johari Window
UNIT- V
Organizational change and development approaches and methods stress nature source effects
conflicts employee counseling approaches extra mural penitential learning programmers case
study
COURSE OUTCOME
To explain group dynamics and demonstrate skills required for working in groups (team building)
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Luthans Fred Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India
bull Mishra MN Behaviour Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
bull Newstrom W John Davis Keith Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India
bull LM Roy Organisational Behaviour S Chand Publication
bull Dr FC Sharma Organisational Behaviour SBPD Publications
INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ACCOUNTING
Course Code 1Y3BBA103
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable students to synthesize related information and evaluate options for most logical and
optimal solution such that they would be able to predict and control cost incurrence and improve
results
UNIT- I
Accounting Basic of Accounting Accounting Mechanics-Double Entry System Classification
Rules for Debit amp Credit Journal Ledger and Trial Balance sub-division of journal Ledger meaning subdivision and mechanics of Posting balancing ledger accounts
UNIT- II
Cash book and Subsidiary books of Accounting Kinds of Cash Book Purchase day book and sale
day Book Bank reconciliation statement Measurement of income- Adjusting entries- rectification of
errors- Adjusted trial balance
UNIT-III
Preparation of financial statements- Trading account Profit amp Loss account Balance Sheet (with
Adjustments) Accounting for Non-profit organization Accounting Procedures Receipts amp payment
accounts income ampexpenditure account problems
UNIT- IV
Depreciation- Meaning Determinant factors Method amp Significance Basic Concepts of hire
purchase amp installments
UNIT- V
Partnership-Preliminary admission of a partner Company Accounts-Issue of shares Debentures
Forfeitures and reissue of shares
COURSE OUTCOME
Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of product and services in the
Organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
SA Siddiqui- Comprehensive Accounting
TS Greval- Introduction to Accounting
Mukherjee and M Accounting (Volume-I)
SN Maheshwar- Introduction to Accounting (Vikas Publication)
CAC Rama Gopal Accounting For Managers (New Age)
BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational
and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business
UNIT I
Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro
environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis
for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business
UNIT II
Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic
systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years
plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent
economic initiatives NitiAyog
UNIT III
Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment
problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance
of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural
Development Problems of Growth
UNIT IV
Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment
Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA
and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act
UNIT V
International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational
Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic
Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-
GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India
COURSE OUTCOME
Outline how an entity operates in a business environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996
Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi
Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan
Chand Delhi
Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA105
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to
articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate
effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the
consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and
quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods
UNIT-I
Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of
Management Functions of the Manager
UNIT- II
Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of
Planning
Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and
type of Policies
Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems
involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques
UNIT- III
Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of
Units and committees
Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship
UNIT- IV
Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training
Directing Nature and purpose and directing
UNIT- V
Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control
process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies
COURSE OUTCOME-
Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques
managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of
managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify
and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own
position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied
audiences
Reference Books
bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher
bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson
Education
bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt
Ltd 4th Ed
bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill
Publications
SEMESTER II
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distributio
n
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor
Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distribu
tion Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Ma
x
Ma
rks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme
nt
Compulsory
Course
English
communication
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA202 Core Course
Management concept amp
Principle
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA203 Core
Course
Environmental
Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA204 Core
Course
Monetary
Economics and
Indian Banking
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA205 Core
Course
Business
Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA205 Business
Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhanceme
nt
Skill Enhancement
Elective
Course-I
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand
Total 600 21 5 - 24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
ENGLISH COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA201
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English
language teaching and content writing sectors
UNIT I
Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning
Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening
UNIT II
Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive
writing expansion of an idea
UNIT III
Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing
(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume
writing covering letter
UNIT IV
Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases
UNIT V
Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb
agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions
(Advanced)
COURSE OUTCOME
To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill
Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul
Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan
Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das
Orient Blackswan
Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press
Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication
MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 202
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and
process of effective controlling in the organization
UNIT I
Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science
Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)
UNIT II
School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and
Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)
Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management
UNIT III
Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing
Staffing Directing and Coordinating
UNIT IV
Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command
Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control
UNIT V
Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure
determination Forms- formal amp informal organization
Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations
COURSE OUTCOME
Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial
functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management
REFERENCE BOOKS
LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management
VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management
James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB
Fred Luthans- OB
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 203
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links
between human and natural systems
UNIT I
Introduction to environmental studies
Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability
and sustainable development
UNIT II
Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an
ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following
ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds
streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)
Unit III
Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to
mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and
over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international
ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate
energy sources growing energy needs case studies
UNIT IV
Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem
diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots
Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and
Informational value
UNIT V
Environmental Pollution
Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution
Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and
Industrial waste Pollution case studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social
and environmental processes
REFERENCE BOOKS
California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London
Routledge
Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security
Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press
Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of
ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006
Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37
McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books
McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the
Twentieth Century
Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders
Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic
Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt
Ltd
Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons
Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi
1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP
Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation
S Chand Publishing New Delhi
MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING
Course Code 1Y3BBA204
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using
statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills
within the contest of subject matter of economics
UNIT I
Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of
Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value
of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income
theory of Money
UNIT II
Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people
Money Market
UNIT III
Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial
Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks
UNIT IV
Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control
methods and Tools of Monetary Policy
UNIT V
RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative
Banks and Rural Banks
COURSE OUTCOME
Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and
mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of
economics
REFERENCE BOOKS
MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi
LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi
Crowther- An Out Line of Money
Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant
KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ
BUSINESS COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA205
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative
scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication
UNIT I
Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports
OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)
UNIT II
Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other
words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis
UNIT III
Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers
Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers
UNIT IV
Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a
Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication
Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)
UNIT V
Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written
Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp
minutes
COURSE OUTCOME
To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical
proficiency in the development of exposition and argument
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wren amp Martin
K Madhukar- Business Communication
VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication
Asha Laul- Business Communication
Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH
SEMESTER III
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotte
d
Credit
s
Course Code Course
Type
Course
Title
Total
Mark
s
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subjec
t wise
Distrib
ution
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA301
Ability
Enhancement
IT Tool for Business
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA302
Core Course
Introduction to Marketing
Management
100 50 17 20 7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA303 Core
Course
Business
Law
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA304 Core
Course
Business
statistics for
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA305
Core
Course
Retail
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA304 Practical
Business
statistics for Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill
Enhancemen
t Elective Course-II
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand Total 600 24
IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 301
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software
components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data
base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT
UNIT-I
Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and
Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World
Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept
UNIT-II
Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different
computer generation
UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and
Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming
Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-
principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart
examples
UNIT-IV
Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation
applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)
Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information
System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems
Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human
Resources Management Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations
Understand the hardware and software components of the computer
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford
2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication
3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication
4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill
INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 302
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply
these to a new or existing business
UNIT I
Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept
amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro
environment
UNIT II
Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of
Product Line amp Product- mix
UNIT III
Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing
decisions Overview of pricing process
UNIT IV
Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product
Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage
UNIT V
Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to
marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct
selling
COURSE OUTCOME
To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct
an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an
appropriate format
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Philip Kotler
2 TN Chabra
3 TK Panda
4 SH Kazmi
5 Arun Kumar
BUSINESS LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 303
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal
environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with
knowledge of legal principles
UNIT-I
Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration
capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts
Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp
Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency
UNIT-II
Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp
Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales
UNIT-III
Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -
Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a
negotiable instrument
UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of
non-registration Dissolution of a firm
UNIT-V
Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of
Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013
COURSE OBJECTIVE
On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to
individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context
Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 ND Kapoor
2 Tulsian
3 MC Kuchhal
4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business
BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 304
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management
UNIT I
Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance
Scope and Limitation of Statistic
UNIT II
Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar
Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive
UNIT III
Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic
Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures
of dispersion
UNIT IV
Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and
Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index
number CPI WPI IIP
UNIT V
Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank
Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series
COURSE OUTCOME
Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically
discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons
2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication
3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication
RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in
India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone
Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT
FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan
Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process
UNIT II
FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail
Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors
Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing
MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer
Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design
and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication
UNIT III
STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty
Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors
UNIT IV
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management
IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service
Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM
Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying
UNIT V
MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at
Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems
at Retail Centers
Course Outcome-
Reference Books
bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education
bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A
Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education
The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge
about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various
aspects of retail operations
After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with
the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the
entire retail operations
SEMESTER IV
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code Course
Type Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subject
wise
Distributio
n
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mark
s
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-401
Ability
Enhanceme
nt
Introduction to
soft skill amp
Team Building
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA-402 Core Course
Introduction to
financial
management
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-403 Core Course
Advertising
and Sales
Promotion
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-404 Core Course
Management
of Human resource
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of
Business
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group
Term End
Practical
Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-404 Practical
Management
of Human
resource
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-405 Practical
Macro
Economics of Business
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
Grand Total 550 22
INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 401
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate
students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners
by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are
learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for
their own learning
UNIT ndash I
General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of
Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences
Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making
Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of
communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of
Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation
UNIT ndash II
Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing
skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice
modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements
General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral
skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive
Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style
UNIT ndash III
Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format
and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in
Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active
Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD
UNIT ndash IV
Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction
Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview
Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing
Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of
Conversation
UNIT ndash V
Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional
Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers
COURSE OUTCOME
To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills
and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin
bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar
INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 402
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital
decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and
raising long-term finance
UNIT I
Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives
Role of finance manager
UNIT II
Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of
investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return
Comparison between NPV amp IRR
UNIT III
Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of
Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning
capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure
UNIT IV
The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage
Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating
Leverage
UNIT V
Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital
estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of
inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order
Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy
COURSE OUTCOME
Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial
manager in the current competitive business scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 IM Pandey
2 P Chandra
3 SP Gupta
4 MY Khan
ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 403
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may
review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos
homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions
UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising
budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for
Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising
UNIT II
Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy
Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role
types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council
of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)
UNIT III
Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring
awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of
design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet
advertising and evaluation of advertising
UNIT IV
Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors
influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option
Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of
consumer schemes and other methods of promotion
UNIT V
Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs
Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales
personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion
COURSE OUTCOME
Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how
these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its
relation to todaylsquos marketplace
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall
Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi
Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi
Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications
MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 404
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource
management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational
setting
UNIT-I
Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with
special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in
strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management
UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge
workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)
Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)
UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of
human resource department and the role of human resource manager
UNITndashIV
Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification
rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation
UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection
(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction
COURSE OUTCOME
To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training
Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical
Behaviour
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi
Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New
Delhi
Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York
HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications
A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications
MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the
important indicators of the economy and their significance
UNIT I
Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of
Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income
Personal and Personal disposable income
UNIT II
Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income
Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and
Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator
Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate
demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy
UNIT III
Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate
demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government
expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary
and fiscal policy
UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary
policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production
Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation
monetary measures fiscal measures
UNIT V
Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and
corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in
open economy
COURSE OUTCOME
To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the
role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson
2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill
3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers
4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson
SEMESTER V
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment
Internal Assessment Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-501
Ability Enhancement
Public Relation amp Corporate Image
50
25
8
10
4
15
6
2
-
-
2
1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and
small Business
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-503
Core Course Principle of
Economics
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-502
Practical Entrepreneurship and
small Business
50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics
50
25 08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Skill Course
Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill Enhancement
Elective Course-III
50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2
Grand Total
600
24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication
1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management
1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India
1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation
1Y3BBA509 Organization Development
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision
1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management
1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA513 Database Management System
1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service
1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy
1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management
1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management
1Y3BBA520 Stores Management
1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA522 Technology Management
1Y3BBA523 Productivity
1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept
1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management
1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System
1Y3BBA529 Health Economics
1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management
(Rural Management Group )
1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity
1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment
1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management
SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES
Non-Technical
Elective No Department Faculty Name
Faculty of Information Technology
I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)
II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)
IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)
V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Management
I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)
II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)
III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development
Faculty of Commerce
I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)
II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Humanities
I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)
II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)
III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Science
I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)
II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)
III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)
IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)
V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Education
I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)
II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)
PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA501
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts
of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling
and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization
UNIT- I
Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash
Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy
Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors
ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public
Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations
UNIT- II
Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service
Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social
Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy
for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation
Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event
Management
UNIT- III
Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash
Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public
Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of
Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control
UNIT IV
Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies
Components of an Individual Image
Advertising and Corporate Image
Public Relations of an Institutions
UNIT V
The Grapevine and Rumours
Stereotype
Propaganda
Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations
applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different
entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling
REFERENCE BOOKS
Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House
Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House
Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University
Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill
This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning
ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-
The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding
processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to
those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic
environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide
evidence which informs those debates
UNIT I
Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of
Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its
environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship
UNIT II
Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship
development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the
Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making
UNIT III
Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that
enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in
Social context Start Up
UNIT IV
Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional
source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital
UNIT V
Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication
2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd
3 Vasant Desai
4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH
PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 503
COURSE OBJECTIVES-
To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production
UNIT- I
Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits
UNIT-II
Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus
movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts
of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications
of demand and supply price rationing price floors
Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price
elasticity cross and income elasticity
UNIT-III
Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility
Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp
Producer surplus
UNIT-IV
Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant
and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue
and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale
UNIT-V
Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of
the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run
equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment
concept
COURSE OUTCOME-
To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011
bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th
edition
2007
bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA
bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press
Oxford
bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore
MARKETING GROUP
INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so
that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to
enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications
UNIT-I
Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC
in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising
appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion
relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship
between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods
Interactive Internet Marketing
UNIT-II
Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach
establishing and allocating promotional budget
UNIT-III
IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different
forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning
creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design
considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client
Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork
UNIT-IV
Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering
key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and
media research
Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration
client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc
UNIT-V
Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing
Communications
COURSE OUTCOME-
To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches
and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to
communicating to target audiences
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc
Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard
D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois
Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing
House
Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and
Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication
Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH
Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing
Communications Pearson Education Limited
Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc
Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House
Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning
Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc
Homewood Illinois
Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic
Approach Cengage Learning
Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India
Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education
SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT
Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE
It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and
distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and
distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners
UNIT-I
Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies
Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling
objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring
Procedure Socialization
UNIT-II
Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program
Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation
Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial
Evaluation of Contest
UNIT-III
Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel
Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales
Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process
UNIT-IV
Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key
tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market
Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation
UNIT-V
Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners
Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict
Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International
Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales
COURSE OUTCOME
Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the
sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans
participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables
REFERENCE BOOKS
Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres
Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books
Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI
L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills
Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets
Greenwood Publishing Group
Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub
ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH
Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing
consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing
research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students
within a course project
UNIT-I
Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing
Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research
Process Marketing Research Designs
UNIT-II
The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques
Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of
Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic
Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical
Analysis Tools
UNIT-III
Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)
ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor
Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental
Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores
Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-
hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number
UNIT-IV
Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product
Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant
Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification
Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing
Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and
their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity
UNIT-V
Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning
in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report
and class presentation of the same
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from
analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor
analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis
REFERENCE BOOKS
Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi
William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi
Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi
Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill
Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research
Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey
Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning
Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp
Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced
in the class
HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP
LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA
Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of
Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity
objectivity and understandings
UNIT-I
The Factories Act 1948
The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923
The Employees State Insurance Act 1948
UNIT-II
The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952
The Payment of gratuity Act 1972
UNIT-III
The Maternity Benefit Act 1961
The Minimum Wages act 1948
UNIT-IV
The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946
The Payment of Bonus Act 1965
UNIT-V
The Apprentices Act 1969
The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959
COURSE OUTCOME ndash
To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour
Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the
organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to
follow the Laws applicable to the establishment
REFERENCE BOOKS
S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications
S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi
Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot
V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House
N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons
INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE
In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our
country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of
Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be
acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the
concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India
UNIT-I
Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors
affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial
relation programme
Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact
of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes
lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry
UNIT-II
Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal
Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective
bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective
collective bargaining collective bargaining in India
UNIT-III
Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education
scheme in India- objectives functions and problems
Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation
schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India
UNIT-IV
Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India
major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions
registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union
UNIT-V
Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery
Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation
submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court
industrial tribunals
Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power
of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute
COURSE OUTCOME
Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective
bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute
resolution
REFERENCE BOOKS
Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts
IIPM Personnel Management in India
Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business
Publication Ltd
Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India
Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India
Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication
Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co
Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law
ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational
culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the
human values in individuals
UNIT-I
Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational
Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development
Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining
and survey research amp feedback methodology
UNIT-II
Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in
organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief
systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development
UNIT-III
Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component
interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief
of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action
UNIT-IV
OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team
building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process
interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions
important for successful OD efforts
UNIT ndash V
HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational
implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional
Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have
improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi
Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York
McGrawhill
Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in
addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a
good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company
UNIT-I
Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm
Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-
Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of
Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering
UNIT-II
Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the
analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount
of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a
Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and
Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis
UNIT-III
Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues
and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements
medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings
Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project
finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing
UNIT-IV
Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of
financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing
Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect
cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization
UNIT-V
Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value
Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic
indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added
Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total
Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)
COURSE OUTCOME
Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and
corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts
REFERENCE BOOKS
Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill
Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons
INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial
environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a
multinational corporation
UNIT-I
Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation
functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial
management International monetary system
UNIT-II
Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories
ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible
exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer
Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options
Currency swaps and interest rate swaps
UNIT-III
Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction
transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction
exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The
national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International
capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)
UNIT-IV
International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic
considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)
Financial risk and cost of capital
Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of
capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-
20 subsidiaries and tax havens
UNIT-V
International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their
comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets
Recent developments in the Euro bond market
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations
and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley
PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall
Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall
Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis
Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co
Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall
Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers
Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath
FINANCIAL INCLUSION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion
such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss
the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to
promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models
UNIT-I
Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting
Access to Financial Services
Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive
Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators
UNIT-II
Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey
Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional
Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card
UNIT-III
Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India
Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations
Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor
UNIT-IV
SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of
microfinance evolved in India
Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial
Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for
Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for
Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People
UNIT-V
Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises
Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion
and Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account
initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage
Publication
Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House
Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech
Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications
Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications
Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing
Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI
Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI
Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag
Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion
Academic Foundation
IT GROUP
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to
manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the
hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment
UNIT-I
The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures
File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base
Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial
Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness
UNIT-II
Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface
with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database
Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design
UNIT-III
Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database
Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database
Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases
UNIT-IV
DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance
Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues
UNIT-V
Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the
field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective
faculty during the coverage of syllabus
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic
concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational
algebra and SQL
REFERENCE BOOKS
Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs
Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan
Press
McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co
MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It
aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing
implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services
UNIT-I
The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development
Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The
Enabling Environment for ITES
UNIT-II
Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled
Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of
Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services
UNIT-III
Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support
Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions
UNIT-IV
International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting
Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in
facilitating Trade in ITESTITES
UNIT-V
Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of
Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of
Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace
Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations
and integrate the learning in handling these complexities
REFERENCE BOOKS
Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat
E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information
technology with various aspects of Software Project Management
UNIT-I
Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision
and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM
Framework
UNIT-II
Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning
Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan
Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration
and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning
UNIT-III
Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an
Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques
Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule
Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools
UNIT-IV
Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance
Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior
Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review
UNIT-V
Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks
Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk
COURSE OUTCOME
Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business
context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business
scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson
Education Ltd
P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp
Tsinghua University Press
R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance
Management Concepts Pub
Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group
B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science
Press
A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications
G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on
understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business
UNIT I
Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm
production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country
UNIT II
Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms
and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business
sector
UNIT III
Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations
relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries
UNIT IV
Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment
and policy
UNIT V
Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies
COURSE OUTCOME
Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper
and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain
REFERENCE BOOKS
Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons
Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ
Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 517
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies
strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms
UNIT I
Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market
structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp
significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of
marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour
UNIT II
Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash
significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product
product life cycle
UNIT III
Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies
and pricing methods
UNIT IV
Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and
standardization
UNIT V
Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural
products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in
agribusiness
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better
understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for
agricultural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH
Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall
Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control
Pearson Edu
Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu
Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India
FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 518
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food
marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen
and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural
political and economic forces over time
UNIT I
Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade
Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of
Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic
factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer
UNIT II
Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling
food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing
in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions
across the chain in food retail food service marketing
UNIT III
4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing
Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system
Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement
Strategies for food retailers
UNIT IV
Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling
Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food
Products
UNIT V
Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training
Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in
retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze
Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing
REFERENCE BOOKS
Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of
India
Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu
Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill
RETAIL GROUP
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in
the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it
UNIT- I
Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management
Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain
networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain
Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network
UNIT- II
Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer
service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs
multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier
Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants
UNIT- III
Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory
models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system
UNIT- IV
COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip
Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION
TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain
Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management
UNIT- V
Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a
Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance
measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics
quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics
COURSE OUTCOME
After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain
which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House
bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers
bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg
bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi
bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan
STORES MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 520
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different
terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned
areas
UNIT- I
Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the
location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design
UNIT- II
Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual
Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors
UNIT- III
Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at
Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores
Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments
UNIT- IV
Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies
Quick Response System
UNIT- V
Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact
on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space
Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization
COURSE OUTCOME
The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern
and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management
bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing
bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach
bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing
bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing
RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 521
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail
Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail
business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management
UNIT I
Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail
equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail
market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-
Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India
UNIT II
Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development
The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and
Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-
Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on
ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response
marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks
The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management
UNIT III
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM
Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch
points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services
Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM
Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding
Common Barriers
UNIT IV
Services Management
Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the
service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-
Supply relationships vehicle routing
UNIT V
Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising
Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping
the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand
management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-
2nd edition 2006
MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational
edititionUS1798
Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education
New Delhi 2003
JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy
Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi
Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy
Pearson Education New Delhi 2004
KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005
Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007
Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House
Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution
rosenbloom and Education Foundation US
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT
TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 522
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
UNIT- I
Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology
Change Implication
UNIT- II
Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying
UNIT- III
Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology
Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management
UNIT- IV
Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology
Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages
UNIT- V
Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise
Level
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to
manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009
bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009
bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson
PRODUCTIVITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 523
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
UNIT- I
Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and
external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work
Contents and Ineffective Time
UNIT- II
Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram
String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart
UNIT- III
Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart
UNIT- IV
Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be
Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement
UNIT- V
Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International
Labour Office Geneva
bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed
bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill
bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India
QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO
Course Code 1Y3BBA 524
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify
the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and
measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current
issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans
UNIT- I
Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives
UNIT- II
Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect
concept
UNIT- III
Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality
UNIT- IV
Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various
control Charts
UNIT- V
Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification
COURSE OUTCOME-
Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to
explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key
aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for
controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp
communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze
the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise
and evaluate quality implementation plans
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay
bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd
bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas
bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd
bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition
7th
Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012
bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM CONCEPTS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 525
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism
To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash
Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp
Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and
development of Tourism through the ages
UNIT II
COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash
Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism
inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious
Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions
incentives sports and adventure tourism
UNIT III
TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash
Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of
motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash
health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and
push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists
UNIT IV
IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash
Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts
- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism
UNIT V
SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-
Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote
Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable
Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and
experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of
tourism experiences
REFERENCES BOOKS
Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling
Publishers Private Limited New Delhi
Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism
Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited
Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill
International
Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors
New Delhi
Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas
Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New
Delhi
TOURISM MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 526
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the basic concept and various components of management
UNIT I
MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-
Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of
management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)
Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management
UNIT II
PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-
Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of
planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by
objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance
and limitation of decision making
UNIT III
ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash
Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of
staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance
appraisal
UNIT IV
DIRECTING ndash
Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation
(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy
theory)
UNIT V
LEADERSHIP-
Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path
Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to
communication
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives
Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of
tourism as well as the impacts of tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc
Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New
Delhi
Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition
AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing
House New Delhi
Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition
Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations
To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism
industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-
Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing
Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and
Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash
Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New
Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING -
Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION -
Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity
Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in
promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level
which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described
REFERENCES BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson
Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition
Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent
learning
UNIT I
Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health
Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural
History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention
UNIT II
Definition and meaning of hospital ndash
Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing
concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of
Hospitals
UNIT III
Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector
Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in
delivering healthcare in India
UNIT IV
Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural
hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description
UNIT V
The reforms of Healthcare System-
The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare
reforms amp Future of Healthcare System
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding
the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the
management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and
organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services
REFERENCE BOOKS
The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991
Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd
Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers
HEALTH ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 529
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and
understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict
peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different
social actions
UNIT I
Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and
importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below
Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits
UNIT II
Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve
techniques and properties of indifference curve
UNIT III
Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash
Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of
Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of
Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of
demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash
Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue
UNIT IV
Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two
variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves
UNIT V
Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash
Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and
monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market
situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price
determination
COURSE OUTCOME
To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from
an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic
evaluation of a health intervention or program
REFERENCE BOOKS
Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR
Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP
Managerial Economics - Gupta GS
Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani
Business Economics - Sharma NK
Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar
Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi
Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL
HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 530
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions
related to records management in the healthcare environment
UNIT I
Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record
keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records
UNIT II
Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health
Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research
UNIT III
Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics
investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing
Pharmacy etc Audits)
UNIT IV
Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems
associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic
Related Groups (DRG)
UNIT V
Medical Registers ndash
Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various
departments amp common problems faced
COURSE OUTCOME
Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New
Delhi 1999
Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995
Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi
George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003
Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 531
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India
To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India
UNIT I
Rural Society in India
Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-
urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and
subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural
life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion
UNIT II
Rural Society
Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social
institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity
and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of
rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT-III
Village India
Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance
contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and
political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology
Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class
UNIT IV
Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics
Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid
growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope
and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -
Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT-V
Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times
Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social
processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India
Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy
Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms
REFERENCE BOOKS
Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi
Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay
PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House
SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication
House Delhi
ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 532
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To explain the nature of environmental studies
To introduce aspects of Natural resources
To introduce aspects of ecosystems
To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation
To introduce aspects of environmental pollution
To create awareness on social issues and environment
To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
UNIT I
Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for
public awareness
UNIT II
Ecosystems
Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and
decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and
Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the
following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic
Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)
UNIT III
Biodiversity and its Conservation
Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification
of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option
Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports
of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-
Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ
Conservation of biodiversity
UNIT IV
Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil
pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste
Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an
individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods
earthquake cyclone and landslides
20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT V
Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water
Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of
People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible
responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and
holocaust
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the nature of environmental studies
Classify renewable and non-renewable resources
Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues
Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation
Analyze aspects of environmental pollution
Describe aspects of social issues and environment
Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner
Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental
Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai
Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA
RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 533
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts
To familiarize Rural marketing strategy
To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems
To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing
To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages
UNIT I
Overview of Rural Marketing
Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing
and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction
Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class
UNIT II
Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for
rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT III
Rural Distribution Systems
Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche
markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of
Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT IV
ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network
(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction
Methodology Group Project work
UNIT V
Market support
Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role
play
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Market their products
Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products
Choose an appropriate distribution system
Apply ICT in rural marketing
Source the finance for rural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India
Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education
Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi
SEMESTER- VI
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allot
ted
Cred
its
Course
Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mark
s
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-601
Core
Course
E- Commerce
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-602 Core
Course
Customer
Relationship Management
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-603 Practical
Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva
Voce
100
50
17
-
-
50
20
- - 4 4
1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Grand Total
550
22
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one
paper presentation certificate in related discipline
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management
1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing
1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA607 Management of Change
1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management
1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management
1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service
1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business
1Y3BBA614 E- Governance
1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management
1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing
1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour
1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning
1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design
1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control
1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan
1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing
1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management
1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care
1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law
(Rural Management Group)
1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System
1Y3BBA632
Panchayati Raj
1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy
E- COMMERCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 601
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is
designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the
technical foundation for understanding information systems
UNIT I
Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting
online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a
business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-
commerce
UNIT II
Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet
(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A
systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing
vs in-house development of a website)
UNIT III
Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension
definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security
intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)
technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and
protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)
UNIT IV
E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards
e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online
banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house
automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments
UNIT V
Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting
online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of
utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online
services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and
entertainment
COURSE OUTCOME-
Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information
systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Management Information System Jawadekar
bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon
bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana
bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)
bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty
CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 602
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of
Customer Relationship Management in the organizations
UNIT- I
Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature
of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive
and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and
evaluating customer business plans
UNIT- II
Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer
database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing
customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively
Planning and making persuasive presentations
UNIT- III
Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality
Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality
managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and
Cross- sell
UNIT- IV
Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations
Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority
setting Target setting setting standards
UNIT- V
Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction
COURSE OUTCOME-
To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship
Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd
Ed Response Books Sage Publication
Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House
Pvt Ltd
Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books
Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management
V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008
Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management
South Western Cengage Learning
Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press
Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age
International
Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan
Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of
India Private Limted New Delhi 2011
S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private
Limted New Delhi 2008
ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 603
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to
work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn
the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final
semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by
the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a
student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their
analytical capabilities and experience
DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)
Title of the study (Cover Page)
Declaration
Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)
Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)
Acknowledgement
Table of Contents
Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used
1 INTRODUCTION
11 Introduction
12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research
12 Significance of the study
13 Scope of the study
14 Research Problem
15 Objective of the study
17 Hypothesis
18 Limitations of the study
2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students
to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they
learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After
the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is
evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report
should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to
provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also
able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business
operations and come up with the ways to tap the
Opportunities
3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
31 Introduction
32 Population of the study
33 Sampling Design
331 Sampling Technique
332 Sampling Method
333 Sample Size
34 Research Instrument
35 Sources of data
351 Primary Data
352 Secondary Data
4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION
5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION
Bibliography
COURSE OUTCOME-
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able
to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and
come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities
MARKETING GROUP
PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 604
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the
context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product
manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions
UNIT- I
Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused
organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management
Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-
cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product
Development
UNIT- II
Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods
of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in
international Market
UNIT- III
Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity
concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand
Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image
UNIT- IV
Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system
measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement
Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market
segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining
and establishing brand values
UNIT- V
Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand
extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time
Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand
Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation
COURSE OUTCOME
The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of
Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for
Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning
implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer
Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi
Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi
Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi
Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education
New Delhi
Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi
Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata
McGraw Hill New Delhi
Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi
STRATEGIC MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 605
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and
implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and
managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver
superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation
through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills
UNIT- I
Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash
Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of
Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying
Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting
Marketing Objectives
UNIT-II
Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching
Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy
Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle
Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies
UNIT-III
Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp
Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models
UNIT- IV
Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives
Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy
Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing
UNIT- V
Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at
different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by
executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and
interdisciplinary nature
REFERENCE BOOKS
Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt
D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin
OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage
Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill
Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp
Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson
Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann
Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India
George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press
J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and
Programs McGraw-Hill Companies
Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub
Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon
P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave
E-MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 606
COURSE OBJECTIVE
It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance
enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns
UNIT- I
Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics
Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan
Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing
UNIT- II
Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in
India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within
communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing
UNIT- III
Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet
as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet
User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-
branding
UNIT- IV
Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-
marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools
Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent
Trends in e-customer service
UNIT- V
Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web
Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing
campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising
Course Outcome
Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics
online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its
implication on marketing strategy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a
networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill
Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall
Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning
Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books
Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial
Times
HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 607
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be
Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students
Understand the importance of managing change
UNIT- I
Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-
Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of
human resource strategies in implementing Change
UNIT-II
Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR
implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation
and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions
UNIT-III
HR Processes amp Change
Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned
change
Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change
UNIT- IV
Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in
employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management
of change implications of downsizing
UNIT- V
Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to
promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and
feedback
Course Outcome
Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more
effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change
process
REFERENCE BOOKS
A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human
Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education
Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill
Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage
South Asia Edition
K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation
Response Books
VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books
CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 608
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical
relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand
anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions
to ensure the organizational and individual success
UNIT-I
Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of
organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business
environment
UNIT-II
Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars
Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations
UNIT- III
Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock
Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system
(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)
UNIT- IV
Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and
repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally
appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural
negotiation and conflicts management
UNIT- V
Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual
countries Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development
of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning
Private Limited
G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill
Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley
Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing
Co
Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell
Business
Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times
McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp
Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation
Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson
Education India
GROUP DYNAMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 609
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group
dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group
effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of
resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding
UNIT-I
Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group
dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B
UNIT-II
Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group
Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash
Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress
UNIT-III
Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group
decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash
conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict
UNIT- IV
Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De
individuation theory
UNIT- V
Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources
of Change in groups
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups
REFERENCE BOOKS
Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley
Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass
Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co
Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE
Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and
application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax
along with basic concepts of VAT
UNIT-I
Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of
Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment
of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-II
Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature
and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax
planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business
UNIT-III
Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net
Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and
Penalties (Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-IV
Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for
service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of
Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)
UNIT- V
VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview
of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT
Law)
COURSE OUTCOME
Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields
REFERENCE BOOKS
Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications
Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub
Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House
T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India
BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson
S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann
R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _
INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 611
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important
components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO
Analysis etc
UNIT-I
INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian
Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role
in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)
UNIT-II
FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different
Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players
Different types of Instruments
UNIT-III
CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI
Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank
UNIT- IV
COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp
Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A
REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA
UNIT- V
NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies
Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture
Capital Funds
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment
Banking companies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication
Financial Services MY Khan TMH
Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication
S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran
ML Seth
FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 612
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and
prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of
uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding
of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role
of internal audit assessments
UNIT I
Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview
UNIT II
Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax
fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and
inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds
UNIT III
Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion
investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports
UNIT IV
Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using
Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)
UNIT V Case Study
1 Two Indian
2 Two international cases
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread
nature of fraud and its economic impact
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation
Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination
Cengage Learning
IT GROUP
INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 613
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security
managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues
in the information assurance field
UNIT I
Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian
Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its
application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law
Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour
Laws E-Media and Print Media
UNIT II
E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security
Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature
UNIT III
Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil
Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-
detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of
Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA
UNIT IV
IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal
issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base
UNIT V
Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of
Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules
COURSE OUTCOME-
Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House
Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co
John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River
Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher
Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University
E-GOVERNANCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 614
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information
Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an
awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the
issues concerning the Cyber security
UNIT I
Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National
E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status
UNIT II
E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process
Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges
UNIT III
E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-
Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics
UNIT IV
Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic
data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber
audit implications for e-governance
Unit V
Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and
construction of a joining table
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill
Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing
Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in
India ICFAI Press Hyderabad
B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill
H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications
V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd
IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 615
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization
UNIT I
IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT
Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo
Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for
IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library
UNIT II
Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service
Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support
Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change
Management Release Management
UNIT III
Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve
Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine
Recovery Data Retention
UNIT IV
Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security
Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection
UNIT V
IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and
Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and
Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of
Internet on Technical Support
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology
REFERENCE BOOKS
Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce
(OGC) TSO UK
Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos
Management Tata McGraw Hill
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 616
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques
and their management
UNIT I
Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations
of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and
distribution
UNIT II
Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and
factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging
of foods
UNIT III
Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food
industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO
etc
UNIT IV
Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products
cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking
confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of
fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH
Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie
Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing
Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH
MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 617
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing
concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs
UNIT I
Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution
channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-
farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing
UNIT II
Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds
Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of
NSC and State Seed Corporation
UNIT III
Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers
Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash
marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer
marketing
UNIT IV
Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash
marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of
electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity
UNIT V
Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm
machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines
implementsEquipmentlsquos
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with
various functional areas of agribusiness
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp
IBH
Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management
Kalyani
Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ
House
FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 618
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis
of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions
UNIT I
Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management
decisions farm management problems
UNIT II
Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle
principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc
UNIT III
Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm
records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement
farm efficiency measures
UNIT IV
Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc
UNIT V
Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to
counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks
and uncertainty
COURSE OUTCOME
Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses
REFERENCE BOOKS
Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall
Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ
Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ
Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ
RETAIL GROUP
BUYER BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA 619
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer
decisions making
UNIT-I
A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic
Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market
Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making
UNIT-II
Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles
of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer
Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and
Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product
Relationship
UNIT-III
Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to
information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-
Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors
Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications
UNIT-IV
Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing
Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-
Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions
Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy
UNIT-V
Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics
lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they
experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and
impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour
COURSE OUTCOME
Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the
choices consumers make
REFERENCE BOOKS
JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata
Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006
Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context
Excel Books NewDelhi-2001
Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous
DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing
Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi
Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining
Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005
Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000
RETAIL PLANNING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 620
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational
decision-making processes in the organized retail
UNIT I
Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail
Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-
Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative
methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management
UNIT II
Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics
Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp
non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion
designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting
Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-
Management of Obsolete goods
UNIT III
Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer
psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical
Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices
UNIT IV
Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-
Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp
Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective
Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer
Rights- Consumer Protection Acts
UNIT V
Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing
Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-
Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels
REFERENCE BOOKS
Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies
Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies
Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson
Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund
amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson
Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice
Hall of India New Delhi
Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies
Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best
People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd
RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 621
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the
value it creates
UNIT I
Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When
How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience
Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency
UNIT II
Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated
Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-
Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-
UNIT III
Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on
Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-
Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display
Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-
UNIT IV
Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium
Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and
Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-
Trade Dealing
UNIT V
Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-
Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating
Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing
to act in ways that increase loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -
Prentice-Hall
Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology
Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales
Promotion Techniques
Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate
Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page
Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books
George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing
Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill
PRODUCTION GROUP
PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL
Course Code 1Y3BBA 622
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a
basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of
facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality
control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an
understanding of the concept of aggregate planning
UNIT- I
Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors
Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-
requisites of PPC
UNIT- II
Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in
Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining
Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control
Models)
UNIT- III
Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection
Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master
production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of
software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II
UNIT- IV
Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n
job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling
Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)
UNIT- V
Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control
function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications
bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi
Deep and Deep Publications
PROCESS REENGINEERING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 623
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of
business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering
projects
UNIT- I
Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp
pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR
UNIT- II
Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering
project organizing for process reengineering
UNIT- III
Process analysis and design
a) Process analysis
(b) Process design
UNIT- IV
Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition
tracking and measuring process performance
UNIT- V
Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology
Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact
measurement
COURSE OUTCOME
To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the
considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-
engineering project
REFERENCE BOOKS
Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata
McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater
Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester
John Wiley amp Sons
WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn
the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time
standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering
to design of work systems
UNIT- I
Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos
productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity
Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time
Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities
Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was
developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph
UNIT- II
Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting
up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion
Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand
Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and
Design of Tools amp Equipment
UNIT- III
Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard
from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and
Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work
Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling
UNIT- IV
Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage
Incentive Plans
The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for
Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action
UNIT-V
Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion
Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System
Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts
Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional
including understanding the need for quality
REFERENCE BOOKS
iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill
ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation
Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp
Sons
Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall
Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall
Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press
Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall
Mall East and London
Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN
Course Code 1Y3BBA 625
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in
it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative
impacts of tourism development
UNIT I
Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism
Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of
Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in
Tourism Development
UNIT II
Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning
system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos
Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-
Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in
learning system
UNIT III
Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable
development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist
Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash
The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash
Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities
UNIT IV
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage
of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment
UNIT IV
Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the
Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National
Policy on Ecology and Environment
COURSE OUTCOME
To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global
perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international
tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for
sustainable tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash
Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications
Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers
Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William
Heinemann Ltd
Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices
London Pitman Publishing
Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York
Kendall Hunt Publishing Company
Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan
Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman
Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford
University Press
New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable
Development Approach VNR and New York
TOURISM MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 626
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism
and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing
that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products
before the stakeholders of tourism industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing
Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and
Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market
Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing
Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for
different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing
Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales
promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital
communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future
It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are
needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be
a part of this growth
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar
Thomson Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd
edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of
Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry
UNIT I
HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of
Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads
ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and
marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents
UNIT II
RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief
History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway
Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway
station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains
express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world
heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes
UNIT III
AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth
Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled
Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature
Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players
Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and
performance marketing strategies of Air India
UNIT IV
WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover
crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going
traffic) ndash National waterways
UNIT V
CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing
stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and
Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation
COURSE OUTCOME
Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of
the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management
REFERENCE BOOKS
RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 628
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of
its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing
knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital
Management
UNIT I
Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its
impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need
principles purpose
UNIT II
Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and
their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply
department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health
and patient safety
UNIT III
Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of
biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules
standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging
transportation amp storage
UNIT IV
Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier
methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal
decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of
wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan
UNIT V
Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party
insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash
meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural
disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague
typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics
COURSE OUTCOME
To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost
containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges
arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs
and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its
various components
REFERENCE BOOKS
Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication
First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn
Park k - Preventive and social medicine
Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot
MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 629
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted
advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public
relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any
potential crisis that may arise
UNIT I
Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches
to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of
marketing functions of marketing
UNIT II
Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment
Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market
segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash
positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing
UNIT III
Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior
(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying
decision process
UNIT IV
Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp
deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product
development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling
UNIT V
Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing
policies and strategies
Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management
decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels
COURSE OUTCOME
Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an
integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare
professionals and the public
REFERENCE BOOKS
Philip Kotler - marketing management
Wiliam jStanton - marketing management
Sherleker S A - marketing management
J C Gandhi - marketing management
Davar - modern marketing management
Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub
P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research
Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research
HOSPITALS RELATED LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 630
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of
common-law development
UNIT ndash I
Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties
sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance
act trust act societies registration act
UNIT ndashII
Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of
human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act
1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971
mental health act patient consent
UNIT ndash III
Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948
narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods
act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration
UNIT ndash IV
Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act
1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916
maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing
order) act trade union act industrial disputes act
UNIT ndashV
Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in
hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical
negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical
establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal
pronouncements rulings and regulations
REFERENCE BOOKS
Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer
Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law
Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 631
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India
To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural
Production system in India
To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India
To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development
UNIT -1
Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions
ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology
Case analysis and discussion
UNIT II
Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash
Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture
UNIT III
Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-
Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India
UNIT IV
Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of
holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus
land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas
UNIT V
Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash
Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and
schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM
COURSE OUTCOMES
Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management
Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India
Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development
REFERENCE BOOKS
Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution
Can We Make London Department for International Development
Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House
PANCHAYATI RAJ
Course Code 1Y3BBA632
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration
To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites
To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance
To provide insights on Rural Administration
To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes
UNIT I
Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction
Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges
Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration
(Official and non-official) and report submission
UNIT III
Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission
UNIT IV
Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and
Block- Panchayat relationship
Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play
UNIT V
Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government
Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan
Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
COURSE OUTCOMES
Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village
Development interventions
Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its
power Structure
Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and
Plans
Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes
32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959
Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise
Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi
Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New
Delhi
RURAL ECONOMY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 633
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy
To help students understand their role in rural economic development
To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources
To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation
To create awareness on rural economic development
UNIT I
Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-
Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries
(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in
agriculture individual production other production services
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-
Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash
Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land
Reforms
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
UNIT III
Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation
programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs
UNIT IV
Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work
UNIT V
Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing
ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for
the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy
Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village
Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues
Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation
Facilities
Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi
Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi
Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic
Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New
Delhi
INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER
Mid Semester Examination (MSE)
There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5
descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered
End Semester Examination (ESE)
There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks
each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of
10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered
Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations
The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment
Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be
applicable
(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )
Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type
End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size
SEMESTER I
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Ist SEMESTER
Course Details
External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allot
ted
Cred
its
Course Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor
Sessional
L
T
P
Subj
ect
wise
Distr
ibuti
on
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Ma
x
Mar
ks
Min
Mark
s
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mark
s
Theory Group
1Y3BBA101
Ability Enhanc
ement
Compul
sory
Course
MIL Hindi Communication
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA102
Core Course
Organization Behavior 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA103 Core
Course
Introduction to
Business Accountancy
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA104 Core Course
Business Environment
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA105 Core
Course
Principles of
Management 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA102
Organization
Behavior 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
1Y3BBA104 Business
Environment 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Grand
Total 600 20 5 - 24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
MIL HINDI COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 101
fgUnh Okdjk oa laizskk
इकाई-I
हहनदीवयाकरण और रचना सजञा सरवनाम हरशष ाण हिया अवयय कारक रचन सहधउपसगव परतयय
तथासमास
ह गहनणवय पयावयराची शबद हर ोम शबद अन क शबदो क ह ए एक शबद
शबद शदधि राकय शदधि महारर और ोकोदधिया पललरन एर सकष पण
इकाई-II
हनबध क ातथासमसामहयक एरराषटर ीय हरषया परहनबधा खन
इकाई-III
सपर षण (सचार)
-सपर षण की अरधारणऔरमहतव सपरष ाण क ह ए आरशयक शत सपरष ाण क परकार
सपर षणकामाधयम सपर षणक ा सपर षण की तकनीक राचनक ा समाचारराचन साकषातकारक ा
रचनातमक खनका कषय रचनातमक ख ानकाआधार भारऔरहरचारोकीपरसतहत राक क ा की
उपयोहगता
अनशसितपसतक -
रहतवयाकरणभासकर डा 0 रचनद रकमार
रहतहनबधाभासकर डा 0 रचनदर कमार
आधहनकहहनदीवयाकरणऔररचना डा 0 रासद रननदनपरसाद
रचनामानस परो0 राम शवरनाथहतरारी
वयरहाररकहहनदी डा 0 जग बहादरपाणड य
रचनातमक खन डा 0 रमश ागौतम
राजहसहहनदीहनबध परो0 आर0 एन0 गौड़
सफ हहनदीहनबध रतन शवर
हनबध सहचर डा 0 कषमणपरसाद
उपकारमहारर और ाक ोदधियाा पार 0 राज शवरपरसादचतरव दी
कहाहनयोकहारता की परतापअनम
समपर षणपरकहहनदीभाषाहशकषण डा 0 रशनानारग
श ीहरजञान डा 0 सर शकमार
श ीहरजञानपरहतमानऔरहरशल षण डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo
श ीहरजञानकाइहतहास डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo
ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA102
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students study the behaviour of individuals and groups as part of the social and technical system in
the workplace They examine individual and group behaviour communication conflict and various
management styles motivational techniques and coordination in the work environment and apply
these concepts to the development of an organizations human resources
UNIT I
Organization Overview of the concept and relevance of organizational Behaviour meaning Nature
Scope features approaches model challenges and opportunities functions amp Role of manager
Planning process Decision making Process
UNIT II
Foundation of individual Behavior Biography ability personality (determinants and models)
perception (definition components factors affecting perception in decision making) Values
Beliefs etc
UNIT III
Individual Behavior- Attitude Definition importance Types Attitude regarding- Job
Satisfaction Involvement commitment effects of employee attitude changing attitudes
Learning Definition nature theories classical conditioning operant conditioning cognitive
Learning Social learning
UNIT IV
Motivation Concept and theories (Maslow McGregor Herzberg ERG) merits amp demerits Group
dynamics amp Team work Nature theories types of group Definition Stages of Group Development
effectiveness potential problems Analysis of Interpersonal Relationship Transactional Analysis
Johari Window
UNIT- V
Organizational change and development approaches and methods stress nature source effects
conflicts employee counseling approaches extra mural penitential learning programmers case
study
COURSE OUTCOME
To explain group dynamics and demonstrate skills required for working in groups (team building)
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Luthans Fred Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India
bull Mishra MN Behaviour Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
bull Newstrom W John Davis Keith Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India
bull LM Roy Organisational Behaviour S Chand Publication
bull Dr FC Sharma Organisational Behaviour SBPD Publications
INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ACCOUNTING
Course Code 1Y3BBA103
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable students to synthesize related information and evaluate options for most logical and
optimal solution such that they would be able to predict and control cost incurrence and improve
results
UNIT- I
Accounting Basic of Accounting Accounting Mechanics-Double Entry System Classification
Rules for Debit amp Credit Journal Ledger and Trial Balance sub-division of journal Ledger meaning subdivision and mechanics of Posting balancing ledger accounts
UNIT- II
Cash book and Subsidiary books of Accounting Kinds of Cash Book Purchase day book and sale
day Book Bank reconciliation statement Measurement of income- Adjusting entries- rectification of
errors- Adjusted trial balance
UNIT-III
Preparation of financial statements- Trading account Profit amp Loss account Balance Sheet (with
Adjustments) Accounting for Non-profit organization Accounting Procedures Receipts amp payment
accounts income ampexpenditure account problems
UNIT- IV
Depreciation- Meaning Determinant factors Method amp Significance Basic Concepts of hire
purchase amp installments
UNIT- V
Partnership-Preliminary admission of a partner Company Accounts-Issue of shares Debentures
Forfeitures and reissue of shares
COURSE OUTCOME
Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of product and services in the
Organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
SA Siddiqui- Comprehensive Accounting
TS Greval- Introduction to Accounting
Mukherjee and M Accounting (Volume-I)
SN Maheshwar- Introduction to Accounting (Vikas Publication)
CAC Rama Gopal Accounting For Managers (New Age)
BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational
and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business
UNIT I
Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro
environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis
for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business
UNIT II
Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic
systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years
plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent
economic initiatives NitiAyog
UNIT III
Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment
problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance
of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural
Development Problems of Growth
UNIT IV
Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment
Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA
and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act
UNIT V
International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational
Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic
Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-
GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India
COURSE OUTCOME
Outline how an entity operates in a business environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996
Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi
Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan
Chand Delhi
Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA105
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to
articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate
effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the
consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and
quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods
UNIT-I
Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of
Management Functions of the Manager
UNIT- II
Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of
Planning
Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and
type of Policies
Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems
involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques
UNIT- III
Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of
Units and committees
Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship
UNIT- IV
Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training
Directing Nature and purpose and directing
UNIT- V
Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control
process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies
COURSE OUTCOME-
Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques
managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of
managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify
and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own
position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied
audiences
Reference Books
bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher
bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson
Education
bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt
Ltd 4th Ed
bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill
Publications
SEMESTER II
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distributio
n
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor
Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distribu
tion Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Ma
x
Ma
rks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme
nt
Compulsory
Course
English
communication
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA202 Core Course
Management concept amp
Principle
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA203 Core
Course
Environmental
Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA204 Core
Course
Monetary
Economics and
Indian Banking
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA205 Core
Course
Business
Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA205 Business
Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhanceme
nt
Skill Enhancement
Elective
Course-I
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand
Total 600 21 5 - 24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
ENGLISH COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA201
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English
language teaching and content writing sectors
UNIT I
Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning
Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening
UNIT II
Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive
writing expansion of an idea
UNIT III
Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing
(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume
writing covering letter
UNIT IV
Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases
UNIT V
Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb
agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions
(Advanced)
COURSE OUTCOME
To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill
Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul
Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan
Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das
Orient Blackswan
Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press
Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication
MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 202
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and
process of effective controlling in the organization
UNIT I
Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science
Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)
UNIT II
School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and
Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)
Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management
UNIT III
Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing
Staffing Directing and Coordinating
UNIT IV
Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command
Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control
UNIT V
Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure
determination Forms- formal amp informal organization
Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations
COURSE OUTCOME
Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial
functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management
REFERENCE BOOKS
LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management
VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management
James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB
Fred Luthans- OB
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 203
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links
between human and natural systems
UNIT I
Introduction to environmental studies
Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability
and sustainable development
UNIT II
Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an
ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following
ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds
streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)
Unit III
Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to
mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and
over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international
ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate
energy sources growing energy needs case studies
UNIT IV
Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem
diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots
Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and
Informational value
UNIT V
Environmental Pollution
Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution
Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and
Industrial waste Pollution case studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social
and environmental processes
REFERENCE BOOKS
California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London
Routledge
Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security
Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press
Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of
ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006
Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37
McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books
McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the
Twentieth Century
Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders
Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic
Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt
Ltd
Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons
Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi
1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP
Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation
S Chand Publishing New Delhi
MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING
Course Code 1Y3BBA204
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using
statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills
within the contest of subject matter of economics
UNIT I
Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of
Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value
of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income
theory of Money
UNIT II
Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people
Money Market
UNIT III
Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial
Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks
UNIT IV
Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control
methods and Tools of Monetary Policy
UNIT V
RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative
Banks and Rural Banks
COURSE OUTCOME
Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and
mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of
economics
REFERENCE BOOKS
MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi
LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi
Crowther- An Out Line of Money
Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant
KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ
BUSINESS COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA205
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative
scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication
UNIT I
Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports
OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)
UNIT II
Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other
words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis
UNIT III
Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers
Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers
UNIT IV
Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a
Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication
Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)
UNIT V
Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written
Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp
minutes
COURSE OUTCOME
To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical
proficiency in the development of exposition and argument
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wren amp Martin
K Madhukar- Business Communication
VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication
Asha Laul- Business Communication
Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH
SEMESTER III
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotte
d
Credit
s
Course Code Course
Type
Course
Title
Total
Mark
s
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subjec
t wise
Distrib
ution
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA301
Ability
Enhancement
IT Tool for Business
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA302
Core Course
Introduction to Marketing
Management
100 50 17 20 7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA303 Core
Course
Business
Law
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA304 Core
Course
Business
statistics for
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA305
Core
Course
Retail
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA304 Practical
Business
statistics for Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill
Enhancemen
t Elective Course-II
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand Total 600 24
IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 301
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software
components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data
base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT
UNIT-I
Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and
Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World
Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept
UNIT-II
Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different
computer generation
UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and
Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming
Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-
principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart
examples
UNIT-IV
Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation
applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)
Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information
System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems
Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human
Resources Management Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations
Understand the hardware and software components of the computer
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford
2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication
3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication
4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill
INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 302
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply
these to a new or existing business
UNIT I
Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept
amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro
environment
UNIT II
Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of
Product Line amp Product- mix
UNIT III
Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing
decisions Overview of pricing process
UNIT IV
Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product
Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage
UNIT V
Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to
marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct
selling
COURSE OUTCOME
To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct
an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an
appropriate format
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Philip Kotler
2 TN Chabra
3 TK Panda
4 SH Kazmi
5 Arun Kumar
BUSINESS LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 303
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal
environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with
knowledge of legal principles
UNIT-I
Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration
capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts
Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp
Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency
UNIT-II
Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp
Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales
UNIT-III
Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -
Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a
negotiable instrument
UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of
non-registration Dissolution of a firm
UNIT-V
Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of
Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013
COURSE OBJECTIVE
On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to
individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context
Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 ND Kapoor
2 Tulsian
3 MC Kuchhal
4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business
BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 304
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management
UNIT I
Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance
Scope and Limitation of Statistic
UNIT II
Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar
Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive
UNIT III
Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic
Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures
of dispersion
UNIT IV
Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and
Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index
number CPI WPI IIP
UNIT V
Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank
Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series
COURSE OUTCOME
Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically
discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons
2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication
3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication
RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in
India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone
Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT
FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan
Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process
UNIT II
FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail
Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors
Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing
MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer
Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design
and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication
UNIT III
STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty
Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors
UNIT IV
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management
IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service
Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM
Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying
UNIT V
MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at
Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems
at Retail Centers
Course Outcome-
Reference Books
bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education
bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A
Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education
The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge
about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various
aspects of retail operations
After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with
the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the
entire retail operations
SEMESTER IV
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code Course
Type Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subject
wise
Distributio
n
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mark
s
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-401
Ability
Enhanceme
nt
Introduction to
soft skill amp
Team Building
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA-402 Core Course
Introduction to
financial
management
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-403 Core Course
Advertising
and Sales
Promotion
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-404 Core Course
Management
of Human resource
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of
Business
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group
Term End
Practical
Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-404 Practical
Management
of Human
resource
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-405 Practical
Macro
Economics of Business
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
Grand Total 550 22
INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 401
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate
students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners
by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are
learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for
their own learning
UNIT ndash I
General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of
Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences
Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making
Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of
communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of
Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation
UNIT ndash II
Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing
skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice
modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements
General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral
skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive
Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style
UNIT ndash III
Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format
and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in
Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active
Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD
UNIT ndash IV
Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction
Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview
Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing
Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of
Conversation
UNIT ndash V
Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional
Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers
COURSE OUTCOME
To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills
and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin
bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar
INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 402
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital
decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and
raising long-term finance
UNIT I
Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives
Role of finance manager
UNIT II
Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of
investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return
Comparison between NPV amp IRR
UNIT III
Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of
Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning
capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure
UNIT IV
The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage
Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating
Leverage
UNIT V
Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital
estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of
inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order
Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy
COURSE OUTCOME
Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial
manager in the current competitive business scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 IM Pandey
2 P Chandra
3 SP Gupta
4 MY Khan
ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 403
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may
review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos
homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions
UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising
budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for
Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising
UNIT II
Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy
Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role
types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council
of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)
UNIT III
Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring
awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of
design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet
advertising and evaluation of advertising
UNIT IV
Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors
influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option
Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of
consumer schemes and other methods of promotion
UNIT V
Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs
Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales
personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion
COURSE OUTCOME
Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how
these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its
relation to todaylsquos marketplace
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall
Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi
Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi
Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications
MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 404
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource
management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational
setting
UNIT-I
Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with
special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in
strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management
UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge
workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)
Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)
UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of
human resource department and the role of human resource manager
UNITndashIV
Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification
rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation
UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection
(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction
COURSE OUTCOME
To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training
Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical
Behaviour
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi
Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New
Delhi
Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York
HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications
A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications
MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the
important indicators of the economy and their significance
UNIT I
Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of
Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income
Personal and Personal disposable income
UNIT II
Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income
Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and
Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator
Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate
demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy
UNIT III
Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate
demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government
expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary
and fiscal policy
UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary
policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production
Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation
monetary measures fiscal measures
UNIT V
Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and
corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in
open economy
COURSE OUTCOME
To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the
role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson
2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill
3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers
4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson
SEMESTER V
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment
Internal Assessment Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-501
Ability Enhancement
Public Relation amp Corporate Image
50
25
8
10
4
15
6
2
-
-
2
1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and
small Business
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-503
Core Course Principle of
Economics
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-502
Practical Entrepreneurship and
small Business
50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics
50
25 08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Skill Course
Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill Enhancement
Elective Course-III
50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2
Grand Total
600
24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication
1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management
1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India
1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation
1Y3BBA509 Organization Development
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision
1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management
1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA513 Database Management System
1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service
1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy
1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management
1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management
1Y3BBA520 Stores Management
1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA522 Technology Management
1Y3BBA523 Productivity
1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept
1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management
1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System
1Y3BBA529 Health Economics
1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management
(Rural Management Group )
1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity
1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment
1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management
SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES
Non-Technical
Elective No Department Faculty Name
Faculty of Information Technology
I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)
II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)
IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)
V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Management
I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)
II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)
III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development
Faculty of Commerce
I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)
II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Humanities
I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)
II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)
III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Science
I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)
II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)
III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)
IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)
V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Education
I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)
II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)
PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA501
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts
of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling
and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization
UNIT- I
Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash
Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy
Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors
ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public
Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations
UNIT- II
Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service
Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social
Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy
for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation
Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event
Management
UNIT- III
Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash
Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public
Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of
Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control
UNIT IV
Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies
Components of an Individual Image
Advertising and Corporate Image
Public Relations of an Institutions
UNIT V
The Grapevine and Rumours
Stereotype
Propaganda
Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations
applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different
entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling
REFERENCE BOOKS
Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House
Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House
Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University
Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill
This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning
ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-
The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding
processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to
those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic
environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide
evidence which informs those debates
UNIT I
Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of
Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its
environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship
UNIT II
Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship
development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the
Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making
UNIT III
Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that
enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in
Social context Start Up
UNIT IV
Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional
source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital
UNIT V
Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication
2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd
3 Vasant Desai
4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH
PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 503
COURSE OBJECTIVES-
To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production
UNIT- I
Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits
UNIT-II
Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus
movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts
of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications
of demand and supply price rationing price floors
Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price
elasticity cross and income elasticity
UNIT-III
Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility
Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp
Producer surplus
UNIT-IV
Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant
and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue
and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale
UNIT-V
Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of
the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run
equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment
concept
COURSE OUTCOME-
To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011
bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th
edition
2007
bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA
bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press
Oxford
bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore
MARKETING GROUP
INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so
that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to
enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications
UNIT-I
Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC
in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising
appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion
relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship
between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods
Interactive Internet Marketing
UNIT-II
Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach
establishing and allocating promotional budget
UNIT-III
IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different
forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning
creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design
considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client
Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork
UNIT-IV
Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering
key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and
media research
Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration
client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc
UNIT-V
Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing
Communications
COURSE OUTCOME-
To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches
and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to
communicating to target audiences
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc
Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard
D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois
Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing
House
Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and
Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication
Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH
Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing
Communications Pearson Education Limited
Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc
Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House
Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning
Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc
Homewood Illinois
Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic
Approach Cengage Learning
Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India
Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education
SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT
Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE
It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and
distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and
distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners
UNIT-I
Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies
Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling
objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring
Procedure Socialization
UNIT-II
Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program
Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation
Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial
Evaluation of Contest
UNIT-III
Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel
Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales
Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process
UNIT-IV
Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key
tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market
Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation
UNIT-V
Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners
Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict
Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International
Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales
COURSE OUTCOME
Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the
sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans
participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables
REFERENCE BOOKS
Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres
Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books
Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI
L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills
Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets
Greenwood Publishing Group
Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub
ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH
Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing
consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing
research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students
within a course project
UNIT-I
Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing
Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research
Process Marketing Research Designs
UNIT-II
The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques
Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of
Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic
Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical
Analysis Tools
UNIT-III
Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)
ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor
Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental
Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores
Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-
hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number
UNIT-IV
Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product
Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant
Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification
Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing
Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and
their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity
UNIT-V
Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning
in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report
and class presentation of the same
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from
analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor
analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis
REFERENCE BOOKS
Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi
William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi
Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi
Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill
Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research
Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey
Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning
Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp
Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced
in the class
HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP
LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA
Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of
Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity
objectivity and understandings
UNIT-I
The Factories Act 1948
The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923
The Employees State Insurance Act 1948
UNIT-II
The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952
The Payment of gratuity Act 1972
UNIT-III
The Maternity Benefit Act 1961
The Minimum Wages act 1948
UNIT-IV
The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946
The Payment of Bonus Act 1965
UNIT-V
The Apprentices Act 1969
The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959
COURSE OUTCOME ndash
To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour
Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the
organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to
follow the Laws applicable to the establishment
REFERENCE BOOKS
S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications
S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi
Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot
V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House
N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons
INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE
In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our
country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of
Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be
acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the
concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India
UNIT-I
Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors
affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial
relation programme
Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact
of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes
lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry
UNIT-II
Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal
Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective
bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective
collective bargaining collective bargaining in India
UNIT-III
Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education
scheme in India- objectives functions and problems
Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation
schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India
UNIT-IV
Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India
major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions
registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union
UNIT-V
Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery
Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation
submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court
industrial tribunals
Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power
of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute
COURSE OUTCOME
Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective
bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute
resolution
REFERENCE BOOKS
Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts
IIPM Personnel Management in India
Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business
Publication Ltd
Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India
Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India
Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication
Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co
Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law
ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational
culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the
human values in individuals
UNIT-I
Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational
Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development
Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining
and survey research amp feedback methodology
UNIT-II
Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in
organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief
systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development
UNIT-III
Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component
interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief
of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action
UNIT-IV
OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team
building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process
interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions
important for successful OD efforts
UNIT ndash V
HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational
implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional
Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have
improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi
Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York
McGrawhill
Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in
addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a
good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company
UNIT-I
Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm
Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-
Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of
Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering
UNIT-II
Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the
analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount
of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a
Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and
Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis
UNIT-III
Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues
and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements
medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings
Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project
finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing
UNIT-IV
Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of
financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing
Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect
cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization
UNIT-V
Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value
Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic
indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added
Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total
Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)
COURSE OUTCOME
Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and
corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts
REFERENCE BOOKS
Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill
Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons
INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial
environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a
multinational corporation
UNIT-I
Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation
functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial
management International monetary system
UNIT-II
Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories
ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible
exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer
Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options
Currency swaps and interest rate swaps
UNIT-III
Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction
transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction
exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The
national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International
capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)
UNIT-IV
International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic
considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)
Financial risk and cost of capital
Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of
capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-
20 subsidiaries and tax havens
UNIT-V
International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their
comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets
Recent developments in the Euro bond market
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations
and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley
PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall
Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall
Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis
Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co
Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall
Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers
Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath
FINANCIAL INCLUSION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion
such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss
the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to
promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models
UNIT-I
Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting
Access to Financial Services
Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive
Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators
UNIT-II
Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey
Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional
Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card
UNIT-III
Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India
Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations
Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor
UNIT-IV
SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of
microfinance evolved in India
Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial
Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for
Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for
Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People
UNIT-V
Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises
Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion
and Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account
initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage
Publication
Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House
Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech
Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications
Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications
Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing
Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI
Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI
Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag
Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion
Academic Foundation
IT GROUP
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to
manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the
hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment
UNIT-I
The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures
File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base
Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial
Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness
UNIT-II
Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface
with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database
Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design
UNIT-III
Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database
Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database
Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases
UNIT-IV
DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance
Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues
UNIT-V
Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the
field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective
faculty during the coverage of syllabus
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic
concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational
algebra and SQL
REFERENCE BOOKS
Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs
Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan
Press
McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co
MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It
aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing
implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services
UNIT-I
The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development
Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The
Enabling Environment for ITES
UNIT-II
Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled
Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of
Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services
UNIT-III
Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support
Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions
UNIT-IV
International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting
Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in
facilitating Trade in ITESTITES
UNIT-V
Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of
Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of
Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace
Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations
and integrate the learning in handling these complexities
REFERENCE BOOKS
Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat
E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information
technology with various aspects of Software Project Management
UNIT-I
Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision
and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM
Framework
UNIT-II
Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning
Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan
Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration
and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning
UNIT-III
Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an
Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques
Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule
Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools
UNIT-IV
Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance
Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior
Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review
UNIT-V
Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks
Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk
COURSE OUTCOME
Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business
context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business
scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson
Education Ltd
P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp
Tsinghua University Press
R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance
Management Concepts Pub
Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group
B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science
Press
A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications
G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on
understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business
UNIT I
Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm
production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country
UNIT II
Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms
and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business
sector
UNIT III
Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations
relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries
UNIT IV
Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment
and policy
UNIT V
Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies
COURSE OUTCOME
Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper
and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain
REFERENCE BOOKS
Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons
Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ
Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 517
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies
strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms
UNIT I
Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market
structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp
significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of
marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour
UNIT II
Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash
significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product
product life cycle
UNIT III
Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies
and pricing methods
UNIT IV
Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and
standardization
UNIT V
Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural
products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in
agribusiness
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better
understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for
agricultural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH
Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall
Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control
Pearson Edu
Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu
Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India
FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 518
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food
marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen
and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural
political and economic forces over time
UNIT I
Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade
Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of
Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic
factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer
UNIT II
Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling
food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing
in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions
across the chain in food retail food service marketing
UNIT III
4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing
Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system
Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement
Strategies for food retailers
UNIT IV
Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling
Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food
Products
UNIT V
Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training
Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in
retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze
Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing
REFERENCE BOOKS
Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of
India
Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu
Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill
RETAIL GROUP
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in
the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it
UNIT- I
Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management
Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain
networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain
Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network
UNIT- II
Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer
service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs
multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier
Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants
UNIT- III
Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory
models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system
UNIT- IV
COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip
Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION
TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain
Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management
UNIT- V
Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a
Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance
measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics
quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics
COURSE OUTCOME
After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain
which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House
bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers
bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg
bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi
bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan
STORES MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 520
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different
terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned
areas
UNIT- I
Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the
location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design
UNIT- II
Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual
Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors
UNIT- III
Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at
Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores
Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments
UNIT- IV
Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies
Quick Response System
UNIT- V
Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact
on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space
Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization
COURSE OUTCOME
The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern
and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management
bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing
bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach
bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing
bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing
RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 521
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail
Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail
business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management
UNIT I
Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail
equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail
market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-
Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India
UNIT II
Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development
The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and
Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-
Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on
ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response
marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks
The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management
UNIT III
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM
Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch
points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services
Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM
Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding
Common Barriers
UNIT IV
Services Management
Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the
service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-
Supply relationships vehicle routing
UNIT V
Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising
Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping
the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand
management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-
2nd edition 2006
MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational
edititionUS1798
Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education
New Delhi 2003
JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy
Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi
Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy
Pearson Education New Delhi 2004
KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005
Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007
Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House
Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution
rosenbloom and Education Foundation US
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT
TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 522
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
UNIT- I
Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology
Change Implication
UNIT- II
Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying
UNIT- III
Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology
Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management
UNIT- IV
Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology
Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages
UNIT- V
Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise
Level
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to
manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009
bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009
bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson
PRODUCTIVITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 523
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
UNIT- I
Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and
external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work
Contents and Ineffective Time
UNIT- II
Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram
String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart
UNIT- III
Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart
UNIT- IV
Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be
Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement
UNIT- V
Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International
Labour Office Geneva
bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed
bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill
bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India
QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO
Course Code 1Y3BBA 524
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify
the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and
measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current
issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans
UNIT- I
Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives
UNIT- II
Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect
concept
UNIT- III
Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality
UNIT- IV
Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various
control Charts
UNIT- V
Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification
COURSE OUTCOME-
Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to
explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key
aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for
controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp
communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze
the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise
and evaluate quality implementation plans
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay
bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd
bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas
bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd
bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition
7th
Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012
bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM CONCEPTS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 525
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism
To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash
Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp
Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and
development of Tourism through the ages
UNIT II
COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash
Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism
inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious
Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions
incentives sports and adventure tourism
UNIT III
TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash
Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of
motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash
health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and
push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists
UNIT IV
IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash
Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts
- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism
UNIT V
SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-
Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote
Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable
Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and
experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of
tourism experiences
REFERENCES BOOKS
Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling
Publishers Private Limited New Delhi
Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism
Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited
Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill
International
Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors
New Delhi
Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas
Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New
Delhi
TOURISM MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 526
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the basic concept and various components of management
UNIT I
MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-
Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of
management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)
Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management
UNIT II
PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-
Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of
planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by
objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance
and limitation of decision making
UNIT III
ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash
Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of
staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance
appraisal
UNIT IV
DIRECTING ndash
Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation
(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy
theory)
UNIT V
LEADERSHIP-
Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path
Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to
communication
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives
Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of
tourism as well as the impacts of tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc
Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New
Delhi
Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition
AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing
House New Delhi
Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition
Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations
To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism
industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-
Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing
Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and
Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash
Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New
Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING -
Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION -
Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity
Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in
promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level
which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described
REFERENCES BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson
Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition
Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent
learning
UNIT I
Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health
Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural
History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention
UNIT II
Definition and meaning of hospital ndash
Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing
concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of
Hospitals
UNIT III
Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector
Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in
delivering healthcare in India
UNIT IV
Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural
hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description
UNIT V
The reforms of Healthcare System-
The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare
reforms amp Future of Healthcare System
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding
the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the
management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and
organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services
REFERENCE BOOKS
The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991
Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd
Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers
HEALTH ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 529
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and
understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict
peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different
social actions
UNIT I
Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and
importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below
Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits
UNIT II
Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve
techniques and properties of indifference curve
UNIT III
Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash
Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of
Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of
Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of
demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash
Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue
UNIT IV
Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two
variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves
UNIT V
Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash
Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and
monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market
situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price
determination
COURSE OUTCOME
To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from
an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic
evaluation of a health intervention or program
REFERENCE BOOKS
Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR
Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP
Managerial Economics - Gupta GS
Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani
Business Economics - Sharma NK
Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar
Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi
Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL
HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 530
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions
related to records management in the healthcare environment
UNIT I
Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record
keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records
UNIT II
Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health
Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research
UNIT III
Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics
investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing
Pharmacy etc Audits)
UNIT IV
Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems
associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic
Related Groups (DRG)
UNIT V
Medical Registers ndash
Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various
departments amp common problems faced
COURSE OUTCOME
Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New
Delhi 1999
Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995
Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi
George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003
Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 531
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India
To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India
UNIT I
Rural Society in India
Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-
urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and
subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural
life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion
UNIT II
Rural Society
Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social
institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity
and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of
rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT-III
Village India
Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance
contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and
political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology
Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class
UNIT IV
Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics
Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid
growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope
and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -
Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT-V
Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times
Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social
processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India
Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy
Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms
REFERENCE BOOKS
Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi
Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay
PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House
SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication
House Delhi
ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 532
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To explain the nature of environmental studies
To introduce aspects of Natural resources
To introduce aspects of ecosystems
To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation
To introduce aspects of environmental pollution
To create awareness on social issues and environment
To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
UNIT I
Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for
public awareness
UNIT II
Ecosystems
Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and
decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and
Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the
following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic
Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)
UNIT III
Biodiversity and its Conservation
Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification
of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option
Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports
of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-
Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ
Conservation of biodiversity
UNIT IV
Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil
pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste
Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an
individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods
earthquake cyclone and landslides
20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT V
Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water
Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of
People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible
responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and
holocaust
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the nature of environmental studies
Classify renewable and non-renewable resources
Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues
Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation
Analyze aspects of environmental pollution
Describe aspects of social issues and environment
Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner
Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental
Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai
Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA
RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 533
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts
To familiarize Rural marketing strategy
To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems
To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing
To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages
UNIT I
Overview of Rural Marketing
Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing
and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction
Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class
UNIT II
Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for
rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT III
Rural Distribution Systems
Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche
markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of
Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT IV
ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network
(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction
Methodology Group Project work
UNIT V
Market support
Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role
play
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Market their products
Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products
Choose an appropriate distribution system
Apply ICT in rural marketing
Source the finance for rural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India
Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education
Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi
SEMESTER- VI
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allot
ted
Cred
its
Course
Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mark
s
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-601
Core
Course
E- Commerce
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-602 Core
Course
Customer
Relationship Management
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-603 Practical
Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva
Voce
100
50
17
-
-
50
20
- - 4 4
1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Grand Total
550
22
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one
paper presentation certificate in related discipline
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management
1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing
1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA607 Management of Change
1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management
1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management
1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service
1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business
1Y3BBA614 E- Governance
1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management
1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing
1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour
1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning
1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design
1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control
1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan
1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing
1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management
1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care
1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law
(Rural Management Group)
1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System
1Y3BBA632
Panchayati Raj
1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy
E- COMMERCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 601
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is
designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the
technical foundation for understanding information systems
UNIT I
Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting
online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a
business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-
commerce
UNIT II
Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet
(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A
systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing
vs in-house development of a website)
UNIT III
Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension
definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security
intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)
technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and
protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)
UNIT IV
E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards
e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online
banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house
automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments
UNIT V
Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting
online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of
utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online
services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and
entertainment
COURSE OUTCOME-
Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information
systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Management Information System Jawadekar
bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon
bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana
bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)
bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty
CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 602
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of
Customer Relationship Management in the organizations
UNIT- I
Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature
of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive
and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and
evaluating customer business plans
UNIT- II
Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer
database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing
customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively
Planning and making persuasive presentations
UNIT- III
Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality
Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality
managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and
Cross- sell
UNIT- IV
Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations
Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority
setting Target setting setting standards
UNIT- V
Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction
COURSE OUTCOME-
To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship
Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd
Ed Response Books Sage Publication
Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House
Pvt Ltd
Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books
Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management
V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008
Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management
South Western Cengage Learning
Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press
Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age
International
Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan
Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of
India Private Limted New Delhi 2011
S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private
Limted New Delhi 2008
ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 603
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to
work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn
the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final
semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by
the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a
student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their
analytical capabilities and experience
DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)
Title of the study (Cover Page)
Declaration
Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)
Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)
Acknowledgement
Table of Contents
Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used
1 INTRODUCTION
11 Introduction
12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research
12 Significance of the study
13 Scope of the study
14 Research Problem
15 Objective of the study
17 Hypothesis
18 Limitations of the study
2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students
to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they
learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After
the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is
evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report
should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to
provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also
able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business
operations and come up with the ways to tap the
Opportunities
3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
31 Introduction
32 Population of the study
33 Sampling Design
331 Sampling Technique
332 Sampling Method
333 Sample Size
34 Research Instrument
35 Sources of data
351 Primary Data
352 Secondary Data
4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION
5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION
Bibliography
COURSE OUTCOME-
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able
to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and
come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities
MARKETING GROUP
PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 604
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the
context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product
manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions
UNIT- I
Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused
organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management
Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-
cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product
Development
UNIT- II
Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods
of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in
international Market
UNIT- III
Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity
concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand
Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image
UNIT- IV
Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system
measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement
Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market
segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining
and establishing brand values
UNIT- V
Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand
extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time
Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand
Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation
COURSE OUTCOME
The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of
Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for
Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning
implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer
Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi
Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi
Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi
Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education
New Delhi
Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi
Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata
McGraw Hill New Delhi
Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi
STRATEGIC MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 605
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and
implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and
managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver
superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation
through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills
UNIT- I
Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash
Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of
Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying
Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting
Marketing Objectives
UNIT-II
Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching
Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy
Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle
Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies
UNIT-III
Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp
Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models
UNIT- IV
Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives
Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy
Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing
UNIT- V
Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at
different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by
executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and
interdisciplinary nature
REFERENCE BOOKS
Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt
D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin
OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage
Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill
Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp
Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson
Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann
Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India
George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press
J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and
Programs McGraw-Hill Companies
Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub
Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon
P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave
E-MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 606
COURSE OBJECTIVE
It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance
enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns
UNIT- I
Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics
Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan
Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing
UNIT- II
Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in
India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within
communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing
UNIT- III
Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet
as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet
User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-
branding
UNIT- IV
Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-
marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools
Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent
Trends in e-customer service
UNIT- V
Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web
Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing
campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising
Course Outcome
Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics
online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its
implication on marketing strategy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a
networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill
Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall
Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning
Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books
Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial
Times
HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 607
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be
Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students
Understand the importance of managing change
UNIT- I
Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-
Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of
human resource strategies in implementing Change
UNIT-II
Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR
implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation
and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions
UNIT-III
HR Processes amp Change
Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned
change
Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change
UNIT- IV
Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in
employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management
of change implications of downsizing
UNIT- V
Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to
promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and
feedback
Course Outcome
Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more
effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change
process
REFERENCE BOOKS
A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human
Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education
Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill
Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage
South Asia Edition
K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation
Response Books
VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books
CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 608
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical
relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand
anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions
to ensure the organizational and individual success
UNIT-I
Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of
organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business
environment
UNIT-II
Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars
Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations
UNIT- III
Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock
Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system
(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)
UNIT- IV
Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and
repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally
appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural
negotiation and conflicts management
UNIT- V
Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual
countries Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development
of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning
Private Limited
G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill
Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley
Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing
Co
Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell
Business
Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times
McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp
Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation
Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson
Education India
GROUP DYNAMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 609
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group
dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group
effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of
resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding
UNIT-I
Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group
dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B
UNIT-II
Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group
Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash
Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress
UNIT-III
Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group
decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash
conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict
UNIT- IV
Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De
individuation theory
UNIT- V
Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources
of Change in groups
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups
REFERENCE BOOKS
Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley
Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass
Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co
Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE
Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and
application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax
along with basic concepts of VAT
UNIT-I
Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of
Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment
of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-II
Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature
and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax
planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business
UNIT-III
Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net
Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and
Penalties (Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-IV
Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for
service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of
Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)
UNIT- V
VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview
of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT
Law)
COURSE OUTCOME
Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields
REFERENCE BOOKS
Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications
Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub
Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House
T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India
BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson
S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann
R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _
INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 611
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important
components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO
Analysis etc
UNIT-I
INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian
Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role
in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)
UNIT-II
FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different
Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players
Different types of Instruments
UNIT-III
CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI
Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank
UNIT- IV
COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp
Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A
REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA
UNIT- V
NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies
Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture
Capital Funds
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment
Banking companies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication
Financial Services MY Khan TMH
Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication
S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran
ML Seth
FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 612
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and
prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of
uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding
of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role
of internal audit assessments
UNIT I
Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview
UNIT II
Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax
fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and
inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds
UNIT III
Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion
investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports
UNIT IV
Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using
Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)
UNIT V Case Study
1 Two Indian
2 Two international cases
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread
nature of fraud and its economic impact
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation
Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination
Cengage Learning
IT GROUP
INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 613
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security
managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues
in the information assurance field
UNIT I
Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian
Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its
application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law
Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour
Laws E-Media and Print Media
UNIT II
E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security
Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature
UNIT III
Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil
Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-
detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of
Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA
UNIT IV
IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal
issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base
UNIT V
Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of
Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules
COURSE OUTCOME-
Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House
Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co
John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River
Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher
Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University
E-GOVERNANCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 614
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information
Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an
awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the
issues concerning the Cyber security
UNIT I
Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National
E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status
UNIT II
E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process
Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges
UNIT III
E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-
Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics
UNIT IV
Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic
data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber
audit implications for e-governance
Unit V
Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and
construction of a joining table
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill
Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing
Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in
India ICFAI Press Hyderabad
B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill
H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications
V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd
IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 615
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization
UNIT I
IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT
Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo
Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for
IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library
UNIT II
Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service
Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support
Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change
Management Release Management
UNIT III
Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve
Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine
Recovery Data Retention
UNIT IV
Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security
Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection
UNIT V
IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and
Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and
Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of
Internet on Technical Support
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology
REFERENCE BOOKS
Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce
(OGC) TSO UK
Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos
Management Tata McGraw Hill
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 616
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques
and their management
UNIT I
Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations
of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and
distribution
UNIT II
Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and
factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging
of foods
UNIT III
Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food
industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO
etc
UNIT IV
Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products
cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking
confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of
fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH
Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie
Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing
Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH
MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 617
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing
concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs
UNIT I
Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution
channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-
farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing
UNIT II
Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds
Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of
NSC and State Seed Corporation
UNIT III
Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers
Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash
marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer
marketing
UNIT IV
Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash
marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of
electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity
UNIT V
Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm
machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines
implementsEquipmentlsquos
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with
various functional areas of agribusiness
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp
IBH
Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management
Kalyani
Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ
House
FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 618
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis
of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions
UNIT I
Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management
decisions farm management problems
UNIT II
Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle
principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc
UNIT III
Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm
records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement
farm efficiency measures
UNIT IV
Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc
UNIT V
Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to
counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks
and uncertainty
COURSE OUTCOME
Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses
REFERENCE BOOKS
Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall
Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ
Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ
Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ
RETAIL GROUP
BUYER BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA 619
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer
decisions making
UNIT-I
A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic
Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market
Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making
UNIT-II
Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles
of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer
Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and
Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product
Relationship
UNIT-III
Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to
information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-
Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors
Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications
UNIT-IV
Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing
Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-
Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions
Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy
UNIT-V
Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics
lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they
experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and
impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour
COURSE OUTCOME
Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the
choices consumers make
REFERENCE BOOKS
JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata
Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006
Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context
Excel Books NewDelhi-2001
Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous
DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing
Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi
Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining
Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005
Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000
RETAIL PLANNING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 620
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational
decision-making processes in the organized retail
UNIT I
Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail
Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-
Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative
methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management
UNIT II
Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics
Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp
non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion
designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting
Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-
Management of Obsolete goods
UNIT III
Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer
psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical
Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices
UNIT IV
Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-
Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp
Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective
Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer
Rights- Consumer Protection Acts
UNIT V
Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing
Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-
Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels
REFERENCE BOOKS
Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies
Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies
Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson
Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund
amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson
Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice
Hall of India New Delhi
Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies
Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best
People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd
RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 621
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the
value it creates
UNIT I
Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When
How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience
Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency
UNIT II
Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated
Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-
Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-
UNIT III
Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on
Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-
Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display
Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-
UNIT IV
Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium
Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and
Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-
Trade Dealing
UNIT V
Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-
Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating
Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing
to act in ways that increase loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -
Prentice-Hall
Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology
Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales
Promotion Techniques
Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate
Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page
Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books
George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing
Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill
PRODUCTION GROUP
PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL
Course Code 1Y3BBA 622
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a
basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of
facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality
control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an
understanding of the concept of aggregate planning
UNIT- I
Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors
Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-
requisites of PPC
UNIT- II
Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in
Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining
Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control
Models)
UNIT- III
Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection
Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master
production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of
software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II
UNIT- IV
Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n
job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling
Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)
UNIT- V
Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control
function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications
bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi
Deep and Deep Publications
PROCESS REENGINEERING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 623
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of
business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering
projects
UNIT- I
Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp
pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR
UNIT- II
Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering
project organizing for process reengineering
UNIT- III
Process analysis and design
a) Process analysis
(b) Process design
UNIT- IV
Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition
tracking and measuring process performance
UNIT- V
Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology
Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact
measurement
COURSE OUTCOME
To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the
considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-
engineering project
REFERENCE BOOKS
Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata
McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater
Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester
John Wiley amp Sons
WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn
the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time
standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering
to design of work systems
UNIT- I
Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos
productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity
Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time
Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities
Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was
developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph
UNIT- II
Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting
up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion
Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand
Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and
Design of Tools amp Equipment
UNIT- III
Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard
from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and
Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work
Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling
UNIT- IV
Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage
Incentive Plans
The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for
Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action
UNIT-V
Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion
Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System
Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts
Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional
including understanding the need for quality
REFERENCE BOOKS
iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill
ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation
Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp
Sons
Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall
Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall
Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press
Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall
Mall East and London
Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN
Course Code 1Y3BBA 625
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in
it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative
impacts of tourism development
UNIT I
Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism
Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of
Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in
Tourism Development
UNIT II
Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning
system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos
Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-
Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in
learning system
UNIT III
Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable
development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist
Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash
The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash
Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities
UNIT IV
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage
of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment
UNIT IV
Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the
Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National
Policy on Ecology and Environment
COURSE OUTCOME
To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global
perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international
tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for
sustainable tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash
Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications
Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers
Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William
Heinemann Ltd
Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices
London Pitman Publishing
Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York
Kendall Hunt Publishing Company
Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan
Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman
Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford
University Press
New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable
Development Approach VNR and New York
TOURISM MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 626
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism
and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing
that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products
before the stakeholders of tourism industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing
Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and
Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market
Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing
Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for
different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing
Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales
promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital
communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future
It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are
needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be
a part of this growth
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar
Thomson Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd
edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of
Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry
UNIT I
HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of
Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads
ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and
marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents
UNIT II
RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief
History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway
Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway
station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains
express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world
heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes
UNIT III
AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth
Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled
Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature
Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players
Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and
performance marketing strategies of Air India
UNIT IV
WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover
crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going
traffic) ndash National waterways
UNIT V
CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing
stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and
Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation
COURSE OUTCOME
Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of
the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management
REFERENCE BOOKS
RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 628
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of
its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing
knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital
Management
UNIT I
Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its
impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need
principles purpose
UNIT II
Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and
their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply
department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health
and patient safety
UNIT III
Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of
biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules
standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging
transportation amp storage
UNIT IV
Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier
methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal
decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of
wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan
UNIT V
Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party
insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash
meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural
disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague
typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics
COURSE OUTCOME
To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost
containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges
arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs
and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its
various components
REFERENCE BOOKS
Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication
First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn
Park k - Preventive and social medicine
Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot
MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 629
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted
advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public
relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any
potential crisis that may arise
UNIT I
Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches
to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of
marketing functions of marketing
UNIT II
Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment
Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market
segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash
positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing
UNIT III
Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior
(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying
decision process
UNIT IV
Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp
deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product
development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling
UNIT V
Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing
policies and strategies
Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management
decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels
COURSE OUTCOME
Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an
integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare
professionals and the public
REFERENCE BOOKS
Philip Kotler - marketing management
Wiliam jStanton - marketing management
Sherleker S A - marketing management
J C Gandhi - marketing management
Davar - modern marketing management
Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub
P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research
Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research
HOSPITALS RELATED LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 630
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of
common-law development
UNIT ndash I
Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties
sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance
act trust act societies registration act
UNIT ndashII
Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of
human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act
1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971
mental health act patient consent
UNIT ndash III
Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948
narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods
act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration
UNIT ndash IV
Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act
1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916
maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing
order) act trade union act industrial disputes act
UNIT ndashV
Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in
hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical
negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical
establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal
pronouncements rulings and regulations
REFERENCE BOOKS
Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer
Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law
Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 631
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India
To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural
Production system in India
To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India
To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development
UNIT -1
Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions
ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology
Case analysis and discussion
UNIT II
Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash
Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture
UNIT III
Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-
Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India
UNIT IV
Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of
holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus
land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas
UNIT V
Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash
Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and
schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM
COURSE OUTCOMES
Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management
Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India
Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development
REFERENCE BOOKS
Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution
Can We Make London Department for International Development
Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House
PANCHAYATI RAJ
Course Code 1Y3BBA632
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration
To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites
To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance
To provide insights on Rural Administration
To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes
UNIT I
Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction
Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges
Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration
(Official and non-official) and report submission
UNIT III
Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission
UNIT IV
Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and
Block- Panchayat relationship
Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play
UNIT V
Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government
Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan
Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
COURSE OUTCOMES
Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village
Development interventions
Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its
power Structure
Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and
Plans
Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes
32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959
Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise
Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi
Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New
Delhi
RURAL ECONOMY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 633
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy
To help students understand their role in rural economic development
To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources
To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation
To create awareness on rural economic development
UNIT I
Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-
Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries
(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in
agriculture individual production other production services
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-
Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash
Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land
Reforms
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
UNIT III
Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation
programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs
UNIT IV
Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work
UNIT V
Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing
ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for
the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy
Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village
Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues
Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation
Facilities
Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi
Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi
Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic
Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New
Delhi
INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER
Mid Semester Examination (MSE)
There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5
descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered
End Semester Examination (ESE)
There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks
each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of
10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered
Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations
The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment
Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be
applicable
(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )
Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type
End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size
MIL HINDI COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 101
fgUnh Okdjk oa laizskk
इकाई-I
हहनदीवयाकरण और रचना सजञा सरवनाम हरशष ाण हिया अवयय कारक रचन सहधउपसगव परतयय
तथासमास
ह गहनणवय पयावयराची शबद हर ोम शबद अन क शबदो क ह ए एक शबद
शबद शदधि राकय शदधि महारर और ोकोदधिया पललरन एर सकष पण
इकाई-II
हनबध क ातथासमसामहयक एरराषटर ीय हरषया परहनबधा खन
इकाई-III
सपर षण (सचार)
-सपर षण की अरधारणऔरमहतव सपरष ाण क ह ए आरशयक शत सपरष ाण क परकार
सपर षणकामाधयम सपर षणक ा सपर षण की तकनीक राचनक ा समाचारराचन साकषातकारक ा
रचनातमक खनका कषय रचनातमक ख ानकाआधार भारऔरहरचारोकीपरसतहत राक क ा की
उपयोहगता
अनशसितपसतक -
रहतवयाकरणभासकर डा 0 रचनद रकमार
रहतहनबधाभासकर डा 0 रचनदर कमार
आधहनकहहनदीवयाकरणऔररचना डा 0 रासद रननदनपरसाद
रचनामानस परो0 राम शवरनाथहतरारी
वयरहाररकहहनदी डा 0 जग बहादरपाणड य
रचनातमक खन डा 0 रमश ागौतम
राजहसहहनदीहनबध परो0 आर0 एन0 गौड़
सफ हहनदीहनबध रतन शवर
हनबध सहचर डा 0 कषमणपरसाद
उपकारमहारर और ाक ोदधियाा पार 0 राज शवरपरसादचतरव दी
कहाहनयोकहारता की परतापअनम
समपर षणपरकहहनदीभाषाहशकषण डा 0 रशनानारग
श ीहरजञान डा 0 सर शकमार
श ीहरजञानपरहतमानऔरहरशल षण डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo
श ीहरजञानकाइहतहास डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo
ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA102
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students study the behaviour of individuals and groups as part of the social and technical system in
the workplace They examine individual and group behaviour communication conflict and various
management styles motivational techniques and coordination in the work environment and apply
these concepts to the development of an organizations human resources
UNIT I
Organization Overview of the concept and relevance of organizational Behaviour meaning Nature
Scope features approaches model challenges and opportunities functions amp Role of manager
Planning process Decision making Process
UNIT II
Foundation of individual Behavior Biography ability personality (determinants and models)
perception (definition components factors affecting perception in decision making) Values
Beliefs etc
UNIT III
Individual Behavior- Attitude Definition importance Types Attitude regarding- Job
Satisfaction Involvement commitment effects of employee attitude changing attitudes
Learning Definition nature theories classical conditioning operant conditioning cognitive
Learning Social learning
UNIT IV
Motivation Concept and theories (Maslow McGregor Herzberg ERG) merits amp demerits Group
dynamics amp Team work Nature theories types of group Definition Stages of Group Development
effectiveness potential problems Analysis of Interpersonal Relationship Transactional Analysis
Johari Window
UNIT- V
Organizational change and development approaches and methods stress nature source effects
conflicts employee counseling approaches extra mural penitential learning programmers case
study
COURSE OUTCOME
To explain group dynamics and demonstrate skills required for working in groups (team building)
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Luthans Fred Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India
bull Mishra MN Behaviour Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
bull Newstrom W John Davis Keith Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India
bull LM Roy Organisational Behaviour S Chand Publication
bull Dr FC Sharma Organisational Behaviour SBPD Publications
INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ACCOUNTING
Course Code 1Y3BBA103
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable students to synthesize related information and evaluate options for most logical and
optimal solution such that they would be able to predict and control cost incurrence and improve
results
UNIT- I
Accounting Basic of Accounting Accounting Mechanics-Double Entry System Classification
Rules for Debit amp Credit Journal Ledger and Trial Balance sub-division of journal Ledger meaning subdivision and mechanics of Posting balancing ledger accounts
UNIT- II
Cash book and Subsidiary books of Accounting Kinds of Cash Book Purchase day book and sale
day Book Bank reconciliation statement Measurement of income- Adjusting entries- rectification of
errors- Adjusted trial balance
UNIT-III
Preparation of financial statements- Trading account Profit amp Loss account Balance Sheet (with
Adjustments) Accounting for Non-profit organization Accounting Procedures Receipts amp payment
accounts income ampexpenditure account problems
UNIT- IV
Depreciation- Meaning Determinant factors Method amp Significance Basic Concepts of hire
purchase amp installments
UNIT- V
Partnership-Preliminary admission of a partner Company Accounts-Issue of shares Debentures
Forfeitures and reissue of shares
COURSE OUTCOME
Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of product and services in the
Organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
SA Siddiqui- Comprehensive Accounting
TS Greval- Introduction to Accounting
Mukherjee and M Accounting (Volume-I)
SN Maheshwar- Introduction to Accounting (Vikas Publication)
CAC Rama Gopal Accounting For Managers (New Age)
BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational
and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business
UNIT I
Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro
environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis
for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business
UNIT II
Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic
systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years
plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent
economic initiatives NitiAyog
UNIT III
Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment
problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance
of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural
Development Problems of Growth
UNIT IV
Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment
Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA
and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act
UNIT V
International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational
Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic
Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-
GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India
COURSE OUTCOME
Outline how an entity operates in a business environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996
Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi
Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan
Chand Delhi
Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA105
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to
articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate
effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the
consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and
quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods
UNIT-I
Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of
Management Functions of the Manager
UNIT- II
Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of
Planning
Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and
type of Policies
Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems
involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques
UNIT- III
Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of
Units and committees
Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship
UNIT- IV
Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training
Directing Nature and purpose and directing
UNIT- V
Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control
process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies
COURSE OUTCOME-
Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques
managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of
managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify
and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own
position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied
audiences
Reference Books
bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher
bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson
Education
bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt
Ltd 4th Ed
bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill
Publications
SEMESTER II
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distributio
n
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor
Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distribu
tion Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Ma
x
Ma
rks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme
nt
Compulsory
Course
English
communication
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA202 Core Course
Management concept amp
Principle
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA203 Core
Course
Environmental
Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA204 Core
Course
Monetary
Economics and
Indian Banking
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA205 Core
Course
Business
Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA205 Business
Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhanceme
nt
Skill Enhancement
Elective
Course-I
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand
Total 600 21 5 - 24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
ENGLISH COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA201
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English
language teaching and content writing sectors
UNIT I
Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning
Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening
UNIT II
Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive
writing expansion of an idea
UNIT III
Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing
(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume
writing covering letter
UNIT IV
Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases
UNIT V
Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb
agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions
(Advanced)
COURSE OUTCOME
To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill
Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul
Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan
Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das
Orient Blackswan
Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press
Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication
MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 202
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and
process of effective controlling in the organization
UNIT I
Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science
Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)
UNIT II
School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and
Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)
Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management
UNIT III
Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing
Staffing Directing and Coordinating
UNIT IV
Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command
Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control
UNIT V
Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure
determination Forms- formal amp informal organization
Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations
COURSE OUTCOME
Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial
functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management
REFERENCE BOOKS
LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management
VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management
James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB
Fred Luthans- OB
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 203
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links
between human and natural systems
UNIT I
Introduction to environmental studies
Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability
and sustainable development
UNIT II
Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an
ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following
ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds
streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)
Unit III
Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to
mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and
over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international
ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate
energy sources growing energy needs case studies
UNIT IV
Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem
diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots
Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and
Informational value
UNIT V
Environmental Pollution
Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution
Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and
Industrial waste Pollution case studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social
and environmental processes
REFERENCE BOOKS
California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London
Routledge
Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security
Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press
Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of
ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006
Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37
McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books
McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the
Twentieth Century
Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders
Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic
Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt
Ltd
Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons
Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi
1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP
Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation
S Chand Publishing New Delhi
MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING
Course Code 1Y3BBA204
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using
statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills
within the contest of subject matter of economics
UNIT I
Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of
Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value
of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income
theory of Money
UNIT II
Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people
Money Market
UNIT III
Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial
Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks
UNIT IV
Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control
methods and Tools of Monetary Policy
UNIT V
RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative
Banks and Rural Banks
COURSE OUTCOME
Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and
mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of
economics
REFERENCE BOOKS
MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi
LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi
Crowther- An Out Line of Money
Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant
KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ
BUSINESS COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA205
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative
scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication
UNIT I
Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports
OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)
UNIT II
Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other
words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis
UNIT III
Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers
Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers
UNIT IV
Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a
Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication
Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)
UNIT V
Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written
Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp
minutes
COURSE OUTCOME
To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical
proficiency in the development of exposition and argument
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wren amp Martin
K Madhukar- Business Communication
VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication
Asha Laul- Business Communication
Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH
SEMESTER III
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotte
d
Credit
s
Course Code Course
Type
Course
Title
Total
Mark
s
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subjec
t wise
Distrib
ution
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA301
Ability
Enhancement
IT Tool for Business
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA302
Core Course
Introduction to Marketing
Management
100 50 17 20 7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA303 Core
Course
Business
Law
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA304 Core
Course
Business
statistics for
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA305
Core
Course
Retail
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA304 Practical
Business
statistics for Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill
Enhancemen
t Elective Course-II
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand Total 600 24
IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 301
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software
components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data
base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT
UNIT-I
Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and
Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World
Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept
UNIT-II
Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different
computer generation
UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and
Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming
Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-
principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart
examples
UNIT-IV
Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation
applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)
Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information
System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems
Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human
Resources Management Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations
Understand the hardware and software components of the computer
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford
2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication
3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication
4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill
INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 302
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply
these to a new or existing business
UNIT I
Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept
amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro
environment
UNIT II
Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of
Product Line amp Product- mix
UNIT III
Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing
decisions Overview of pricing process
UNIT IV
Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product
Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage
UNIT V
Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to
marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct
selling
COURSE OUTCOME
To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct
an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an
appropriate format
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Philip Kotler
2 TN Chabra
3 TK Panda
4 SH Kazmi
5 Arun Kumar
BUSINESS LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 303
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal
environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with
knowledge of legal principles
UNIT-I
Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration
capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts
Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp
Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency
UNIT-II
Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp
Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales
UNIT-III
Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -
Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a
negotiable instrument
UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of
non-registration Dissolution of a firm
UNIT-V
Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of
Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013
COURSE OBJECTIVE
On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to
individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context
Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 ND Kapoor
2 Tulsian
3 MC Kuchhal
4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business
BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 304
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management
UNIT I
Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance
Scope and Limitation of Statistic
UNIT II
Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar
Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive
UNIT III
Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic
Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures
of dispersion
UNIT IV
Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and
Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index
number CPI WPI IIP
UNIT V
Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank
Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series
COURSE OUTCOME
Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically
discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons
2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication
3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication
RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in
India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone
Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT
FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan
Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process
UNIT II
FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail
Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors
Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing
MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer
Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design
and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication
UNIT III
STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty
Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors
UNIT IV
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management
IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service
Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM
Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying
UNIT V
MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at
Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems
at Retail Centers
Course Outcome-
Reference Books
bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education
bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A
Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education
The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge
about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various
aspects of retail operations
After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with
the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the
entire retail operations
SEMESTER IV
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code Course
Type Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subject
wise
Distributio
n
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mark
s
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-401
Ability
Enhanceme
nt
Introduction to
soft skill amp
Team Building
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA-402 Core Course
Introduction to
financial
management
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-403 Core Course
Advertising
and Sales
Promotion
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-404 Core Course
Management
of Human resource
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of
Business
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group
Term End
Practical
Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-404 Practical
Management
of Human
resource
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-405 Practical
Macro
Economics of Business
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
Grand Total 550 22
INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 401
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate
students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners
by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are
learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for
their own learning
UNIT ndash I
General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of
Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences
Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making
Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of
communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of
Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation
UNIT ndash II
Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing
skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice
modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements
General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral
skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive
Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style
UNIT ndash III
Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format
and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in
Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active
Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD
UNIT ndash IV
Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction
Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview
Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing
Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of
Conversation
UNIT ndash V
Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional
Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers
COURSE OUTCOME
To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills
and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin
bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar
INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 402
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital
decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and
raising long-term finance
UNIT I
Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives
Role of finance manager
UNIT II
Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of
investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return
Comparison between NPV amp IRR
UNIT III
Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of
Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning
capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure
UNIT IV
The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage
Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating
Leverage
UNIT V
Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital
estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of
inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order
Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy
COURSE OUTCOME
Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial
manager in the current competitive business scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 IM Pandey
2 P Chandra
3 SP Gupta
4 MY Khan
ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 403
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may
review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos
homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions
UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising
budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for
Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising
UNIT II
Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy
Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role
types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council
of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)
UNIT III
Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring
awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of
design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet
advertising and evaluation of advertising
UNIT IV
Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors
influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option
Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of
consumer schemes and other methods of promotion
UNIT V
Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs
Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales
personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion
COURSE OUTCOME
Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how
these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its
relation to todaylsquos marketplace
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall
Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi
Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi
Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications
MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 404
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource
management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational
setting
UNIT-I
Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with
special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in
strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management
UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge
workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)
Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)
UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of
human resource department and the role of human resource manager
UNITndashIV
Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification
rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation
UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection
(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction
COURSE OUTCOME
To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training
Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical
Behaviour
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi
Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New
Delhi
Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York
HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications
A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications
MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the
important indicators of the economy and their significance
UNIT I
Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of
Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income
Personal and Personal disposable income
UNIT II
Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income
Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and
Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator
Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate
demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy
UNIT III
Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate
demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government
expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary
and fiscal policy
UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary
policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production
Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation
monetary measures fiscal measures
UNIT V
Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and
corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in
open economy
COURSE OUTCOME
To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the
role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson
2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill
3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers
4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson
SEMESTER V
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment
Internal Assessment Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-501
Ability Enhancement
Public Relation amp Corporate Image
50
25
8
10
4
15
6
2
-
-
2
1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and
small Business
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-503
Core Course Principle of
Economics
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-502
Practical Entrepreneurship and
small Business
50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics
50
25 08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Skill Course
Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill Enhancement
Elective Course-III
50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2
Grand Total
600
24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication
1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management
1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India
1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation
1Y3BBA509 Organization Development
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision
1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management
1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA513 Database Management System
1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service
1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy
1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management
1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management
1Y3BBA520 Stores Management
1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA522 Technology Management
1Y3BBA523 Productivity
1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept
1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management
1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System
1Y3BBA529 Health Economics
1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management
(Rural Management Group )
1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity
1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment
1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management
SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES
Non-Technical
Elective No Department Faculty Name
Faculty of Information Technology
I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)
II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)
IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)
V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Management
I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)
II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)
III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development
Faculty of Commerce
I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)
II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Humanities
I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)
II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)
III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Science
I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)
II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)
III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)
IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)
V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Education
I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)
II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)
PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA501
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts
of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling
and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization
UNIT- I
Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash
Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy
Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors
ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public
Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations
UNIT- II
Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service
Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social
Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy
for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation
Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event
Management
UNIT- III
Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash
Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public
Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of
Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control
UNIT IV
Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies
Components of an Individual Image
Advertising and Corporate Image
Public Relations of an Institutions
UNIT V
The Grapevine and Rumours
Stereotype
Propaganda
Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations
applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different
entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling
REFERENCE BOOKS
Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House
Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House
Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University
Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill
This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning
ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-
The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding
processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to
those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic
environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide
evidence which informs those debates
UNIT I
Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of
Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its
environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship
UNIT II
Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship
development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the
Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making
UNIT III
Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that
enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in
Social context Start Up
UNIT IV
Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional
source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital
UNIT V
Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication
2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd
3 Vasant Desai
4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH
PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 503
COURSE OBJECTIVES-
To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production
UNIT- I
Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits
UNIT-II
Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus
movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts
of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications
of demand and supply price rationing price floors
Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price
elasticity cross and income elasticity
UNIT-III
Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility
Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp
Producer surplus
UNIT-IV
Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant
and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue
and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale
UNIT-V
Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of
the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run
equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment
concept
COURSE OUTCOME-
To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011
bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th
edition
2007
bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA
bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press
Oxford
bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore
MARKETING GROUP
INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so
that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to
enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications
UNIT-I
Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC
in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising
appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion
relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship
between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods
Interactive Internet Marketing
UNIT-II
Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach
establishing and allocating promotional budget
UNIT-III
IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different
forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning
creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design
considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client
Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork
UNIT-IV
Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering
key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and
media research
Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration
client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc
UNIT-V
Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing
Communications
COURSE OUTCOME-
To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches
and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to
communicating to target audiences
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc
Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard
D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois
Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing
House
Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and
Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication
Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH
Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing
Communications Pearson Education Limited
Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc
Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House
Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning
Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc
Homewood Illinois
Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic
Approach Cengage Learning
Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India
Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education
SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT
Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE
It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and
distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and
distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners
UNIT-I
Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies
Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling
objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring
Procedure Socialization
UNIT-II
Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program
Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation
Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial
Evaluation of Contest
UNIT-III
Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel
Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales
Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process
UNIT-IV
Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key
tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market
Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation
UNIT-V
Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners
Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict
Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International
Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales
COURSE OUTCOME
Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the
sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans
participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables
REFERENCE BOOKS
Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres
Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books
Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI
L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills
Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets
Greenwood Publishing Group
Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub
ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH
Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing
consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing
research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students
within a course project
UNIT-I
Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing
Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research
Process Marketing Research Designs
UNIT-II
The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques
Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of
Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic
Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical
Analysis Tools
UNIT-III
Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)
ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor
Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental
Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores
Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-
hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number
UNIT-IV
Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product
Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant
Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification
Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing
Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and
their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity
UNIT-V
Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning
in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report
and class presentation of the same
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from
analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor
analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis
REFERENCE BOOKS
Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi
William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi
Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi
Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill
Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research
Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey
Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning
Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp
Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced
in the class
HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP
LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA
Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of
Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity
objectivity and understandings
UNIT-I
The Factories Act 1948
The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923
The Employees State Insurance Act 1948
UNIT-II
The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952
The Payment of gratuity Act 1972
UNIT-III
The Maternity Benefit Act 1961
The Minimum Wages act 1948
UNIT-IV
The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946
The Payment of Bonus Act 1965
UNIT-V
The Apprentices Act 1969
The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959
COURSE OUTCOME ndash
To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour
Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the
organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to
follow the Laws applicable to the establishment
REFERENCE BOOKS
S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications
S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi
Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot
V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House
N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons
INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE
In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our
country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of
Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be
acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the
concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India
UNIT-I
Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors
affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial
relation programme
Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact
of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes
lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry
UNIT-II
Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal
Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective
bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective
collective bargaining collective bargaining in India
UNIT-III
Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education
scheme in India- objectives functions and problems
Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation
schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India
UNIT-IV
Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India
major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions
registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union
UNIT-V
Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery
Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation
submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court
industrial tribunals
Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power
of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute
COURSE OUTCOME
Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective
bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute
resolution
REFERENCE BOOKS
Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts
IIPM Personnel Management in India
Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business
Publication Ltd
Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India
Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India
Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication
Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co
Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law
ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational
culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the
human values in individuals
UNIT-I
Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational
Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development
Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining
and survey research amp feedback methodology
UNIT-II
Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in
organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief
systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development
UNIT-III
Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component
interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief
of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action
UNIT-IV
OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team
building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process
interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions
important for successful OD efforts
UNIT ndash V
HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational
implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional
Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have
improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi
Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York
McGrawhill
Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in
addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a
good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company
UNIT-I
Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm
Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-
Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of
Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering
UNIT-II
Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the
analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount
of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a
Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and
Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis
UNIT-III
Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues
and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements
medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings
Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project
finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing
UNIT-IV
Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of
financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing
Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect
cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization
UNIT-V
Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value
Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic
indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added
Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total
Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)
COURSE OUTCOME
Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and
corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts
REFERENCE BOOKS
Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill
Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons
INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial
environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a
multinational corporation
UNIT-I
Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation
functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial
management International monetary system
UNIT-II
Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories
ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible
exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer
Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options
Currency swaps and interest rate swaps
UNIT-III
Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction
transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction
exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The
national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International
capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)
UNIT-IV
International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic
considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)
Financial risk and cost of capital
Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of
capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-
20 subsidiaries and tax havens
UNIT-V
International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their
comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets
Recent developments in the Euro bond market
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations
and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley
PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall
Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall
Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis
Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co
Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall
Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers
Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath
FINANCIAL INCLUSION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion
such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss
the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to
promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models
UNIT-I
Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting
Access to Financial Services
Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive
Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators
UNIT-II
Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey
Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional
Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card
UNIT-III
Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India
Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations
Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor
UNIT-IV
SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of
microfinance evolved in India
Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial
Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for
Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for
Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People
UNIT-V
Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises
Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion
and Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account
initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage
Publication
Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House
Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech
Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications
Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications
Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing
Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI
Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI
Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag
Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion
Academic Foundation
IT GROUP
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to
manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the
hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment
UNIT-I
The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures
File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base
Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial
Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness
UNIT-II
Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface
with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database
Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design
UNIT-III
Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database
Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database
Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases
UNIT-IV
DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance
Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues
UNIT-V
Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the
field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective
faculty during the coverage of syllabus
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic
concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational
algebra and SQL
REFERENCE BOOKS
Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs
Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan
Press
McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co
MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It
aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing
implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services
UNIT-I
The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development
Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The
Enabling Environment for ITES
UNIT-II
Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled
Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of
Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services
UNIT-III
Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support
Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions
UNIT-IV
International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting
Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in
facilitating Trade in ITESTITES
UNIT-V
Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of
Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of
Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace
Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations
and integrate the learning in handling these complexities
REFERENCE BOOKS
Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat
E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information
technology with various aspects of Software Project Management
UNIT-I
Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision
and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM
Framework
UNIT-II
Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning
Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan
Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration
and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning
UNIT-III
Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an
Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques
Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule
Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools
UNIT-IV
Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance
Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior
Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review
UNIT-V
Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks
Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk
COURSE OUTCOME
Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business
context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business
scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson
Education Ltd
P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp
Tsinghua University Press
R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance
Management Concepts Pub
Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group
B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science
Press
A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications
G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on
understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business
UNIT I
Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm
production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country
UNIT II
Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms
and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business
sector
UNIT III
Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations
relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries
UNIT IV
Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment
and policy
UNIT V
Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies
COURSE OUTCOME
Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper
and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain
REFERENCE BOOKS
Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons
Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ
Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 517
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies
strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms
UNIT I
Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market
structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp
significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of
marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour
UNIT II
Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash
significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product
product life cycle
UNIT III
Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies
and pricing methods
UNIT IV
Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and
standardization
UNIT V
Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural
products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in
agribusiness
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better
understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for
agricultural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH
Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall
Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control
Pearson Edu
Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu
Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India
FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 518
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food
marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen
and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural
political and economic forces over time
UNIT I
Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade
Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of
Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic
factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer
UNIT II
Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling
food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing
in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions
across the chain in food retail food service marketing
UNIT III
4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing
Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system
Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement
Strategies for food retailers
UNIT IV
Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling
Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food
Products
UNIT V
Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training
Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in
retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze
Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing
REFERENCE BOOKS
Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of
India
Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu
Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill
RETAIL GROUP
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in
the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it
UNIT- I
Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management
Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain
networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain
Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network
UNIT- II
Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer
service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs
multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier
Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants
UNIT- III
Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory
models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system
UNIT- IV
COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip
Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION
TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain
Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management
UNIT- V
Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a
Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance
measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics
quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics
COURSE OUTCOME
After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain
which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House
bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers
bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg
bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi
bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan
STORES MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 520
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different
terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned
areas
UNIT- I
Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the
location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design
UNIT- II
Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual
Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors
UNIT- III
Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at
Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores
Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments
UNIT- IV
Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies
Quick Response System
UNIT- V
Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact
on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space
Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization
COURSE OUTCOME
The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern
and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management
bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing
bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach
bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing
bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing
RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 521
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail
Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail
business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management
UNIT I
Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail
equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail
market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-
Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India
UNIT II
Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development
The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and
Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-
Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on
ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response
marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks
The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management
UNIT III
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM
Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch
points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services
Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM
Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding
Common Barriers
UNIT IV
Services Management
Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the
service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-
Supply relationships vehicle routing
UNIT V
Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising
Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping
the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand
management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-
2nd edition 2006
MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational
edititionUS1798
Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education
New Delhi 2003
JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy
Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi
Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy
Pearson Education New Delhi 2004
KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005
Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007
Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House
Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution
rosenbloom and Education Foundation US
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT
TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 522
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
UNIT- I
Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology
Change Implication
UNIT- II
Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying
UNIT- III
Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology
Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management
UNIT- IV
Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology
Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages
UNIT- V
Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise
Level
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to
manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009
bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009
bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson
PRODUCTIVITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 523
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
UNIT- I
Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and
external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work
Contents and Ineffective Time
UNIT- II
Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram
String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart
UNIT- III
Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart
UNIT- IV
Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be
Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement
UNIT- V
Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International
Labour Office Geneva
bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed
bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill
bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India
QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO
Course Code 1Y3BBA 524
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify
the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and
measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current
issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans
UNIT- I
Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives
UNIT- II
Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect
concept
UNIT- III
Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality
UNIT- IV
Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various
control Charts
UNIT- V
Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification
COURSE OUTCOME-
Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to
explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key
aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for
controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp
communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze
the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise
and evaluate quality implementation plans
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay
bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd
bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas
bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd
bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition
7th
Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012
bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM CONCEPTS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 525
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism
To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash
Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp
Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and
development of Tourism through the ages
UNIT II
COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash
Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism
inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious
Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions
incentives sports and adventure tourism
UNIT III
TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash
Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of
motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash
health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and
push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists
UNIT IV
IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash
Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts
- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism
UNIT V
SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-
Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote
Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable
Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and
experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of
tourism experiences
REFERENCES BOOKS
Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling
Publishers Private Limited New Delhi
Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism
Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited
Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill
International
Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors
New Delhi
Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas
Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New
Delhi
TOURISM MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 526
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the basic concept and various components of management
UNIT I
MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-
Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of
management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)
Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management
UNIT II
PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-
Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of
planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by
objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance
and limitation of decision making
UNIT III
ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash
Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of
staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance
appraisal
UNIT IV
DIRECTING ndash
Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation
(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy
theory)
UNIT V
LEADERSHIP-
Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path
Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to
communication
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives
Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of
tourism as well as the impacts of tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc
Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New
Delhi
Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition
AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing
House New Delhi
Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition
Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations
To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism
industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-
Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing
Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and
Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash
Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New
Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING -
Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION -
Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity
Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in
promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level
which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described
REFERENCES BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson
Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition
Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent
learning
UNIT I
Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health
Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural
History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention
UNIT II
Definition and meaning of hospital ndash
Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing
concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of
Hospitals
UNIT III
Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector
Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in
delivering healthcare in India
UNIT IV
Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural
hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description
UNIT V
The reforms of Healthcare System-
The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare
reforms amp Future of Healthcare System
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding
the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the
management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and
organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services
REFERENCE BOOKS
The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991
Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd
Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers
HEALTH ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 529
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and
understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict
peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different
social actions
UNIT I
Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and
importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below
Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits
UNIT II
Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve
techniques and properties of indifference curve
UNIT III
Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash
Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of
Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of
Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of
demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash
Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue
UNIT IV
Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two
variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves
UNIT V
Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash
Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and
monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market
situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price
determination
COURSE OUTCOME
To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from
an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic
evaluation of a health intervention or program
REFERENCE BOOKS
Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR
Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP
Managerial Economics - Gupta GS
Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani
Business Economics - Sharma NK
Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar
Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi
Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL
HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 530
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions
related to records management in the healthcare environment
UNIT I
Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record
keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records
UNIT II
Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health
Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research
UNIT III
Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics
investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing
Pharmacy etc Audits)
UNIT IV
Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems
associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic
Related Groups (DRG)
UNIT V
Medical Registers ndash
Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various
departments amp common problems faced
COURSE OUTCOME
Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New
Delhi 1999
Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995
Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi
George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003
Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 531
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India
To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India
UNIT I
Rural Society in India
Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-
urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and
subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural
life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion
UNIT II
Rural Society
Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social
institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity
and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of
rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT-III
Village India
Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance
contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and
political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology
Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class
UNIT IV
Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics
Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid
growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope
and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -
Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT-V
Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times
Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social
processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India
Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy
Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms
REFERENCE BOOKS
Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi
Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay
PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House
SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication
House Delhi
ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 532
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To explain the nature of environmental studies
To introduce aspects of Natural resources
To introduce aspects of ecosystems
To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation
To introduce aspects of environmental pollution
To create awareness on social issues and environment
To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
UNIT I
Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for
public awareness
UNIT II
Ecosystems
Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and
decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and
Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the
following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic
Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)
UNIT III
Biodiversity and its Conservation
Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification
of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option
Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports
of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-
Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ
Conservation of biodiversity
UNIT IV
Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil
pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste
Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an
individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods
earthquake cyclone and landslides
20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT V
Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water
Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of
People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible
responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and
holocaust
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the nature of environmental studies
Classify renewable and non-renewable resources
Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues
Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation
Analyze aspects of environmental pollution
Describe aspects of social issues and environment
Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner
Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental
Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai
Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA
RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 533
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts
To familiarize Rural marketing strategy
To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems
To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing
To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages
UNIT I
Overview of Rural Marketing
Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing
and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction
Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class
UNIT II
Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for
rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT III
Rural Distribution Systems
Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche
markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of
Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT IV
ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network
(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction
Methodology Group Project work
UNIT V
Market support
Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role
play
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Market their products
Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products
Choose an appropriate distribution system
Apply ICT in rural marketing
Source the finance for rural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India
Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education
Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi
SEMESTER- VI
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allot
ted
Cred
its
Course
Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mark
s
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-601
Core
Course
E- Commerce
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-602 Core
Course
Customer
Relationship Management
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-603 Practical
Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva
Voce
100
50
17
-
-
50
20
- - 4 4
1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Grand Total
550
22
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one
paper presentation certificate in related discipline
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management
1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing
1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA607 Management of Change
1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management
1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management
1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service
1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business
1Y3BBA614 E- Governance
1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management
1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing
1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour
1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning
1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design
1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control
1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan
1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing
1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management
1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care
1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law
(Rural Management Group)
1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System
1Y3BBA632
Panchayati Raj
1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy
E- COMMERCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 601
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is
designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the
technical foundation for understanding information systems
UNIT I
Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting
online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a
business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-
commerce
UNIT II
Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet
(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A
systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing
vs in-house development of a website)
UNIT III
Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension
definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security
intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)
technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and
protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)
UNIT IV
E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards
e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online
banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house
automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments
UNIT V
Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting
online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of
utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online
services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and
entertainment
COURSE OUTCOME-
Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information
systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Management Information System Jawadekar
bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon
bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana
bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)
bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty
CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 602
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of
Customer Relationship Management in the organizations
UNIT- I
Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature
of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive
and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and
evaluating customer business plans
UNIT- II
Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer
database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing
customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively
Planning and making persuasive presentations
UNIT- III
Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality
Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality
managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and
Cross- sell
UNIT- IV
Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations
Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority
setting Target setting setting standards
UNIT- V
Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction
COURSE OUTCOME-
To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship
Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd
Ed Response Books Sage Publication
Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House
Pvt Ltd
Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books
Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management
V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008
Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management
South Western Cengage Learning
Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press
Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age
International
Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan
Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of
India Private Limted New Delhi 2011
S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private
Limted New Delhi 2008
ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 603
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to
work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn
the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final
semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by
the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a
student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their
analytical capabilities and experience
DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)
Title of the study (Cover Page)
Declaration
Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)
Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)
Acknowledgement
Table of Contents
Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used
1 INTRODUCTION
11 Introduction
12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research
12 Significance of the study
13 Scope of the study
14 Research Problem
15 Objective of the study
17 Hypothesis
18 Limitations of the study
2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students
to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they
learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After
the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is
evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report
should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to
provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also
able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business
operations and come up with the ways to tap the
Opportunities
3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
31 Introduction
32 Population of the study
33 Sampling Design
331 Sampling Technique
332 Sampling Method
333 Sample Size
34 Research Instrument
35 Sources of data
351 Primary Data
352 Secondary Data
4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION
5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION
Bibliography
COURSE OUTCOME-
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able
to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and
come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities
MARKETING GROUP
PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 604
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the
context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product
manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions
UNIT- I
Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused
organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management
Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-
cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product
Development
UNIT- II
Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods
of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in
international Market
UNIT- III
Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity
concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand
Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image
UNIT- IV
Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system
measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement
Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market
segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining
and establishing brand values
UNIT- V
Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand
extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time
Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand
Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation
COURSE OUTCOME
The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of
Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for
Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning
implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer
Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi
Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi
Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi
Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education
New Delhi
Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi
Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata
McGraw Hill New Delhi
Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi
STRATEGIC MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 605
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and
implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and
managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver
superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation
through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills
UNIT- I
Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash
Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of
Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying
Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting
Marketing Objectives
UNIT-II
Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching
Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy
Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle
Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies
UNIT-III
Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp
Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models
UNIT- IV
Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives
Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy
Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing
UNIT- V
Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at
different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by
executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and
interdisciplinary nature
REFERENCE BOOKS
Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt
D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin
OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage
Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill
Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp
Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson
Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann
Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India
George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press
J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and
Programs McGraw-Hill Companies
Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub
Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon
P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave
E-MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 606
COURSE OBJECTIVE
It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance
enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns
UNIT- I
Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics
Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan
Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing
UNIT- II
Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in
India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within
communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing
UNIT- III
Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet
as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet
User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-
branding
UNIT- IV
Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-
marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools
Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent
Trends in e-customer service
UNIT- V
Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web
Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing
campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising
Course Outcome
Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics
online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its
implication on marketing strategy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a
networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill
Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall
Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning
Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books
Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial
Times
HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 607
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be
Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students
Understand the importance of managing change
UNIT- I
Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-
Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of
human resource strategies in implementing Change
UNIT-II
Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR
implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation
and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions
UNIT-III
HR Processes amp Change
Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned
change
Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change
UNIT- IV
Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in
employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management
of change implications of downsizing
UNIT- V
Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to
promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and
feedback
Course Outcome
Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more
effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change
process
REFERENCE BOOKS
A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human
Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education
Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill
Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage
South Asia Edition
K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation
Response Books
VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books
CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 608
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical
relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand
anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions
to ensure the organizational and individual success
UNIT-I
Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of
organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business
environment
UNIT-II
Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars
Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations
UNIT- III
Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock
Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system
(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)
UNIT- IV
Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and
repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally
appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural
negotiation and conflicts management
UNIT- V
Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual
countries Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development
of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning
Private Limited
G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill
Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley
Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing
Co
Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell
Business
Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times
McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp
Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation
Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson
Education India
GROUP DYNAMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 609
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group
dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group
effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of
resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding
UNIT-I
Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group
dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B
UNIT-II
Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group
Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash
Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress
UNIT-III
Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group
decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash
conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict
UNIT- IV
Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De
individuation theory
UNIT- V
Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources
of Change in groups
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups
REFERENCE BOOKS
Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley
Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass
Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co
Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE
Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and
application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax
along with basic concepts of VAT
UNIT-I
Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of
Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment
of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-II
Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature
and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax
planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business
UNIT-III
Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net
Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and
Penalties (Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-IV
Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for
service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of
Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)
UNIT- V
VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview
of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT
Law)
COURSE OUTCOME
Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields
REFERENCE BOOKS
Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications
Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub
Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House
T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India
BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson
S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann
R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _
INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 611
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important
components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO
Analysis etc
UNIT-I
INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian
Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role
in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)
UNIT-II
FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different
Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players
Different types of Instruments
UNIT-III
CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI
Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank
UNIT- IV
COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp
Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A
REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA
UNIT- V
NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies
Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture
Capital Funds
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment
Banking companies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication
Financial Services MY Khan TMH
Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication
S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran
ML Seth
FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 612
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and
prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of
uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding
of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role
of internal audit assessments
UNIT I
Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview
UNIT II
Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax
fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and
inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds
UNIT III
Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion
investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports
UNIT IV
Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using
Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)
UNIT V Case Study
1 Two Indian
2 Two international cases
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread
nature of fraud and its economic impact
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation
Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination
Cengage Learning
IT GROUP
INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 613
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security
managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues
in the information assurance field
UNIT I
Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian
Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its
application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law
Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour
Laws E-Media and Print Media
UNIT II
E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security
Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature
UNIT III
Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil
Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-
detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of
Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA
UNIT IV
IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal
issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base
UNIT V
Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of
Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules
COURSE OUTCOME-
Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House
Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co
John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River
Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher
Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University
E-GOVERNANCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 614
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information
Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an
awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the
issues concerning the Cyber security
UNIT I
Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National
E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status
UNIT II
E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process
Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges
UNIT III
E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-
Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics
UNIT IV
Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic
data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber
audit implications for e-governance
Unit V
Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and
construction of a joining table
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill
Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing
Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in
India ICFAI Press Hyderabad
B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill
H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications
V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd
IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 615
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization
UNIT I
IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT
Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo
Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for
IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library
UNIT II
Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service
Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support
Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change
Management Release Management
UNIT III
Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve
Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine
Recovery Data Retention
UNIT IV
Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security
Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection
UNIT V
IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and
Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and
Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of
Internet on Technical Support
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology
REFERENCE BOOKS
Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce
(OGC) TSO UK
Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos
Management Tata McGraw Hill
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 616
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques
and their management
UNIT I
Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations
of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and
distribution
UNIT II
Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and
factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging
of foods
UNIT III
Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food
industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO
etc
UNIT IV
Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products
cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking
confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of
fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH
Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie
Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing
Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH
MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 617
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing
concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs
UNIT I
Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution
channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-
farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing
UNIT II
Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds
Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of
NSC and State Seed Corporation
UNIT III
Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers
Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash
marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer
marketing
UNIT IV
Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash
marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of
electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity
UNIT V
Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm
machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines
implementsEquipmentlsquos
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with
various functional areas of agribusiness
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp
IBH
Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management
Kalyani
Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ
House
FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 618
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis
of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions
UNIT I
Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management
decisions farm management problems
UNIT II
Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle
principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc
UNIT III
Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm
records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement
farm efficiency measures
UNIT IV
Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc
UNIT V
Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to
counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks
and uncertainty
COURSE OUTCOME
Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses
REFERENCE BOOKS
Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall
Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ
Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ
Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ
RETAIL GROUP
BUYER BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA 619
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer
decisions making
UNIT-I
A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic
Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market
Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making
UNIT-II
Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles
of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer
Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and
Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product
Relationship
UNIT-III
Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to
information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-
Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors
Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications
UNIT-IV
Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing
Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-
Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions
Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy
UNIT-V
Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics
lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they
experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and
impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour
COURSE OUTCOME
Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the
choices consumers make
REFERENCE BOOKS
JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata
Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006
Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context
Excel Books NewDelhi-2001
Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous
DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing
Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi
Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining
Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005
Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000
RETAIL PLANNING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 620
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational
decision-making processes in the organized retail
UNIT I
Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail
Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-
Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative
methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management
UNIT II
Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics
Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp
non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion
designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting
Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-
Management of Obsolete goods
UNIT III
Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer
psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical
Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices
UNIT IV
Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-
Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp
Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective
Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer
Rights- Consumer Protection Acts
UNIT V
Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing
Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-
Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels
REFERENCE BOOKS
Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies
Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies
Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson
Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund
amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson
Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice
Hall of India New Delhi
Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies
Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best
People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd
RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 621
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the
value it creates
UNIT I
Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When
How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience
Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency
UNIT II
Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated
Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-
Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-
UNIT III
Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on
Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-
Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display
Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-
UNIT IV
Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium
Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and
Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-
Trade Dealing
UNIT V
Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-
Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating
Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing
to act in ways that increase loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -
Prentice-Hall
Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology
Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales
Promotion Techniques
Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate
Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page
Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books
George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing
Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill
PRODUCTION GROUP
PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL
Course Code 1Y3BBA 622
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a
basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of
facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality
control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an
understanding of the concept of aggregate planning
UNIT- I
Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors
Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-
requisites of PPC
UNIT- II
Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in
Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining
Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control
Models)
UNIT- III
Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection
Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master
production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of
software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II
UNIT- IV
Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n
job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling
Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)
UNIT- V
Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control
function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications
bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi
Deep and Deep Publications
PROCESS REENGINEERING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 623
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of
business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering
projects
UNIT- I
Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp
pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR
UNIT- II
Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering
project organizing for process reengineering
UNIT- III
Process analysis and design
a) Process analysis
(b) Process design
UNIT- IV
Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition
tracking and measuring process performance
UNIT- V
Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology
Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact
measurement
COURSE OUTCOME
To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the
considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-
engineering project
REFERENCE BOOKS
Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata
McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater
Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester
John Wiley amp Sons
WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn
the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time
standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering
to design of work systems
UNIT- I
Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos
productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity
Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time
Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities
Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was
developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph
UNIT- II
Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting
up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion
Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand
Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and
Design of Tools amp Equipment
UNIT- III
Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard
from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and
Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work
Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling
UNIT- IV
Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage
Incentive Plans
The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for
Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action
UNIT-V
Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion
Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System
Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts
Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional
including understanding the need for quality
REFERENCE BOOKS
iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill
ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation
Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp
Sons
Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall
Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall
Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press
Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall
Mall East and London
Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN
Course Code 1Y3BBA 625
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in
it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative
impacts of tourism development
UNIT I
Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism
Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of
Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in
Tourism Development
UNIT II
Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning
system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos
Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-
Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in
learning system
UNIT III
Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable
development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist
Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash
The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash
Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities
UNIT IV
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage
of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment
UNIT IV
Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the
Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National
Policy on Ecology and Environment
COURSE OUTCOME
To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global
perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international
tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for
sustainable tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash
Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications
Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers
Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William
Heinemann Ltd
Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices
London Pitman Publishing
Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York
Kendall Hunt Publishing Company
Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan
Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman
Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford
University Press
New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable
Development Approach VNR and New York
TOURISM MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 626
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism
and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing
that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products
before the stakeholders of tourism industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing
Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and
Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market
Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing
Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for
different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing
Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales
promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital
communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future
It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are
needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be
a part of this growth
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar
Thomson Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd
edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of
Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry
UNIT I
HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of
Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads
ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and
marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents
UNIT II
RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief
History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway
Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway
station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains
express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world
heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes
UNIT III
AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth
Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled
Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature
Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players
Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and
performance marketing strategies of Air India
UNIT IV
WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover
crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going
traffic) ndash National waterways
UNIT V
CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing
stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and
Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation
COURSE OUTCOME
Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of
the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management
REFERENCE BOOKS
RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 628
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of
its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing
knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital
Management
UNIT I
Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its
impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need
principles purpose
UNIT II
Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and
their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply
department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health
and patient safety
UNIT III
Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of
biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules
standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging
transportation amp storage
UNIT IV
Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier
methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal
decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of
wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan
UNIT V
Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party
insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash
meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural
disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague
typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics
COURSE OUTCOME
To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost
containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges
arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs
and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its
various components
REFERENCE BOOKS
Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication
First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn
Park k - Preventive and social medicine
Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot
MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 629
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted
advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public
relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any
potential crisis that may arise
UNIT I
Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches
to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of
marketing functions of marketing
UNIT II
Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment
Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market
segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash
positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing
UNIT III
Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior
(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying
decision process
UNIT IV
Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp
deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product
development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling
UNIT V
Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing
policies and strategies
Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management
decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels
COURSE OUTCOME
Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an
integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare
professionals and the public
REFERENCE BOOKS
Philip Kotler - marketing management
Wiliam jStanton - marketing management
Sherleker S A - marketing management
J C Gandhi - marketing management
Davar - modern marketing management
Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub
P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research
Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research
HOSPITALS RELATED LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 630
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of
common-law development
UNIT ndash I
Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties
sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance
act trust act societies registration act
UNIT ndashII
Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of
human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act
1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971
mental health act patient consent
UNIT ndash III
Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948
narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods
act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration
UNIT ndash IV
Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act
1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916
maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing
order) act trade union act industrial disputes act
UNIT ndashV
Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in
hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical
negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical
establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal
pronouncements rulings and regulations
REFERENCE BOOKS
Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer
Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law
Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 631
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India
To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural
Production system in India
To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India
To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development
UNIT -1
Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions
ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology
Case analysis and discussion
UNIT II
Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash
Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture
UNIT III
Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-
Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India
UNIT IV
Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of
holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus
land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas
UNIT V
Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash
Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and
schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM
COURSE OUTCOMES
Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management
Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India
Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development
REFERENCE BOOKS
Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution
Can We Make London Department for International Development
Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House
PANCHAYATI RAJ
Course Code 1Y3BBA632
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration
To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites
To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance
To provide insights on Rural Administration
To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes
UNIT I
Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction
Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges
Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration
(Official and non-official) and report submission
UNIT III
Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission
UNIT IV
Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and
Block- Panchayat relationship
Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play
UNIT V
Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government
Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan
Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
COURSE OUTCOMES
Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village
Development interventions
Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its
power Structure
Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and
Plans
Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes
32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959
Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise
Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi
Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New
Delhi
RURAL ECONOMY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 633
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy
To help students understand their role in rural economic development
To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources
To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation
To create awareness on rural economic development
UNIT I
Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-
Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries
(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in
agriculture individual production other production services
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-
Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash
Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land
Reforms
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
UNIT III
Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation
programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs
UNIT IV
Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work
UNIT V
Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing
ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for
the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy
Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village
Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues
Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation
Facilities
Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi
Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi
Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic
Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New
Delhi
INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER
Mid Semester Examination (MSE)
There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5
descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered
End Semester Examination (ESE)
There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks
each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of
10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered
Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations
The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment
Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be
applicable
(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )
Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type
End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size
ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA102
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students study the behaviour of individuals and groups as part of the social and technical system in
the workplace They examine individual and group behaviour communication conflict and various
management styles motivational techniques and coordination in the work environment and apply
these concepts to the development of an organizations human resources
UNIT I
Organization Overview of the concept and relevance of organizational Behaviour meaning Nature
Scope features approaches model challenges and opportunities functions amp Role of manager
Planning process Decision making Process
UNIT II
Foundation of individual Behavior Biography ability personality (determinants and models)
perception (definition components factors affecting perception in decision making) Values
Beliefs etc
UNIT III
Individual Behavior- Attitude Definition importance Types Attitude regarding- Job
Satisfaction Involvement commitment effects of employee attitude changing attitudes
Learning Definition nature theories classical conditioning operant conditioning cognitive
Learning Social learning
UNIT IV
Motivation Concept and theories (Maslow McGregor Herzberg ERG) merits amp demerits Group
dynamics amp Team work Nature theories types of group Definition Stages of Group Development
effectiveness potential problems Analysis of Interpersonal Relationship Transactional Analysis
Johari Window
UNIT- V
Organizational change and development approaches and methods stress nature source effects
conflicts employee counseling approaches extra mural penitential learning programmers case
study
COURSE OUTCOME
To explain group dynamics and demonstrate skills required for working in groups (team building)
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Luthans Fred Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India
bull Mishra MN Behaviour Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
bull Newstrom W John Davis Keith Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India
bull LM Roy Organisational Behaviour S Chand Publication
bull Dr FC Sharma Organisational Behaviour SBPD Publications
INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ACCOUNTING
Course Code 1Y3BBA103
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable students to synthesize related information and evaluate options for most logical and
optimal solution such that they would be able to predict and control cost incurrence and improve
results
UNIT- I
Accounting Basic of Accounting Accounting Mechanics-Double Entry System Classification
Rules for Debit amp Credit Journal Ledger and Trial Balance sub-division of journal Ledger meaning subdivision and mechanics of Posting balancing ledger accounts
UNIT- II
Cash book and Subsidiary books of Accounting Kinds of Cash Book Purchase day book and sale
day Book Bank reconciliation statement Measurement of income- Adjusting entries- rectification of
errors- Adjusted trial balance
UNIT-III
Preparation of financial statements- Trading account Profit amp Loss account Balance Sheet (with
Adjustments) Accounting for Non-profit organization Accounting Procedures Receipts amp payment
accounts income ampexpenditure account problems
UNIT- IV
Depreciation- Meaning Determinant factors Method amp Significance Basic Concepts of hire
purchase amp installments
UNIT- V
Partnership-Preliminary admission of a partner Company Accounts-Issue of shares Debentures
Forfeitures and reissue of shares
COURSE OUTCOME
Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of product and services in the
Organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
SA Siddiqui- Comprehensive Accounting
TS Greval- Introduction to Accounting
Mukherjee and M Accounting (Volume-I)
SN Maheshwar- Introduction to Accounting (Vikas Publication)
CAC Rama Gopal Accounting For Managers (New Age)
BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational
and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business
UNIT I
Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro
environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis
for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business
UNIT II
Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic
systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years
plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent
economic initiatives NitiAyog
UNIT III
Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment
problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance
of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural
Development Problems of Growth
UNIT IV
Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment
Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA
and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act
UNIT V
International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational
Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic
Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-
GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India
COURSE OUTCOME
Outline how an entity operates in a business environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996
Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi
Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan
Chand Delhi
Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA105
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to
articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate
effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the
consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and
quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods
UNIT-I
Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of
Management Functions of the Manager
UNIT- II
Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of
Planning
Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and
type of Policies
Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems
involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques
UNIT- III
Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of
Units and committees
Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship
UNIT- IV
Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training
Directing Nature and purpose and directing
UNIT- V
Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control
process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies
COURSE OUTCOME-
Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques
managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of
managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify
and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own
position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied
audiences
Reference Books
bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher
bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson
Education
bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt
Ltd 4th Ed
bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill
Publications
SEMESTER II
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distributio
n
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor
Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distribu
tion Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Ma
x
Ma
rks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme
nt
Compulsory
Course
English
communication
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA202 Core Course
Management concept amp
Principle
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA203 Core
Course
Environmental
Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA204 Core
Course
Monetary
Economics and
Indian Banking
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA205 Core
Course
Business
Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA205 Business
Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhanceme
nt
Skill Enhancement
Elective
Course-I
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand
Total 600 21 5 - 24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
ENGLISH COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA201
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English
language teaching and content writing sectors
UNIT I
Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning
Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening
UNIT II
Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive
writing expansion of an idea
UNIT III
Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing
(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume
writing covering letter
UNIT IV
Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases
UNIT V
Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb
agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions
(Advanced)
COURSE OUTCOME
To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill
Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul
Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan
Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das
Orient Blackswan
Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press
Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication
MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 202
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and
process of effective controlling in the organization
UNIT I
Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science
Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)
UNIT II
School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and
Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)
Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management
UNIT III
Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing
Staffing Directing and Coordinating
UNIT IV
Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command
Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control
UNIT V
Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure
determination Forms- formal amp informal organization
Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations
COURSE OUTCOME
Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial
functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management
REFERENCE BOOKS
LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management
VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management
James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB
Fred Luthans- OB
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 203
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links
between human and natural systems
UNIT I
Introduction to environmental studies
Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability
and sustainable development
UNIT II
Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an
ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following
ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds
streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)
Unit III
Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to
mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and
over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international
ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate
energy sources growing energy needs case studies
UNIT IV
Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem
diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots
Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and
Informational value
UNIT V
Environmental Pollution
Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution
Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and
Industrial waste Pollution case studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social
and environmental processes
REFERENCE BOOKS
California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London
Routledge
Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security
Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press
Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of
ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006
Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37
McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books
McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the
Twentieth Century
Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders
Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic
Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt
Ltd
Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons
Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi
1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP
Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation
S Chand Publishing New Delhi
MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING
Course Code 1Y3BBA204
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using
statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills
within the contest of subject matter of economics
UNIT I
Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of
Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value
of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income
theory of Money
UNIT II
Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people
Money Market
UNIT III
Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial
Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks
UNIT IV
Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control
methods and Tools of Monetary Policy
UNIT V
RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative
Banks and Rural Banks
COURSE OUTCOME
Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and
mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of
economics
REFERENCE BOOKS
MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi
LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi
Crowther- An Out Line of Money
Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant
KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ
BUSINESS COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA205
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative
scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication
UNIT I
Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports
OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)
UNIT II
Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other
words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis
UNIT III
Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers
Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers
UNIT IV
Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a
Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication
Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)
UNIT V
Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written
Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp
minutes
COURSE OUTCOME
To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical
proficiency in the development of exposition and argument
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wren amp Martin
K Madhukar- Business Communication
VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication
Asha Laul- Business Communication
Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH
SEMESTER III
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotte
d
Credit
s
Course Code Course
Type
Course
Title
Total
Mark
s
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subjec
t wise
Distrib
ution
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA301
Ability
Enhancement
IT Tool for Business
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA302
Core Course
Introduction to Marketing
Management
100 50 17 20 7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA303 Core
Course
Business
Law
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA304 Core
Course
Business
statistics for
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA305
Core
Course
Retail
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA304 Practical
Business
statistics for Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill
Enhancemen
t Elective Course-II
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand Total 600 24
IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 301
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software
components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data
base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT
UNIT-I
Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and
Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World
Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept
UNIT-II
Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different
computer generation
UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and
Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming
Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-
principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart
examples
UNIT-IV
Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation
applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)
Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information
System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems
Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human
Resources Management Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations
Understand the hardware and software components of the computer
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford
2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication
3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication
4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill
INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 302
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply
these to a new or existing business
UNIT I
Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept
amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro
environment
UNIT II
Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of
Product Line amp Product- mix
UNIT III
Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing
decisions Overview of pricing process
UNIT IV
Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product
Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage
UNIT V
Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to
marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct
selling
COURSE OUTCOME
To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct
an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an
appropriate format
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Philip Kotler
2 TN Chabra
3 TK Panda
4 SH Kazmi
5 Arun Kumar
BUSINESS LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 303
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal
environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with
knowledge of legal principles
UNIT-I
Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration
capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts
Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp
Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency
UNIT-II
Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp
Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales
UNIT-III
Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -
Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a
negotiable instrument
UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of
non-registration Dissolution of a firm
UNIT-V
Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of
Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013
COURSE OBJECTIVE
On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to
individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context
Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 ND Kapoor
2 Tulsian
3 MC Kuchhal
4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business
BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 304
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management
UNIT I
Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance
Scope and Limitation of Statistic
UNIT II
Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar
Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive
UNIT III
Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic
Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures
of dispersion
UNIT IV
Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and
Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index
number CPI WPI IIP
UNIT V
Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank
Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series
COURSE OUTCOME
Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically
discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons
2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication
3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication
RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in
India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone
Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT
FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan
Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process
UNIT II
FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail
Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors
Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing
MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer
Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design
and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication
UNIT III
STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty
Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors
UNIT IV
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management
IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service
Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM
Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying
UNIT V
MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at
Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems
at Retail Centers
Course Outcome-
Reference Books
bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education
bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A
Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education
The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge
about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various
aspects of retail operations
After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with
the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the
entire retail operations
SEMESTER IV
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code Course
Type Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subject
wise
Distributio
n
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mark
s
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-401
Ability
Enhanceme
nt
Introduction to
soft skill amp
Team Building
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA-402 Core Course
Introduction to
financial
management
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-403 Core Course
Advertising
and Sales
Promotion
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-404 Core Course
Management
of Human resource
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of
Business
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group
Term End
Practical
Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-404 Practical
Management
of Human
resource
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-405 Practical
Macro
Economics of Business
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
Grand Total 550 22
INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 401
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate
students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners
by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are
learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for
their own learning
UNIT ndash I
General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of
Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences
Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making
Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of
communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of
Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation
UNIT ndash II
Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing
skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice
modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements
General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral
skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive
Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style
UNIT ndash III
Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format
and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in
Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active
Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD
UNIT ndash IV
Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction
Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview
Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing
Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of
Conversation
UNIT ndash V
Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional
Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers
COURSE OUTCOME
To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills
and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin
bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar
INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 402
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital
decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and
raising long-term finance
UNIT I
Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives
Role of finance manager
UNIT II
Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of
investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return
Comparison between NPV amp IRR
UNIT III
Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of
Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning
capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure
UNIT IV
The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage
Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating
Leverage
UNIT V
Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital
estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of
inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order
Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy
COURSE OUTCOME
Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial
manager in the current competitive business scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 IM Pandey
2 P Chandra
3 SP Gupta
4 MY Khan
ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 403
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may
review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos
homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions
UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising
budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for
Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising
UNIT II
Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy
Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role
types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council
of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)
UNIT III
Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring
awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of
design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet
advertising and evaluation of advertising
UNIT IV
Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors
influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option
Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of
consumer schemes and other methods of promotion
UNIT V
Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs
Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales
personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion
COURSE OUTCOME
Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how
these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its
relation to todaylsquos marketplace
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall
Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi
Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi
Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications
MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 404
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource
management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational
setting
UNIT-I
Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with
special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in
strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management
UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge
workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)
Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)
UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of
human resource department and the role of human resource manager
UNITndashIV
Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification
rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation
UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection
(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction
COURSE OUTCOME
To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training
Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical
Behaviour
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi
Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New
Delhi
Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York
HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications
A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications
MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the
important indicators of the economy and their significance
UNIT I
Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of
Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income
Personal and Personal disposable income
UNIT II
Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income
Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and
Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator
Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate
demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy
UNIT III
Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate
demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government
expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary
and fiscal policy
UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary
policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production
Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation
monetary measures fiscal measures
UNIT V
Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and
corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in
open economy
COURSE OUTCOME
To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the
role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson
2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill
3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers
4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson
SEMESTER V
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment
Internal Assessment Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-501
Ability Enhancement
Public Relation amp Corporate Image
50
25
8
10
4
15
6
2
-
-
2
1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and
small Business
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-503
Core Course Principle of
Economics
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-502
Practical Entrepreneurship and
small Business
50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics
50
25 08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Skill Course
Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill Enhancement
Elective Course-III
50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2
Grand Total
600
24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication
1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management
1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India
1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation
1Y3BBA509 Organization Development
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision
1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management
1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA513 Database Management System
1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service
1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy
1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management
1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management
1Y3BBA520 Stores Management
1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA522 Technology Management
1Y3BBA523 Productivity
1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept
1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management
1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System
1Y3BBA529 Health Economics
1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management
(Rural Management Group )
1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity
1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment
1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management
SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES
Non-Technical
Elective No Department Faculty Name
Faculty of Information Technology
I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)
II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)
IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)
V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Management
I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)
II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)
III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development
Faculty of Commerce
I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)
II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Humanities
I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)
II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)
III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Science
I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)
II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)
III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)
IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)
V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Education
I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)
II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)
PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA501
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts
of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling
and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization
UNIT- I
Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash
Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy
Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors
ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public
Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations
UNIT- II
Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service
Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social
Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy
for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation
Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event
Management
UNIT- III
Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash
Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public
Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of
Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control
UNIT IV
Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies
Components of an Individual Image
Advertising and Corporate Image
Public Relations of an Institutions
UNIT V
The Grapevine and Rumours
Stereotype
Propaganda
Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations
applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different
entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling
REFERENCE BOOKS
Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House
Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House
Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University
Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill
This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning
ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-
The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding
processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to
those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic
environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide
evidence which informs those debates
UNIT I
Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of
Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its
environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship
UNIT II
Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship
development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the
Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making
UNIT III
Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that
enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in
Social context Start Up
UNIT IV
Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional
source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital
UNIT V
Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication
2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd
3 Vasant Desai
4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH
PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 503
COURSE OBJECTIVES-
To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production
UNIT- I
Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits
UNIT-II
Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus
movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts
of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications
of demand and supply price rationing price floors
Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price
elasticity cross and income elasticity
UNIT-III
Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility
Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp
Producer surplus
UNIT-IV
Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant
and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue
and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale
UNIT-V
Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of
the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run
equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment
concept
COURSE OUTCOME-
To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011
bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th
edition
2007
bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA
bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press
Oxford
bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore
MARKETING GROUP
INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so
that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to
enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications
UNIT-I
Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC
in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising
appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion
relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship
between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods
Interactive Internet Marketing
UNIT-II
Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach
establishing and allocating promotional budget
UNIT-III
IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different
forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning
creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design
considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client
Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork
UNIT-IV
Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering
key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and
media research
Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration
client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc
UNIT-V
Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing
Communications
COURSE OUTCOME-
To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches
and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to
communicating to target audiences
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc
Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard
D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois
Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing
House
Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and
Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication
Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH
Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing
Communications Pearson Education Limited
Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc
Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House
Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning
Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc
Homewood Illinois
Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic
Approach Cengage Learning
Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India
Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education
SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT
Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE
It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and
distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and
distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners
UNIT-I
Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies
Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling
objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring
Procedure Socialization
UNIT-II
Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program
Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation
Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial
Evaluation of Contest
UNIT-III
Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel
Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales
Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process
UNIT-IV
Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key
tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market
Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation
UNIT-V
Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners
Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict
Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International
Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales
COURSE OUTCOME
Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the
sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans
participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables
REFERENCE BOOKS
Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres
Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books
Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI
L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills
Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets
Greenwood Publishing Group
Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub
ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH
Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing
consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing
research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students
within a course project
UNIT-I
Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing
Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research
Process Marketing Research Designs
UNIT-II
The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques
Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of
Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic
Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical
Analysis Tools
UNIT-III
Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)
ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor
Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental
Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores
Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-
hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number
UNIT-IV
Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product
Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant
Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification
Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing
Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and
their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity
UNIT-V
Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning
in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report
and class presentation of the same
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from
analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor
analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis
REFERENCE BOOKS
Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi
William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi
Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi
Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill
Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research
Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey
Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning
Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp
Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced
in the class
HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP
LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA
Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of
Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity
objectivity and understandings
UNIT-I
The Factories Act 1948
The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923
The Employees State Insurance Act 1948
UNIT-II
The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952
The Payment of gratuity Act 1972
UNIT-III
The Maternity Benefit Act 1961
The Minimum Wages act 1948
UNIT-IV
The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946
The Payment of Bonus Act 1965
UNIT-V
The Apprentices Act 1969
The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959
COURSE OUTCOME ndash
To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour
Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the
organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to
follow the Laws applicable to the establishment
REFERENCE BOOKS
S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications
S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi
Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot
V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House
N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons
INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE
In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our
country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of
Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be
acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the
concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India
UNIT-I
Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors
affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial
relation programme
Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact
of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes
lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry
UNIT-II
Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal
Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective
bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective
collective bargaining collective bargaining in India
UNIT-III
Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education
scheme in India- objectives functions and problems
Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation
schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India
UNIT-IV
Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India
major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions
registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union
UNIT-V
Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery
Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation
submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court
industrial tribunals
Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power
of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute
COURSE OUTCOME
Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective
bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute
resolution
REFERENCE BOOKS
Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts
IIPM Personnel Management in India
Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business
Publication Ltd
Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India
Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India
Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication
Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co
Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law
ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational
culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the
human values in individuals
UNIT-I
Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational
Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development
Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining
and survey research amp feedback methodology
UNIT-II
Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in
organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief
systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development
UNIT-III
Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component
interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief
of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action
UNIT-IV
OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team
building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process
interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions
important for successful OD efforts
UNIT ndash V
HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational
implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional
Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have
improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi
Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York
McGrawhill
Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in
addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a
good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company
UNIT-I
Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm
Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-
Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of
Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering
UNIT-II
Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the
analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount
of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a
Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and
Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis
UNIT-III
Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues
and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements
medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings
Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project
finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing
UNIT-IV
Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of
financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing
Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect
cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization
UNIT-V
Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value
Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic
indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added
Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total
Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)
COURSE OUTCOME
Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and
corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts
REFERENCE BOOKS
Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill
Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons
INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial
environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a
multinational corporation
UNIT-I
Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation
functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial
management International monetary system
UNIT-II
Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories
ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible
exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer
Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options
Currency swaps and interest rate swaps
UNIT-III
Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction
transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction
exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The
national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International
capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)
UNIT-IV
International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic
considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)
Financial risk and cost of capital
Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of
capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-
20 subsidiaries and tax havens
UNIT-V
International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their
comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets
Recent developments in the Euro bond market
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations
and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley
PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall
Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall
Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis
Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co
Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall
Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers
Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath
FINANCIAL INCLUSION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion
such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss
the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to
promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models
UNIT-I
Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting
Access to Financial Services
Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive
Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators
UNIT-II
Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey
Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional
Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card
UNIT-III
Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India
Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations
Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor
UNIT-IV
SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of
microfinance evolved in India
Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial
Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for
Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for
Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People
UNIT-V
Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises
Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion
and Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account
initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage
Publication
Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House
Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech
Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications
Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications
Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing
Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI
Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI
Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag
Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion
Academic Foundation
IT GROUP
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to
manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the
hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment
UNIT-I
The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures
File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base
Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial
Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness
UNIT-II
Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface
with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database
Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design
UNIT-III
Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database
Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database
Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases
UNIT-IV
DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance
Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues
UNIT-V
Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the
field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective
faculty during the coverage of syllabus
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic
concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational
algebra and SQL
REFERENCE BOOKS
Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs
Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan
Press
McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co
MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It
aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing
implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services
UNIT-I
The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development
Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The
Enabling Environment for ITES
UNIT-II
Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled
Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of
Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services
UNIT-III
Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support
Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions
UNIT-IV
International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting
Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in
facilitating Trade in ITESTITES
UNIT-V
Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of
Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of
Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace
Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations
and integrate the learning in handling these complexities
REFERENCE BOOKS
Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat
E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information
technology with various aspects of Software Project Management
UNIT-I
Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision
and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM
Framework
UNIT-II
Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning
Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan
Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration
and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning
UNIT-III
Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an
Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques
Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule
Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools
UNIT-IV
Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance
Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior
Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review
UNIT-V
Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks
Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk
COURSE OUTCOME
Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business
context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business
scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson
Education Ltd
P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp
Tsinghua University Press
R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance
Management Concepts Pub
Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group
B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science
Press
A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications
G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on
understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business
UNIT I
Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm
production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country
UNIT II
Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms
and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business
sector
UNIT III
Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations
relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries
UNIT IV
Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment
and policy
UNIT V
Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies
COURSE OUTCOME
Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper
and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain
REFERENCE BOOKS
Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons
Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ
Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 517
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies
strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms
UNIT I
Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market
structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp
significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of
marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour
UNIT II
Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash
significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product
product life cycle
UNIT III
Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies
and pricing methods
UNIT IV
Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and
standardization
UNIT V
Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural
products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in
agribusiness
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better
understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for
agricultural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH
Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall
Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control
Pearson Edu
Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu
Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India
FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 518
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food
marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen
and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural
political and economic forces over time
UNIT I
Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade
Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of
Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic
factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer
UNIT II
Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling
food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing
in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions
across the chain in food retail food service marketing
UNIT III
4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing
Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system
Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement
Strategies for food retailers
UNIT IV
Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling
Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food
Products
UNIT V
Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training
Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in
retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze
Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing
REFERENCE BOOKS
Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of
India
Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu
Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill
RETAIL GROUP
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in
the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it
UNIT- I
Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management
Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain
networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain
Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network
UNIT- II
Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer
service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs
multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier
Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants
UNIT- III
Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory
models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system
UNIT- IV
COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip
Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION
TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain
Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management
UNIT- V
Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a
Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance
measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics
quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics
COURSE OUTCOME
After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain
which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House
bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers
bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg
bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi
bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan
STORES MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 520
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different
terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned
areas
UNIT- I
Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the
location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design
UNIT- II
Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual
Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors
UNIT- III
Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at
Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores
Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments
UNIT- IV
Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies
Quick Response System
UNIT- V
Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact
on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space
Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization
COURSE OUTCOME
The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern
and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management
bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing
bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach
bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing
bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing
RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 521
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail
Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail
business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management
UNIT I
Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail
equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail
market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-
Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India
UNIT II
Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development
The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and
Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-
Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on
ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response
marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks
The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management
UNIT III
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM
Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch
points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services
Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM
Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding
Common Barriers
UNIT IV
Services Management
Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the
service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-
Supply relationships vehicle routing
UNIT V
Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising
Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping
the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand
management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-
2nd edition 2006
MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational
edititionUS1798
Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education
New Delhi 2003
JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy
Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi
Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy
Pearson Education New Delhi 2004
KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005
Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007
Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House
Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution
rosenbloom and Education Foundation US
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT
TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 522
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
UNIT- I
Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology
Change Implication
UNIT- II
Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying
UNIT- III
Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology
Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management
UNIT- IV
Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology
Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages
UNIT- V
Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise
Level
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to
manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009
bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009
bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson
PRODUCTIVITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 523
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
UNIT- I
Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and
external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work
Contents and Ineffective Time
UNIT- II
Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram
String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart
UNIT- III
Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart
UNIT- IV
Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be
Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement
UNIT- V
Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International
Labour Office Geneva
bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed
bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill
bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India
QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO
Course Code 1Y3BBA 524
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify
the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and
measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current
issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans
UNIT- I
Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives
UNIT- II
Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect
concept
UNIT- III
Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality
UNIT- IV
Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various
control Charts
UNIT- V
Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification
COURSE OUTCOME-
Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to
explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key
aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for
controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp
communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze
the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise
and evaluate quality implementation plans
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay
bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd
bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas
bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd
bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition
7th
Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012
bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM CONCEPTS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 525
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism
To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash
Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp
Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and
development of Tourism through the ages
UNIT II
COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash
Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism
inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious
Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions
incentives sports and adventure tourism
UNIT III
TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash
Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of
motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash
health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and
push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists
UNIT IV
IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash
Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts
- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism
UNIT V
SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-
Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote
Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable
Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and
experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of
tourism experiences
REFERENCES BOOKS
Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling
Publishers Private Limited New Delhi
Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism
Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited
Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill
International
Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors
New Delhi
Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas
Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New
Delhi
TOURISM MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 526
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the basic concept and various components of management
UNIT I
MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-
Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of
management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)
Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management
UNIT II
PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-
Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of
planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by
objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance
and limitation of decision making
UNIT III
ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash
Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of
staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance
appraisal
UNIT IV
DIRECTING ndash
Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation
(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy
theory)
UNIT V
LEADERSHIP-
Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path
Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to
communication
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives
Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of
tourism as well as the impacts of tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc
Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New
Delhi
Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition
AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing
House New Delhi
Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition
Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations
To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism
industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-
Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing
Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and
Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash
Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New
Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING -
Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION -
Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity
Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in
promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level
which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described
REFERENCES BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson
Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition
Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent
learning
UNIT I
Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health
Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural
History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention
UNIT II
Definition and meaning of hospital ndash
Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing
concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of
Hospitals
UNIT III
Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector
Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in
delivering healthcare in India
UNIT IV
Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural
hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description
UNIT V
The reforms of Healthcare System-
The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare
reforms amp Future of Healthcare System
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding
the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the
management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and
organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services
REFERENCE BOOKS
The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991
Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd
Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers
HEALTH ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 529
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and
understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict
peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different
social actions
UNIT I
Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and
importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below
Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits
UNIT II
Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve
techniques and properties of indifference curve
UNIT III
Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash
Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of
Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of
Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of
demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash
Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue
UNIT IV
Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two
variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves
UNIT V
Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash
Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and
monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market
situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price
determination
COURSE OUTCOME
To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from
an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic
evaluation of a health intervention or program
REFERENCE BOOKS
Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR
Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP
Managerial Economics - Gupta GS
Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani
Business Economics - Sharma NK
Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar
Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi
Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL
HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 530
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions
related to records management in the healthcare environment
UNIT I
Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record
keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records
UNIT II
Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health
Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research
UNIT III
Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics
investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing
Pharmacy etc Audits)
UNIT IV
Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems
associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic
Related Groups (DRG)
UNIT V
Medical Registers ndash
Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various
departments amp common problems faced
COURSE OUTCOME
Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New
Delhi 1999
Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995
Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi
George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003
Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 531
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India
To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India
UNIT I
Rural Society in India
Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-
urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and
subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural
life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion
UNIT II
Rural Society
Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social
institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity
and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of
rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT-III
Village India
Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance
contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and
political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology
Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class
UNIT IV
Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics
Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid
growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope
and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -
Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT-V
Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times
Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social
processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India
Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy
Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms
REFERENCE BOOKS
Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi
Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay
PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House
SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication
House Delhi
ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 532
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To explain the nature of environmental studies
To introduce aspects of Natural resources
To introduce aspects of ecosystems
To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation
To introduce aspects of environmental pollution
To create awareness on social issues and environment
To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
UNIT I
Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for
public awareness
UNIT II
Ecosystems
Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and
decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and
Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the
following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic
Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)
UNIT III
Biodiversity and its Conservation
Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification
of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option
Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports
of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-
Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ
Conservation of biodiversity
UNIT IV
Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil
pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste
Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an
individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods
earthquake cyclone and landslides
20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT V
Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water
Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of
People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible
responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and
holocaust
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the nature of environmental studies
Classify renewable and non-renewable resources
Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues
Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation
Analyze aspects of environmental pollution
Describe aspects of social issues and environment
Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner
Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental
Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai
Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA
RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 533
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts
To familiarize Rural marketing strategy
To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems
To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing
To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages
UNIT I
Overview of Rural Marketing
Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing
and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction
Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class
UNIT II
Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for
rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT III
Rural Distribution Systems
Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche
markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of
Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT IV
ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network
(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction
Methodology Group Project work
UNIT V
Market support
Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role
play
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Market their products
Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products
Choose an appropriate distribution system
Apply ICT in rural marketing
Source the finance for rural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India
Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education
Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi
SEMESTER- VI
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allot
ted
Cred
its
Course
Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mark
s
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-601
Core
Course
E- Commerce
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-602 Core
Course
Customer
Relationship Management
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-603 Practical
Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva
Voce
100
50
17
-
-
50
20
- - 4 4
1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Grand Total
550
22
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one
paper presentation certificate in related discipline
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management
1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing
1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA607 Management of Change
1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management
1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management
1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service
1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business
1Y3BBA614 E- Governance
1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management
1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing
1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour
1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning
1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design
1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control
1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan
1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing
1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management
1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care
1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law
(Rural Management Group)
1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System
1Y3BBA632
Panchayati Raj
1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy
E- COMMERCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 601
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is
designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the
technical foundation for understanding information systems
UNIT I
Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting
online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a
business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-
commerce
UNIT II
Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet
(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A
systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing
vs in-house development of a website)
UNIT III
Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension
definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security
intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)
technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and
protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)
UNIT IV
E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards
e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online
banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house
automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments
UNIT V
Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting
online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of
utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online
services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and
entertainment
COURSE OUTCOME-
Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information
systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Management Information System Jawadekar
bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon
bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana
bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)
bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty
CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 602
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of
Customer Relationship Management in the organizations
UNIT- I
Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature
of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive
and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and
evaluating customer business plans
UNIT- II
Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer
database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing
customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively
Planning and making persuasive presentations
UNIT- III
Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality
Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality
managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and
Cross- sell
UNIT- IV
Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations
Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority
setting Target setting setting standards
UNIT- V
Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction
COURSE OUTCOME-
To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship
Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd
Ed Response Books Sage Publication
Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House
Pvt Ltd
Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books
Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management
V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008
Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management
South Western Cengage Learning
Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press
Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age
International
Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan
Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of
India Private Limted New Delhi 2011
S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private
Limted New Delhi 2008
ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 603
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to
work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn
the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final
semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by
the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a
student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their
analytical capabilities and experience
DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)
Title of the study (Cover Page)
Declaration
Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)
Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)
Acknowledgement
Table of Contents
Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used
1 INTRODUCTION
11 Introduction
12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research
12 Significance of the study
13 Scope of the study
14 Research Problem
15 Objective of the study
17 Hypothesis
18 Limitations of the study
2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students
to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they
learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After
the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is
evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report
should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to
provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also
able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business
operations and come up with the ways to tap the
Opportunities
3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
31 Introduction
32 Population of the study
33 Sampling Design
331 Sampling Technique
332 Sampling Method
333 Sample Size
34 Research Instrument
35 Sources of data
351 Primary Data
352 Secondary Data
4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION
5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION
Bibliography
COURSE OUTCOME-
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able
to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and
come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities
MARKETING GROUP
PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 604
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the
context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product
manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions
UNIT- I
Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused
organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management
Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-
cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product
Development
UNIT- II
Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods
of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in
international Market
UNIT- III
Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity
concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand
Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image
UNIT- IV
Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system
measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement
Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market
segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining
and establishing brand values
UNIT- V
Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand
extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time
Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand
Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation
COURSE OUTCOME
The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of
Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for
Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning
implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer
Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi
Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi
Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi
Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education
New Delhi
Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi
Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata
McGraw Hill New Delhi
Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi
STRATEGIC MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 605
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and
implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and
managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver
superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation
through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills
UNIT- I
Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash
Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of
Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying
Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting
Marketing Objectives
UNIT-II
Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching
Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy
Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle
Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies
UNIT-III
Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp
Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models
UNIT- IV
Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives
Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy
Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing
UNIT- V
Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at
different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by
executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and
interdisciplinary nature
REFERENCE BOOKS
Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt
D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin
OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage
Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill
Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp
Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson
Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann
Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India
George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press
J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and
Programs McGraw-Hill Companies
Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub
Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon
P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave
E-MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 606
COURSE OBJECTIVE
It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance
enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns
UNIT- I
Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics
Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan
Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing
UNIT- II
Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in
India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within
communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing
UNIT- III
Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet
as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet
User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-
branding
UNIT- IV
Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-
marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools
Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent
Trends in e-customer service
UNIT- V
Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web
Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing
campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising
Course Outcome
Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics
online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its
implication on marketing strategy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a
networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill
Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall
Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning
Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books
Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial
Times
HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 607
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be
Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students
Understand the importance of managing change
UNIT- I
Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-
Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of
human resource strategies in implementing Change
UNIT-II
Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR
implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation
and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions
UNIT-III
HR Processes amp Change
Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned
change
Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change
UNIT- IV
Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in
employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management
of change implications of downsizing
UNIT- V
Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to
promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and
feedback
Course Outcome
Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more
effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change
process
REFERENCE BOOKS
A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human
Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education
Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill
Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage
South Asia Edition
K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation
Response Books
VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books
CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 608
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical
relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand
anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions
to ensure the organizational and individual success
UNIT-I
Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of
organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business
environment
UNIT-II
Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars
Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations
UNIT- III
Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock
Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system
(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)
UNIT- IV
Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and
repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally
appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural
negotiation and conflicts management
UNIT- V
Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual
countries Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development
of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning
Private Limited
G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill
Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley
Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing
Co
Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell
Business
Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times
McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp
Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation
Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson
Education India
GROUP DYNAMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 609
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group
dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group
effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of
resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding
UNIT-I
Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group
dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B
UNIT-II
Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group
Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash
Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress
UNIT-III
Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group
decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash
conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict
UNIT- IV
Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De
individuation theory
UNIT- V
Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources
of Change in groups
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups
REFERENCE BOOKS
Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley
Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass
Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co
Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE
Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and
application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax
along with basic concepts of VAT
UNIT-I
Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of
Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment
of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-II
Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature
and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax
planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business
UNIT-III
Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net
Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and
Penalties (Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-IV
Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for
service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of
Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)
UNIT- V
VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview
of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT
Law)
COURSE OUTCOME
Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields
REFERENCE BOOKS
Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications
Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub
Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House
T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India
BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson
S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann
R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _
INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 611
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important
components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO
Analysis etc
UNIT-I
INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian
Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role
in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)
UNIT-II
FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different
Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players
Different types of Instruments
UNIT-III
CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI
Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank
UNIT- IV
COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp
Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A
REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA
UNIT- V
NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies
Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture
Capital Funds
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment
Banking companies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication
Financial Services MY Khan TMH
Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication
S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran
ML Seth
FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 612
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and
prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of
uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding
of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role
of internal audit assessments
UNIT I
Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview
UNIT II
Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax
fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and
inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds
UNIT III
Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion
investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports
UNIT IV
Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using
Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)
UNIT V Case Study
1 Two Indian
2 Two international cases
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread
nature of fraud and its economic impact
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation
Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination
Cengage Learning
IT GROUP
INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 613
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security
managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues
in the information assurance field
UNIT I
Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian
Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its
application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law
Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour
Laws E-Media and Print Media
UNIT II
E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security
Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature
UNIT III
Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil
Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-
detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of
Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA
UNIT IV
IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal
issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base
UNIT V
Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of
Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules
COURSE OUTCOME-
Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House
Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co
John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River
Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher
Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University
E-GOVERNANCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 614
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information
Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an
awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the
issues concerning the Cyber security
UNIT I
Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National
E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status
UNIT II
E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process
Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges
UNIT III
E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-
Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics
UNIT IV
Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic
data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber
audit implications for e-governance
Unit V
Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and
construction of a joining table
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill
Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing
Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in
India ICFAI Press Hyderabad
B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill
H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications
V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd
IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 615
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization
UNIT I
IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT
Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo
Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for
IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library
UNIT II
Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service
Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support
Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change
Management Release Management
UNIT III
Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve
Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine
Recovery Data Retention
UNIT IV
Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security
Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection
UNIT V
IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and
Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and
Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of
Internet on Technical Support
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology
REFERENCE BOOKS
Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce
(OGC) TSO UK
Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos
Management Tata McGraw Hill
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 616
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques
and their management
UNIT I
Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations
of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and
distribution
UNIT II
Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and
factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging
of foods
UNIT III
Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food
industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO
etc
UNIT IV
Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products
cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking
confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of
fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH
Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie
Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing
Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH
MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 617
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing
concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs
UNIT I
Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution
channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-
farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing
UNIT II
Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds
Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of
NSC and State Seed Corporation
UNIT III
Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers
Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash
marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer
marketing
UNIT IV
Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash
marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of
electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity
UNIT V
Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm
machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines
implementsEquipmentlsquos
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with
various functional areas of agribusiness
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp
IBH
Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management
Kalyani
Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ
House
FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 618
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis
of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions
UNIT I
Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management
decisions farm management problems
UNIT II
Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle
principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc
UNIT III
Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm
records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement
farm efficiency measures
UNIT IV
Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc
UNIT V
Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to
counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks
and uncertainty
COURSE OUTCOME
Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses
REFERENCE BOOKS
Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall
Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ
Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ
Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ
RETAIL GROUP
BUYER BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA 619
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer
decisions making
UNIT-I
A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic
Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market
Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making
UNIT-II
Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles
of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer
Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and
Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product
Relationship
UNIT-III
Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to
information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-
Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors
Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications
UNIT-IV
Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing
Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-
Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions
Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy
UNIT-V
Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics
lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they
experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and
impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour
COURSE OUTCOME
Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the
choices consumers make
REFERENCE BOOKS
JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata
Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006
Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context
Excel Books NewDelhi-2001
Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous
DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing
Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi
Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining
Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005
Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000
RETAIL PLANNING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 620
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational
decision-making processes in the organized retail
UNIT I
Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail
Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-
Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative
methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management
UNIT II
Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics
Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp
non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion
designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting
Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-
Management of Obsolete goods
UNIT III
Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer
psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical
Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices
UNIT IV
Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-
Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp
Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective
Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer
Rights- Consumer Protection Acts
UNIT V
Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing
Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-
Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels
REFERENCE BOOKS
Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies
Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies
Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson
Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund
amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson
Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice
Hall of India New Delhi
Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies
Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best
People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd
RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 621
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the
value it creates
UNIT I
Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When
How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience
Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency
UNIT II
Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated
Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-
Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-
UNIT III
Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on
Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-
Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display
Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-
UNIT IV
Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium
Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and
Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-
Trade Dealing
UNIT V
Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-
Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating
Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing
to act in ways that increase loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -
Prentice-Hall
Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology
Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales
Promotion Techniques
Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate
Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page
Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books
George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing
Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill
PRODUCTION GROUP
PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL
Course Code 1Y3BBA 622
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a
basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of
facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality
control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an
understanding of the concept of aggregate planning
UNIT- I
Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors
Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-
requisites of PPC
UNIT- II
Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in
Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining
Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control
Models)
UNIT- III
Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection
Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master
production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of
software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II
UNIT- IV
Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n
job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling
Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)
UNIT- V
Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control
function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications
bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi
Deep and Deep Publications
PROCESS REENGINEERING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 623
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of
business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering
projects
UNIT- I
Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp
pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR
UNIT- II
Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering
project organizing for process reengineering
UNIT- III
Process analysis and design
a) Process analysis
(b) Process design
UNIT- IV
Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition
tracking and measuring process performance
UNIT- V
Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology
Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact
measurement
COURSE OUTCOME
To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the
considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-
engineering project
REFERENCE BOOKS
Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata
McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater
Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester
John Wiley amp Sons
WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn
the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time
standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering
to design of work systems
UNIT- I
Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos
productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity
Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time
Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities
Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was
developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph
UNIT- II
Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting
up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion
Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand
Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and
Design of Tools amp Equipment
UNIT- III
Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard
from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and
Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work
Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling
UNIT- IV
Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage
Incentive Plans
The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for
Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action
UNIT-V
Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion
Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System
Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts
Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional
including understanding the need for quality
REFERENCE BOOKS
iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill
ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation
Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp
Sons
Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall
Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall
Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press
Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall
Mall East and London
Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN
Course Code 1Y3BBA 625
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in
it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative
impacts of tourism development
UNIT I
Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism
Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of
Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in
Tourism Development
UNIT II
Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning
system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos
Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-
Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in
learning system
UNIT III
Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable
development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist
Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash
The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash
Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities
UNIT IV
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage
of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment
UNIT IV
Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the
Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National
Policy on Ecology and Environment
COURSE OUTCOME
To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global
perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international
tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for
sustainable tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash
Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications
Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers
Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William
Heinemann Ltd
Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices
London Pitman Publishing
Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York
Kendall Hunt Publishing Company
Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan
Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman
Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford
University Press
New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable
Development Approach VNR and New York
TOURISM MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 626
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism
and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing
that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products
before the stakeholders of tourism industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing
Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and
Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market
Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing
Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for
different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing
Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales
promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital
communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future
It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are
needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be
a part of this growth
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar
Thomson Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd
edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of
Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry
UNIT I
HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of
Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads
ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and
marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents
UNIT II
RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief
History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway
Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway
station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains
express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world
heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes
UNIT III
AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth
Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled
Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature
Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players
Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and
performance marketing strategies of Air India
UNIT IV
WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover
crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going
traffic) ndash National waterways
UNIT V
CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing
stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and
Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation
COURSE OUTCOME
Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of
the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management
REFERENCE BOOKS
RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 628
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of
its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing
knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital
Management
UNIT I
Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its
impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need
principles purpose
UNIT II
Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and
their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply
department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health
and patient safety
UNIT III
Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of
biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules
standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging
transportation amp storage
UNIT IV
Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier
methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal
decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of
wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan
UNIT V
Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party
insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash
meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural
disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague
typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics
COURSE OUTCOME
To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost
containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges
arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs
and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its
various components
REFERENCE BOOKS
Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication
First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn
Park k - Preventive and social medicine
Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot
MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 629
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted
advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public
relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any
potential crisis that may arise
UNIT I
Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches
to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of
marketing functions of marketing
UNIT II
Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment
Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market
segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash
positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing
UNIT III
Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior
(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying
decision process
UNIT IV
Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp
deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product
development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling
UNIT V
Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing
policies and strategies
Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management
decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels
COURSE OUTCOME
Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an
integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare
professionals and the public
REFERENCE BOOKS
Philip Kotler - marketing management
Wiliam jStanton - marketing management
Sherleker S A - marketing management
J C Gandhi - marketing management
Davar - modern marketing management
Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub
P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research
Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research
HOSPITALS RELATED LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 630
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of
common-law development
UNIT ndash I
Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties
sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance
act trust act societies registration act
UNIT ndashII
Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of
human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act
1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971
mental health act patient consent
UNIT ndash III
Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948
narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods
act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration
UNIT ndash IV
Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act
1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916
maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing
order) act trade union act industrial disputes act
UNIT ndashV
Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in
hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical
negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical
establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal
pronouncements rulings and regulations
REFERENCE BOOKS
Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer
Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law
Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 631
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India
To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural
Production system in India
To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India
To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development
UNIT -1
Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions
ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology
Case analysis and discussion
UNIT II
Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash
Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture
UNIT III
Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-
Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India
UNIT IV
Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of
holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus
land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas
UNIT V
Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash
Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and
schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM
COURSE OUTCOMES
Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management
Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India
Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development
REFERENCE BOOKS
Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution
Can We Make London Department for International Development
Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House
PANCHAYATI RAJ
Course Code 1Y3BBA632
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration
To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites
To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance
To provide insights on Rural Administration
To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes
UNIT I
Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction
Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges
Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration
(Official and non-official) and report submission
UNIT III
Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission
UNIT IV
Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and
Block- Panchayat relationship
Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play
UNIT V
Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government
Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan
Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
COURSE OUTCOMES
Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village
Development interventions
Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its
power Structure
Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and
Plans
Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes
32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959
Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise
Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi
Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New
Delhi
RURAL ECONOMY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 633
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy
To help students understand their role in rural economic development
To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources
To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation
To create awareness on rural economic development
UNIT I
Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-
Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries
(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in
agriculture individual production other production services
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-
Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash
Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land
Reforms
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
UNIT III
Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation
programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs
UNIT IV
Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work
UNIT V
Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing
ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for
the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy
Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village
Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues
Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation
Facilities
Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi
Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi
Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic
Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New
Delhi
INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER
Mid Semester Examination (MSE)
There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5
descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered
End Semester Examination (ESE)
There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks
each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of
10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered
Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations
The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment
Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be
applicable
(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )
Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type
End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size
INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ACCOUNTING
Course Code 1Y3BBA103
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable students to synthesize related information and evaluate options for most logical and
optimal solution such that they would be able to predict and control cost incurrence and improve
results
UNIT- I
Accounting Basic of Accounting Accounting Mechanics-Double Entry System Classification
Rules for Debit amp Credit Journal Ledger and Trial Balance sub-division of journal Ledger meaning subdivision and mechanics of Posting balancing ledger accounts
UNIT- II
Cash book and Subsidiary books of Accounting Kinds of Cash Book Purchase day book and sale
day Book Bank reconciliation statement Measurement of income- Adjusting entries- rectification of
errors- Adjusted trial balance
UNIT-III
Preparation of financial statements- Trading account Profit amp Loss account Balance Sheet (with
Adjustments) Accounting for Non-profit organization Accounting Procedures Receipts amp payment
accounts income ampexpenditure account problems
UNIT- IV
Depreciation- Meaning Determinant factors Method amp Significance Basic Concepts of hire
purchase amp installments
UNIT- V
Partnership-Preliminary admission of a partner Company Accounts-Issue of shares Debentures
Forfeitures and reissue of shares
COURSE OUTCOME
Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of product and services in the
Organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
SA Siddiqui- Comprehensive Accounting
TS Greval- Introduction to Accounting
Mukherjee and M Accounting (Volume-I)
SN Maheshwar- Introduction to Accounting (Vikas Publication)
CAC Rama Gopal Accounting For Managers (New Age)
BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational
and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business
UNIT I
Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro
environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis
for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business
UNIT II
Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic
systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years
plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent
economic initiatives NitiAyog
UNIT III
Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment
problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance
of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural
Development Problems of Growth
UNIT IV
Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment
Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA
and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act
UNIT V
International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational
Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic
Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-
GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India
COURSE OUTCOME
Outline how an entity operates in a business environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996
Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi
Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan
Chand Delhi
Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA105
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to
articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate
effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the
consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and
quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods
UNIT-I
Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of
Management Functions of the Manager
UNIT- II
Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of
Planning
Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and
type of Policies
Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems
involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques
UNIT- III
Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of
Units and committees
Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship
UNIT- IV
Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training
Directing Nature and purpose and directing
UNIT- V
Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control
process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies
COURSE OUTCOME-
Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques
managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of
managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify
and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own
position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied
audiences
Reference Books
bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher
bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson
Education
bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt
Ltd 4th Ed
bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill
Publications
SEMESTER II
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distributio
n
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor
Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distribu
tion Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Ma
x
Ma
rks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme
nt
Compulsory
Course
English
communication
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA202 Core Course
Management concept amp
Principle
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA203 Core
Course
Environmental
Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA204 Core
Course
Monetary
Economics and
Indian Banking
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA205 Core
Course
Business
Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA205 Business
Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhanceme
nt
Skill Enhancement
Elective
Course-I
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand
Total 600 21 5 - 24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
ENGLISH COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA201
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English
language teaching and content writing sectors
UNIT I
Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning
Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening
UNIT II
Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive
writing expansion of an idea
UNIT III
Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing
(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume
writing covering letter
UNIT IV
Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases
UNIT V
Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb
agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions
(Advanced)
COURSE OUTCOME
To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill
Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul
Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan
Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das
Orient Blackswan
Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press
Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication
MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 202
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and
process of effective controlling in the organization
UNIT I
Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science
Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)
UNIT II
School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and
Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)
Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management
UNIT III
Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing
Staffing Directing and Coordinating
UNIT IV
Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command
Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control
UNIT V
Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure
determination Forms- formal amp informal organization
Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations
COURSE OUTCOME
Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial
functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management
REFERENCE BOOKS
LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management
VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management
James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB
Fred Luthans- OB
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 203
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links
between human and natural systems
UNIT I
Introduction to environmental studies
Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability
and sustainable development
UNIT II
Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an
ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following
ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds
streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)
Unit III
Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to
mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and
over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international
ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate
energy sources growing energy needs case studies
UNIT IV
Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem
diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots
Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and
Informational value
UNIT V
Environmental Pollution
Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution
Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and
Industrial waste Pollution case studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social
and environmental processes
REFERENCE BOOKS
California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London
Routledge
Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security
Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press
Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of
ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006
Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37
McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books
McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the
Twentieth Century
Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders
Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic
Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt
Ltd
Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons
Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi
1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP
Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation
S Chand Publishing New Delhi
MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING
Course Code 1Y3BBA204
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using
statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills
within the contest of subject matter of economics
UNIT I
Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of
Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value
of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income
theory of Money
UNIT II
Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people
Money Market
UNIT III
Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial
Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks
UNIT IV
Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control
methods and Tools of Monetary Policy
UNIT V
RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative
Banks and Rural Banks
COURSE OUTCOME
Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and
mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of
economics
REFERENCE BOOKS
MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi
LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi
Crowther- An Out Line of Money
Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant
KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ
BUSINESS COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA205
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative
scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication
UNIT I
Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports
OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)
UNIT II
Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other
words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis
UNIT III
Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers
Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers
UNIT IV
Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a
Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication
Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)
UNIT V
Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written
Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp
minutes
COURSE OUTCOME
To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical
proficiency in the development of exposition and argument
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wren amp Martin
K Madhukar- Business Communication
VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication
Asha Laul- Business Communication
Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH
SEMESTER III
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotte
d
Credit
s
Course Code Course
Type
Course
Title
Total
Mark
s
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subjec
t wise
Distrib
ution
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA301
Ability
Enhancement
IT Tool for Business
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA302
Core Course
Introduction to Marketing
Management
100 50 17 20 7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA303 Core
Course
Business
Law
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA304 Core
Course
Business
statistics for
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA305
Core
Course
Retail
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA304 Practical
Business
statistics for Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill
Enhancemen
t Elective Course-II
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand Total 600 24
IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 301
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software
components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data
base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT
UNIT-I
Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and
Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World
Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept
UNIT-II
Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different
computer generation
UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and
Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming
Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-
principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart
examples
UNIT-IV
Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation
applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)
Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information
System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems
Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human
Resources Management Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations
Understand the hardware and software components of the computer
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford
2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication
3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication
4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill
INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 302
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply
these to a new or existing business
UNIT I
Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept
amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro
environment
UNIT II
Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of
Product Line amp Product- mix
UNIT III
Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing
decisions Overview of pricing process
UNIT IV
Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product
Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage
UNIT V
Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to
marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct
selling
COURSE OUTCOME
To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct
an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an
appropriate format
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Philip Kotler
2 TN Chabra
3 TK Panda
4 SH Kazmi
5 Arun Kumar
BUSINESS LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 303
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal
environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with
knowledge of legal principles
UNIT-I
Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration
capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts
Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp
Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency
UNIT-II
Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp
Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales
UNIT-III
Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -
Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a
negotiable instrument
UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of
non-registration Dissolution of a firm
UNIT-V
Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of
Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013
COURSE OBJECTIVE
On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to
individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context
Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 ND Kapoor
2 Tulsian
3 MC Kuchhal
4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business
BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 304
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management
UNIT I
Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance
Scope and Limitation of Statistic
UNIT II
Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar
Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive
UNIT III
Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic
Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures
of dispersion
UNIT IV
Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and
Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index
number CPI WPI IIP
UNIT V
Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank
Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series
COURSE OUTCOME
Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically
discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons
2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication
3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication
RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in
India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone
Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT
FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan
Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process
UNIT II
FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail
Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors
Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing
MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer
Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design
and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication
UNIT III
STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty
Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors
UNIT IV
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management
IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service
Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM
Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying
UNIT V
MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at
Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems
at Retail Centers
Course Outcome-
Reference Books
bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education
bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A
Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education
The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge
about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various
aspects of retail operations
After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with
the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the
entire retail operations
SEMESTER IV
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code Course
Type Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subject
wise
Distributio
n
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mark
s
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-401
Ability
Enhanceme
nt
Introduction to
soft skill amp
Team Building
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA-402 Core Course
Introduction to
financial
management
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-403 Core Course
Advertising
and Sales
Promotion
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-404 Core Course
Management
of Human resource
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of
Business
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group
Term End
Practical
Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-404 Practical
Management
of Human
resource
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-405 Practical
Macro
Economics of Business
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
Grand Total 550 22
INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 401
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate
students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners
by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are
learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for
their own learning
UNIT ndash I
General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of
Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences
Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making
Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of
communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of
Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation
UNIT ndash II
Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing
skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice
modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements
General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral
skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive
Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style
UNIT ndash III
Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format
and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in
Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active
Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD
UNIT ndash IV
Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction
Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview
Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing
Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of
Conversation
UNIT ndash V
Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional
Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers
COURSE OUTCOME
To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills
and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin
bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar
INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 402
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital
decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and
raising long-term finance
UNIT I
Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives
Role of finance manager
UNIT II
Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of
investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return
Comparison between NPV amp IRR
UNIT III
Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of
Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning
capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure
UNIT IV
The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage
Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating
Leverage
UNIT V
Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital
estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of
inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order
Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy
COURSE OUTCOME
Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial
manager in the current competitive business scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 IM Pandey
2 P Chandra
3 SP Gupta
4 MY Khan
ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 403
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may
review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos
homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions
UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising
budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for
Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising
UNIT II
Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy
Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role
types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council
of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)
UNIT III
Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring
awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of
design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet
advertising and evaluation of advertising
UNIT IV
Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors
influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option
Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of
consumer schemes and other methods of promotion
UNIT V
Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs
Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales
personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion
COURSE OUTCOME
Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how
these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its
relation to todaylsquos marketplace
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall
Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi
Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi
Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications
MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 404
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource
management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational
setting
UNIT-I
Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with
special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in
strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management
UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge
workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)
Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)
UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of
human resource department and the role of human resource manager
UNITndashIV
Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification
rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation
UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection
(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction
COURSE OUTCOME
To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training
Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical
Behaviour
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi
Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New
Delhi
Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York
HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications
A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications
MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the
important indicators of the economy and their significance
UNIT I
Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of
Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income
Personal and Personal disposable income
UNIT II
Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income
Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and
Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator
Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate
demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy
UNIT III
Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate
demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government
expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary
and fiscal policy
UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary
policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production
Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation
monetary measures fiscal measures
UNIT V
Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and
corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in
open economy
COURSE OUTCOME
To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the
role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson
2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill
3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers
4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson
SEMESTER V
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment
Internal Assessment Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-501
Ability Enhancement
Public Relation amp Corporate Image
50
25
8
10
4
15
6
2
-
-
2
1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and
small Business
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-503
Core Course Principle of
Economics
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-502
Practical Entrepreneurship and
small Business
50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics
50
25 08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Skill Course
Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill Enhancement
Elective Course-III
50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2
Grand Total
600
24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication
1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management
1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India
1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation
1Y3BBA509 Organization Development
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision
1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management
1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA513 Database Management System
1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service
1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy
1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management
1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management
1Y3BBA520 Stores Management
1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA522 Technology Management
1Y3BBA523 Productivity
1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept
1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management
1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System
1Y3BBA529 Health Economics
1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management
(Rural Management Group )
1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity
1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment
1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management
SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES
Non-Technical
Elective No Department Faculty Name
Faculty of Information Technology
I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)
II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)
IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)
V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Management
I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)
II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)
III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development
Faculty of Commerce
I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)
II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Humanities
I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)
II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)
III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Science
I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)
II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)
III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)
IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)
V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Education
I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)
II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)
PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA501
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts
of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling
and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization
UNIT- I
Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash
Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy
Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors
ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public
Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations
UNIT- II
Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service
Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social
Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy
for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation
Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event
Management
UNIT- III
Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash
Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public
Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of
Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control
UNIT IV
Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies
Components of an Individual Image
Advertising and Corporate Image
Public Relations of an Institutions
UNIT V
The Grapevine and Rumours
Stereotype
Propaganda
Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations
applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different
entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling
REFERENCE BOOKS
Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House
Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House
Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University
Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill
This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning
ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-
The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding
processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to
those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic
environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide
evidence which informs those debates
UNIT I
Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of
Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its
environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship
UNIT II
Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship
development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the
Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making
UNIT III
Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that
enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in
Social context Start Up
UNIT IV
Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional
source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital
UNIT V
Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication
2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd
3 Vasant Desai
4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH
PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 503
COURSE OBJECTIVES-
To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production
UNIT- I
Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits
UNIT-II
Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus
movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts
of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications
of demand and supply price rationing price floors
Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price
elasticity cross and income elasticity
UNIT-III
Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility
Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp
Producer surplus
UNIT-IV
Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant
and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue
and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale
UNIT-V
Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of
the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run
equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment
concept
COURSE OUTCOME-
To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011
bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th
edition
2007
bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA
bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press
Oxford
bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore
MARKETING GROUP
INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so
that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to
enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications
UNIT-I
Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC
in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising
appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion
relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship
between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods
Interactive Internet Marketing
UNIT-II
Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach
establishing and allocating promotional budget
UNIT-III
IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different
forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning
creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design
considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client
Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork
UNIT-IV
Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering
key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and
media research
Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration
client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc
UNIT-V
Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing
Communications
COURSE OUTCOME-
To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches
and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to
communicating to target audiences
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc
Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard
D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois
Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing
House
Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and
Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication
Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH
Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing
Communications Pearson Education Limited
Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc
Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House
Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning
Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc
Homewood Illinois
Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic
Approach Cengage Learning
Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India
Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education
SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT
Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE
It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and
distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and
distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners
UNIT-I
Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies
Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling
objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring
Procedure Socialization
UNIT-II
Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program
Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation
Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial
Evaluation of Contest
UNIT-III
Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel
Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales
Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process
UNIT-IV
Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key
tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market
Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation
UNIT-V
Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners
Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict
Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International
Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales
COURSE OUTCOME
Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the
sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans
participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables
REFERENCE BOOKS
Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres
Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books
Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI
L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills
Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets
Greenwood Publishing Group
Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub
ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH
Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing
consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing
research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students
within a course project
UNIT-I
Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing
Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research
Process Marketing Research Designs
UNIT-II
The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques
Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of
Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic
Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical
Analysis Tools
UNIT-III
Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)
ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor
Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental
Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores
Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-
hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number
UNIT-IV
Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product
Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant
Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification
Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing
Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and
their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity
UNIT-V
Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning
in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report
and class presentation of the same
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from
analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor
analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis
REFERENCE BOOKS
Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi
William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi
Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi
Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill
Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research
Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey
Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning
Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp
Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced
in the class
HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP
LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA
Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of
Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity
objectivity and understandings
UNIT-I
The Factories Act 1948
The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923
The Employees State Insurance Act 1948
UNIT-II
The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952
The Payment of gratuity Act 1972
UNIT-III
The Maternity Benefit Act 1961
The Minimum Wages act 1948
UNIT-IV
The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946
The Payment of Bonus Act 1965
UNIT-V
The Apprentices Act 1969
The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959
COURSE OUTCOME ndash
To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour
Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the
organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to
follow the Laws applicable to the establishment
REFERENCE BOOKS
S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications
S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi
Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot
V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House
N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons
INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE
In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our
country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of
Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be
acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the
concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India
UNIT-I
Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors
affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial
relation programme
Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact
of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes
lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry
UNIT-II
Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal
Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective
bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective
collective bargaining collective bargaining in India
UNIT-III
Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education
scheme in India- objectives functions and problems
Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation
schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India
UNIT-IV
Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India
major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions
registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union
UNIT-V
Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery
Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation
submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court
industrial tribunals
Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power
of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute
COURSE OUTCOME
Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective
bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute
resolution
REFERENCE BOOKS
Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts
IIPM Personnel Management in India
Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business
Publication Ltd
Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India
Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India
Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication
Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co
Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law
ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational
culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the
human values in individuals
UNIT-I
Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational
Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development
Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining
and survey research amp feedback methodology
UNIT-II
Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in
organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief
systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development
UNIT-III
Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component
interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief
of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action
UNIT-IV
OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team
building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process
interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions
important for successful OD efforts
UNIT ndash V
HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational
implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional
Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have
improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi
Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York
McGrawhill
Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in
addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a
good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company
UNIT-I
Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm
Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-
Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of
Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering
UNIT-II
Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the
analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount
of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a
Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and
Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis
UNIT-III
Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues
and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements
medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings
Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project
finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing
UNIT-IV
Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of
financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing
Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect
cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization
UNIT-V
Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value
Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic
indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added
Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total
Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)
COURSE OUTCOME
Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and
corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts
REFERENCE BOOKS
Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill
Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons
INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial
environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a
multinational corporation
UNIT-I
Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation
functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial
management International monetary system
UNIT-II
Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories
ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible
exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer
Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options
Currency swaps and interest rate swaps
UNIT-III
Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction
transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction
exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The
national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International
capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)
UNIT-IV
International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic
considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)
Financial risk and cost of capital
Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of
capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-
20 subsidiaries and tax havens
UNIT-V
International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their
comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets
Recent developments in the Euro bond market
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations
and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley
PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall
Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall
Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis
Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co
Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall
Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers
Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath
FINANCIAL INCLUSION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion
such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss
the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to
promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models
UNIT-I
Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting
Access to Financial Services
Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive
Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators
UNIT-II
Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey
Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional
Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card
UNIT-III
Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India
Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations
Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor
UNIT-IV
SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of
microfinance evolved in India
Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial
Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for
Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for
Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People
UNIT-V
Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises
Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion
and Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account
initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage
Publication
Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House
Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech
Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications
Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications
Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing
Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI
Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI
Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag
Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion
Academic Foundation
IT GROUP
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to
manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the
hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment
UNIT-I
The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures
File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base
Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial
Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness
UNIT-II
Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface
with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database
Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design
UNIT-III
Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database
Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database
Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases
UNIT-IV
DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance
Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues
UNIT-V
Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the
field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective
faculty during the coverage of syllabus
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic
concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational
algebra and SQL
REFERENCE BOOKS
Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs
Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan
Press
McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co
MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It
aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing
implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services
UNIT-I
The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development
Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The
Enabling Environment for ITES
UNIT-II
Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled
Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of
Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services
UNIT-III
Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support
Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions
UNIT-IV
International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting
Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in
facilitating Trade in ITESTITES
UNIT-V
Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of
Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of
Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace
Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations
and integrate the learning in handling these complexities
REFERENCE BOOKS
Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat
E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information
technology with various aspects of Software Project Management
UNIT-I
Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision
and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM
Framework
UNIT-II
Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning
Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan
Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration
and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning
UNIT-III
Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an
Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques
Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule
Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools
UNIT-IV
Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance
Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior
Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review
UNIT-V
Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks
Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk
COURSE OUTCOME
Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business
context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business
scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson
Education Ltd
P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp
Tsinghua University Press
R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance
Management Concepts Pub
Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group
B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science
Press
A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications
G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on
understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business
UNIT I
Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm
production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country
UNIT II
Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms
and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business
sector
UNIT III
Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations
relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries
UNIT IV
Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment
and policy
UNIT V
Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies
COURSE OUTCOME
Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper
and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain
REFERENCE BOOKS
Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons
Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ
Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 517
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies
strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms
UNIT I
Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market
structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp
significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of
marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour
UNIT II
Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash
significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product
product life cycle
UNIT III
Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies
and pricing methods
UNIT IV
Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and
standardization
UNIT V
Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural
products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in
agribusiness
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better
understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for
agricultural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH
Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall
Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control
Pearson Edu
Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu
Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India
FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 518
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food
marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen
and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural
political and economic forces over time
UNIT I
Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade
Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of
Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic
factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer
UNIT II
Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling
food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing
in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions
across the chain in food retail food service marketing
UNIT III
4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing
Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system
Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement
Strategies for food retailers
UNIT IV
Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling
Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food
Products
UNIT V
Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training
Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in
retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze
Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing
REFERENCE BOOKS
Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of
India
Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu
Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill
RETAIL GROUP
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in
the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it
UNIT- I
Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management
Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain
networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain
Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network
UNIT- II
Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer
service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs
multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier
Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants
UNIT- III
Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory
models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system
UNIT- IV
COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip
Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION
TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain
Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management
UNIT- V
Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a
Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance
measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics
quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics
COURSE OUTCOME
After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain
which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House
bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers
bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg
bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi
bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan
STORES MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 520
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different
terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned
areas
UNIT- I
Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the
location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design
UNIT- II
Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual
Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors
UNIT- III
Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at
Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores
Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments
UNIT- IV
Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies
Quick Response System
UNIT- V
Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact
on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space
Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization
COURSE OUTCOME
The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern
and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management
bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing
bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach
bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing
bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing
RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 521
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail
Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail
business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management
UNIT I
Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail
equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail
market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-
Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India
UNIT II
Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development
The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and
Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-
Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on
ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response
marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks
The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management
UNIT III
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM
Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch
points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services
Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM
Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding
Common Barriers
UNIT IV
Services Management
Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the
service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-
Supply relationships vehicle routing
UNIT V
Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising
Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping
the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand
management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-
2nd edition 2006
MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational
edititionUS1798
Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education
New Delhi 2003
JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy
Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi
Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy
Pearson Education New Delhi 2004
KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005
Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007
Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House
Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution
rosenbloom and Education Foundation US
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT
TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 522
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
UNIT- I
Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology
Change Implication
UNIT- II
Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying
UNIT- III
Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology
Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management
UNIT- IV
Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology
Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages
UNIT- V
Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise
Level
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to
manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009
bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009
bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson
PRODUCTIVITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 523
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
UNIT- I
Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and
external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work
Contents and Ineffective Time
UNIT- II
Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram
String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart
UNIT- III
Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart
UNIT- IV
Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be
Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement
UNIT- V
Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International
Labour Office Geneva
bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed
bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill
bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India
QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO
Course Code 1Y3BBA 524
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify
the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and
measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current
issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans
UNIT- I
Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives
UNIT- II
Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect
concept
UNIT- III
Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality
UNIT- IV
Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various
control Charts
UNIT- V
Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification
COURSE OUTCOME-
Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to
explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key
aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for
controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp
communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze
the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise
and evaluate quality implementation plans
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay
bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd
bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas
bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd
bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition
7th
Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012
bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM CONCEPTS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 525
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism
To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash
Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp
Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and
development of Tourism through the ages
UNIT II
COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash
Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism
inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious
Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions
incentives sports and adventure tourism
UNIT III
TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash
Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of
motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash
health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and
push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists
UNIT IV
IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash
Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts
- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism
UNIT V
SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-
Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote
Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable
Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and
experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of
tourism experiences
REFERENCES BOOKS
Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling
Publishers Private Limited New Delhi
Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism
Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited
Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill
International
Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors
New Delhi
Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas
Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New
Delhi
TOURISM MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 526
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the basic concept and various components of management
UNIT I
MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-
Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of
management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)
Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management
UNIT II
PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-
Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of
planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by
objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance
and limitation of decision making
UNIT III
ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash
Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of
staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance
appraisal
UNIT IV
DIRECTING ndash
Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation
(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy
theory)
UNIT V
LEADERSHIP-
Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path
Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to
communication
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives
Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of
tourism as well as the impacts of tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc
Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New
Delhi
Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition
AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing
House New Delhi
Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition
Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations
To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism
industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-
Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing
Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and
Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash
Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New
Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING -
Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION -
Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity
Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in
promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level
which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described
REFERENCES BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson
Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition
Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent
learning
UNIT I
Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health
Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural
History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention
UNIT II
Definition and meaning of hospital ndash
Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing
concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of
Hospitals
UNIT III
Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector
Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in
delivering healthcare in India
UNIT IV
Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural
hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description
UNIT V
The reforms of Healthcare System-
The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare
reforms amp Future of Healthcare System
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding
the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the
management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and
organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services
REFERENCE BOOKS
The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991
Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd
Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers
HEALTH ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 529
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and
understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict
peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different
social actions
UNIT I
Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and
importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below
Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits
UNIT II
Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve
techniques and properties of indifference curve
UNIT III
Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash
Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of
Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of
Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of
demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash
Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue
UNIT IV
Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two
variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves
UNIT V
Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash
Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and
monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market
situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price
determination
COURSE OUTCOME
To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from
an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic
evaluation of a health intervention or program
REFERENCE BOOKS
Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR
Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP
Managerial Economics - Gupta GS
Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani
Business Economics - Sharma NK
Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar
Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi
Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL
HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 530
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions
related to records management in the healthcare environment
UNIT I
Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record
keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records
UNIT II
Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health
Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research
UNIT III
Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics
investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing
Pharmacy etc Audits)
UNIT IV
Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems
associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic
Related Groups (DRG)
UNIT V
Medical Registers ndash
Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various
departments amp common problems faced
COURSE OUTCOME
Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New
Delhi 1999
Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995
Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi
George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003
Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 531
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India
To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India
UNIT I
Rural Society in India
Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-
urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and
subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural
life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion
UNIT II
Rural Society
Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social
institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity
and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of
rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT-III
Village India
Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance
contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and
political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology
Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class
UNIT IV
Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics
Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid
growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope
and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -
Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT-V
Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times
Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social
processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India
Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy
Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms
REFERENCE BOOKS
Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi
Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay
PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House
SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication
House Delhi
ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 532
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To explain the nature of environmental studies
To introduce aspects of Natural resources
To introduce aspects of ecosystems
To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation
To introduce aspects of environmental pollution
To create awareness on social issues and environment
To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
UNIT I
Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for
public awareness
UNIT II
Ecosystems
Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and
decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and
Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the
following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic
Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)
UNIT III
Biodiversity and its Conservation
Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification
of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option
Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports
of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-
Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ
Conservation of biodiversity
UNIT IV
Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil
pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste
Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an
individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods
earthquake cyclone and landslides
20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT V
Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water
Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of
People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible
responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and
holocaust
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the nature of environmental studies
Classify renewable and non-renewable resources
Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues
Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation
Analyze aspects of environmental pollution
Describe aspects of social issues and environment
Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner
Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental
Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai
Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA
RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 533
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts
To familiarize Rural marketing strategy
To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems
To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing
To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages
UNIT I
Overview of Rural Marketing
Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing
and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction
Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class
UNIT II
Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for
rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT III
Rural Distribution Systems
Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche
markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of
Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT IV
ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network
(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction
Methodology Group Project work
UNIT V
Market support
Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role
play
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Market their products
Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products
Choose an appropriate distribution system
Apply ICT in rural marketing
Source the finance for rural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India
Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education
Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi
SEMESTER- VI
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allot
ted
Cred
its
Course
Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mark
s
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-601
Core
Course
E- Commerce
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-602 Core
Course
Customer
Relationship Management
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-603 Practical
Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva
Voce
100
50
17
-
-
50
20
- - 4 4
1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Grand Total
550
22
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one
paper presentation certificate in related discipline
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management
1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing
1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA607 Management of Change
1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management
1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management
1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service
1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business
1Y3BBA614 E- Governance
1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management
1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing
1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour
1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning
1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design
1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control
1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan
1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing
1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management
1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care
1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law
(Rural Management Group)
1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System
1Y3BBA632
Panchayati Raj
1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy
E- COMMERCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 601
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is
designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the
technical foundation for understanding information systems
UNIT I
Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting
online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a
business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-
commerce
UNIT II
Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet
(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A
systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing
vs in-house development of a website)
UNIT III
Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension
definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security
intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)
technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and
protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)
UNIT IV
E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards
e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online
banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house
automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments
UNIT V
Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting
online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of
utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online
services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and
entertainment
COURSE OUTCOME-
Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information
systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Management Information System Jawadekar
bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon
bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana
bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)
bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty
CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 602
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of
Customer Relationship Management in the organizations
UNIT- I
Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature
of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive
and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and
evaluating customer business plans
UNIT- II
Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer
database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing
customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively
Planning and making persuasive presentations
UNIT- III
Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality
Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality
managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and
Cross- sell
UNIT- IV
Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations
Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority
setting Target setting setting standards
UNIT- V
Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction
COURSE OUTCOME-
To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship
Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd
Ed Response Books Sage Publication
Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House
Pvt Ltd
Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books
Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management
V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008
Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management
South Western Cengage Learning
Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press
Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age
International
Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan
Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of
India Private Limted New Delhi 2011
S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private
Limted New Delhi 2008
ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 603
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to
work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn
the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final
semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by
the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a
student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their
analytical capabilities and experience
DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)
Title of the study (Cover Page)
Declaration
Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)
Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)
Acknowledgement
Table of Contents
Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used
1 INTRODUCTION
11 Introduction
12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research
12 Significance of the study
13 Scope of the study
14 Research Problem
15 Objective of the study
17 Hypothesis
18 Limitations of the study
2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students
to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they
learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After
the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is
evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report
should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to
provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also
able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business
operations and come up with the ways to tap the
Opportunities
3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
31 Introduction
32 Population of the study
33 Sampling Design
331 Sampling Technique
332 Sampling Method
333 Sample Size
34 Research Instrument
35 Sources of data
351 Primary Data
352 Secondary Data
4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION
5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION
Bibliography
COURSE OUTCOME-
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able
to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and
come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities
MARKETING GROUP
PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 604
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the
context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product
manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions
UNIT- I
Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused
organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management
Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-
cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product
Development
UNIT- II
Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods
of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in
international Market
UNIT- III
Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity
concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand
Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image
UNIT- IV
Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system
measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement
Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market
segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining
and establishing brand values
UNIT- V
Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand
extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time
Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand
Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation
COURSE OUTCOME
The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of
Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for
Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning
implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer
Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi
Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi
Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi
Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education
New Delhi
Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi
Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata
McGraw Hill New Delhi
Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi
STRATEGIC MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 605
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and
implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and
managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver
superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation
through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills
UNIT- I
Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash
Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of
Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying
Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting
Marketing Objectives
UNIT-II
Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching
Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy
Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle
Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies
UNIT-III
Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp
Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models
UNIT- IV
Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives
Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy
Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing
UNIT- V
Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at
different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by
executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and
interdisciplinary nature
REFERENCE BOOKS
Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt
D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin
OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage
Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill
Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp
Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson
Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann
Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India
George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press
J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and
Programs McGraw-Hill Companies
Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub
Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon
P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave
E-MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 606
COURSE OBJECTIVE
It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance
enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns
UNIT- I
Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics
Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan
Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing
UNIT- II
Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in
India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within
communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing
UNIT- III
Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet
as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet
User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-
branding
UNIT- IV
Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-
marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools
Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent
Trends in e-customer service
UNIT- V
Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web
Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing
campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising
Course Outcome
Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics
online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its
implication on marketing strategy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a
networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill
Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall
Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning
Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books
Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial
Times
HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 607
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be
Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students
Understand the importance of managing change
UNIT- I
Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-
Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of
human resource strategies in implementing Change
UNIT-II
Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR
implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation
and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions
UNIT-III
HR Processes amp Change
Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned
change
Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change
UNIT- IV
Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in
employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management
of change implications of downsizing
UNIT- V
Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to
promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and
feedback
Course Outcome
Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more
effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change
process
REFERENCE BOOKS
A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human
Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education
Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill
Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage
South Asia Edition
K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation
Response Books
VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books
CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 608
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical
relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand
anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions
to ensure the organizational and individual success
UNIT-I
Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of
organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business
environment
UNIT-II
Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars
Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations
UNIT- III
Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock
Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system
(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)
UNIT- IV
Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and
repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally
appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural
negotiation and conflicts management
UNIT- V
Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual
countries Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development
of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning
Private Limited
G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill
Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley
Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing
Co
Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell
Business
Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times
McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp
Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation
Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson
Education India
GROUP DYNAMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 609
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group
dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group
effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of
resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding
UNIT-I
Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group
dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B
UNIT-II
Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group
Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash
Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress
UNIT-III
Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group
decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash
conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict
UNIT- IV
Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De
individuation theory
UNIT- V
Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources
of Change in groups
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups
REFERENCE BOOKS
Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley
Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass
Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co
Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE
Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and
application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax
along with basic concepts of VAT
UNIT-I
Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of
Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment
of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-II
Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature
and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax
planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business
UNIT-III
Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net
Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and
Penalties (Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-IV
Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for
service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of
Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)
UNIT- V
VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview
of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT
Law)
COURSE OUTCOME
Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields
REFERENCE BOOKS
Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications
Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub
Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House
T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India
BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson
S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann
R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _
INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 611
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important
components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO
Analysis etc
UNIT-I
INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian
Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role
in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)
UNIT-II
FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different
Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players
Different types of Instruments
UNIT-III
CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI
Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank
UNIT- IV
COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp
Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A
REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA
UNIT- V
NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies
Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture
Capital Funds
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment
Banking companies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication
Financial Services MY Khan TMH
Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication
S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran
ML Seth
FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 612
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and
prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of
uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding
of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role
of internal audit assessments
UNIT I
Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview
UNIT II
Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax
fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and
inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds
UNIT III
Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion
investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports
UNIT IV
Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using
Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)
UNIT V Case Study
1 Two Indian
2 Two international cases
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread
nature of fraud and its economic impact
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation
Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination
Cengage Learning
IT GROUP
INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 613
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security
managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues
in the information assurance field
UNIT I
Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian
Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its
application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law
Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour
Laws E-Media and Print Media
UNIT II
E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security
Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature
UNIT III
Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil
Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-
detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of
Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA
UNIT IV
IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal
issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base
UNIT V
Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of
Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules
COURSE OUTCOME-
Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House
Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co
John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River
Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher
Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University
E-GOVERNANCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 614
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information
Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an
awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the
issues concerning the Cyber security
UNIT I
Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National
E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status
UNIT II
E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process
Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges
UNIT III
E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-
Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics
UNIT IV
Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic
data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber
audit implications for e-governance
Unit V
Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and
construction of a joining table
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill
Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing
Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in
India ICFAI Press Hyderabad
B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill
H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications
V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd
IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 615
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization
UNIT I
IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT
Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo
Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for
IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library
UNIT II
Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service
Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support
Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change
Management Release Management
UNIT III
Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve
Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine
Recovery Data Retention
UNIT IV
Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security
Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection
UNIT V
IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and
Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and
Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of
Internet on Technical Support
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology
REFERENCE BOOKS
Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce
(OGC) TSO UK
Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos
Management Tata McGraw Hill
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 616
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques
and their management
UNIT I
Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations
of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and
distribution
UNIT II
Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and
factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging
of foods
UNIT III
Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food
industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO
etc
UNIT IV
Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products
cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking
confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of
fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH
Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie
Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing
Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH
MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 617
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing
concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs
UNIT I
Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution
channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-
farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing
UNIT II
Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds
Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of
NSC and State Seed Corporation
UNIT III
Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers
Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash
marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer
marketing
UNIT IV
Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash
marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of
electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity
UNIT V
Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm
machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines
implementsEquipmentlsquos
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with
various functional areas of agribusiness
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp
IBH
Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management
Kalyani
Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ
House
FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 618
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis
of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions
UNIT I
Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management
decisions farm management problems
UNIT II
Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle
principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc
UNIT III
Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm
records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement
farm efficiency measures
UNIT IV
Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc
UNIT V
Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to
counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks
and uncertainty
COURSE OUTCOME
Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses
REFERENCE BOOKS
Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall
Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ
Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ
Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ
RETAIL GROUP
BUYER BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA 619
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer
decisions making
UNIT-I
A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic
Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market
Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making
UNIT-II
Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles
of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer
Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and
Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product
Relationship
UNIT-III
Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to
information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-
Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors
Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications
UNIT-IV
Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing
Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-
Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions
Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy
UNIT-V
Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics
lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they
experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and
impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour
COURSE OUTCOME
Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the
choices consumers make
REFERENCE BOOKS
JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata
Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006
Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context
Excel Books NewDelhi-2001
Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous
DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing
Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi
Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining
Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005
Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000
RETAIL PLANNING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 620
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational
decision-making processes in the organized retail
UNIT I
Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail
Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-
Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative
methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management
UNIT II
Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics
Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp
non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion
designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting
Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-
Management of Obsolete goods
UNIT III
Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer
psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical
Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices
UNIT IV
Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-
Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp
Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective
Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer
Rights- Consumer Protection Acts
UNIT V
Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing
Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-
Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels
REFERENCE BOOKS
Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies
Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies
Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson
Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund
amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson
Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice
Hall of India New Delhi
Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies
Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best
People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd
RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 621
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the
value it creates
UNIT I
Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When
How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience
Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency
UNIT II
Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated
Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-
Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-
UNIT III
Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on
Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-
Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display
Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-
UNIT IV
Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium
Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and
Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-
Trade Dealing
UNIT V
Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-
Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating
Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing
to act in ways that increase loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -
Prentice-Hall
Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology
Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales
Promotion Techniques
Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate
Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page
Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books
George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing
Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill
PRODUCTION GROUP
PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL
Course Code 1Y3BBA 622
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a
basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of
facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality
control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an
understanding of the concept of aggregate planning
UNIT- I
Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors
Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-
requisites of PPC
UNIT- II
Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in
Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining
Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control
Models)
UNIT- III
Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection
Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master
production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of
software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II
UNIT- IV
Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n
job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling
Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)
UNIT- V
Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control
function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications
bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi
Deep and Deep Publications
PROCESS REENGINEERING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 623
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of
business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering
projects
UNIT- I
Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp
pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR
UNIT- II
Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering
project organizing for process reengineering
UNIT- III
Process analysis and design
a) Process analysis
(b) Process design
UNIT- IV
Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition
tracking and measuring process performance
UNIT- V
Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology
Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact
measurement
COURSE OUTCOME
To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the
considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-
engineering project
REFERENCE BOOKS
Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata
McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater
Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester
John Wiley amp Sons
WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn
the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time
standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering
to design of work systems
UNIT- I
Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos
productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity
Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time
Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities
Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was
developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph
UNIT- II
Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting
up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion
Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand
Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and
Design of Tools amp Equipment
UNIT- III
Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard
from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and
Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work
Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling
UNIT- IV
Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage
Incentive Plans
The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for
Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action
UNIT-V
Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion
Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System
Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts
Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional
including understanding the need for quality
REFERENCE BOOKS
iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill
ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation
Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp
Sons
Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall
Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall
Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press
Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall
Mall East and London
Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN
Course Code 1Y3BBA 625
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in
it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative
impacts of tourism development
UNIT I
Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism
Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of
Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in
Tourism Development
UNIT II
Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning
system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos
Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-
Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in
learning system
UNIT III
Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable
development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist
Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash
The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash
Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities
UNIT IV
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage
of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment
UNIT IV
Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the
Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National
Policy on Ecology and Environment
COURSE OUTCOME
To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global
perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international
tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for
sustainable tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash
Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications
Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers
Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William
Heinemann Ltd
Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices
London Pitman Publishing
Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York
Kendall Hunt Publishing Company
Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan
Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman
Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford
University Press
New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable
Development Approach VNR and New York
TOURISM MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 626
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism
and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing
that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products
before the stakeholders of tourism industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing
Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and
Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market
Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing
Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for
different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing
Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales
promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital
communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future
It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are
needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be
a part of this growth
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar
Thomson Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd
edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of
Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry
UNIT I
HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of
Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads
ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and
marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents
UNIT II
RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief
History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway
Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway
station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains
express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world
heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes
UNIT III
AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth
Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled
Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature
Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players
Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and
performance marketing strategies of Air India
UNIT IV
WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover
crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going
traffic) ndash National waterways
UNIT V
CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing
stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and
Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation
COURSE OUTCOME
Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of
the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management
REFERENCE BOOKS
RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 628
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of
its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing
knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital
Management
UNIT I
Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its
impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need
principles purpose
UNIT II
Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and
their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply
department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health
and patient safety
UNIT III
Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of
biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules
standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging
transportation amp storage
UNIT IV
Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier
methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal
decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of
wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan
UNIT V
Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party
insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash
meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural
disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague
typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics
COURSE OUTCOME
To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost
containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges
arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs
and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its
various components
REFERENCE BOOKS
Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication
First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn
Park k - Preventive and social medicine
Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot
MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 629
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted
advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public
relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any
potential crisis that may arise
UNIT I
Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches
to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of
marketing functions of marketing
UNIT II
Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment
Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market
segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash
positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing
UNIT III
Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior
(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying
decision process
UNIT IV
Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp
deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product
development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling
UNIT V
Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing
policies and strategies
Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management
decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels
COURSE OUTCOME
Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an
integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare
professionals and the public
REFERENCE BOOKS
Philip Kotler - marketing management
Wiliam jStanton - marketing management
Sherleker S A - marketing management
J C Gandhi - marketing management
Davar - modern marketing management
Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub
P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research
Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research
HOSPITALS RELATED LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 630
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of
common-law development
UNIT ndash I
Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties
sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance
act trust act societies registration act
UNIT ndashII
Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of
human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act
1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971
mental health act patient consent
UNIT ndash III
Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948
narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods
act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration
UNIT ndash IV
Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act
1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916
maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing
order) act trade union act industrial disputes act
UNIT ndashV
Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in
hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical
negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical
establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal
pronouncements rulings and regulations
REFERENCE BOOKS
Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer
Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law
Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 631
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India
To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural
Production system in India
To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India
To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development
UNIT -1
Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions
ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology
Case analysis and discussion
UNIT II
Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash
Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture
UNIT III
Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-
Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India
UNIT IV
Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of
holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus
land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas
UNIT V
Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash
Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and
schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM
COURSE OUTCOMES
Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management
Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India
Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development
REFERENCE BOOKS
Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution
Can We Make London Department for International Development
Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House
PANCHAYATI RAJ
Course Code 1Y3BBA632
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration
To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites
To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance
To provide insights on Rural Administration
To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes
UNIT I
Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction
Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges
Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration
(Official and non-official) and report submission
UNIT III
Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission
UNIT IV
Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and
Block- Panchayat relationship
Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play
UNIT V
Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government
Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan
Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
COURSE OUTCOMES
Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village
Development interventions
Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its
power Structure
Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and
Plans
Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes
32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959
Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise
Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi
Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New
Delhi
RURAL ECONOMY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 633
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy
To help students understand their role in rural economic development
To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources
To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation
To create awareness on rural economic development
UNIT I
Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-
Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries
(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in
agriculture individual production other production services
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-
Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash
Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land
Reforms
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
UNIT III
Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation
programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs
UNIT IV
Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work
UNIT V
Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing
ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for
the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy
Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village
Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues
Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation
Facilities
Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi
Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi
Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic
Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New
Delhi
INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER
Mid Semester Examination (MSE)
There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5
descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered
End Semester Examination (ESE)
There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks
each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of
10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered
Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations
The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment
Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be
applicable
(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )
Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type
End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size
BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational
and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business
UNIT I
Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro
environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis
for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business
UNIT II
Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic
systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years
plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent
economic initiatives NitiAyog
UNIT III
Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment
problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance
of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural
Development Problems of Growth
UNIT IV
Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment
Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA
and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act
UNIT V
International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational
Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic
Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-
GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India
COURSE OUTCOME
Outline how an entity operates in a business environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996
Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi
Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan
Chand Delhi
Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA105
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to
articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate
effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the
consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and
quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods
UNIT-I
Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of
Management Functions of the Manager
UNIT- II
Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of
Planning
Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and
type of Policies
Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems
involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques
UNIT- III
Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of
Units and committees
Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship
UNIT- IV
Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training
Directing Nature and purpose and directing
UNIT- V
Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control
process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies
COURSE OUTCOME-
Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques
managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of
managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify
and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own
position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied
audiences
Reference Books
bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher
bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson
Education
bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt
Ltd 4th Ed
bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill
Publications
SEMESTER II
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distributio
n
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor
Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distribu
tion Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Ma
x
Ma
rks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme
nt
Compulsory
Course
English
communication
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA202 Core Course
Management concept amp
Principle
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA203 Core
Course
Environmental
Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA204 Core
Course
Monetary
Economics and
Indian Banking
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA205 Core
Course
Business
Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA205 Business
Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhanceme
nt
Skill Enhancement
Elective
Course-I
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand
Total 600 21 5 - 24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
ENGLISH COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA201
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English
language teaching and content writing sectors
UNIT I
Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning
Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening
UNIT II
Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive
writing expansion of an idea
UNIT III
Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing
(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume
writing covering letter
UNIT IV
Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases
UNIT V
Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb
agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions
(Advanced)
COURSE OUTCOME
To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill
Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul
Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan
Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das
Orient Blackswan
Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press
Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication
MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 202
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and
process of effective controlling in the organization
UNIT I
Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science
Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)
UNIT II
School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and
Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)
Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management
UNIT III
Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing
Staffing Directing and Coordinating
UNIT IV
Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command
Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control
UNIT V
Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure
determination Forms- formal amp informal organization
Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations
COURSE OUTCOME
Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial
functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management
REFERENCE BOOKS
LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management
VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management
James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB
Fred Luthans- OB
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 203
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links
between human and natural systems
UNIT I
Introduction to environmental studies
Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability
and sustainable development
UNIT II
Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an
ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following
ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds
streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)
Unit III
Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to
mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and
over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international
ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate
energy sources growing energy needs case studies
UNIT IV
Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem
diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots
Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and
Informational value
UNIT V
Environmental Pollution
Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution
Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and
Industrial waste Pollution case studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social
and environmental processes
REFERENCE BOOKS
California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London
Routledge
Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security
Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press
Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of
ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006
Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37
McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books
McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the
Twentieth Century
Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders
Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic
Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt
Ltd
Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons
Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi
1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP
Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation
S Chand Publishing New Delhi
MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING
Course Code 1Y3BBA204
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using
statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills
within the contest of subject matter of economics
UNIT I
Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of
Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value
of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income
theory of Money
UNIT II
Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people
Money Market
UNIT III
Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial
Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks
UNIT IV
Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control
methods and Tools of Monetary Policy
UNIT V
RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative
Banks and Rural Banks
COURSE OUTCOME
Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and
mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of
economics
REFERENCE BOOKS
MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi
LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi
Crowther- An Out Line of Money
Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant
KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ
BUSINESS COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA205
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative
scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication
UNIT I
Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports
OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)
UNIT II
Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other
words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis
UNIT III
Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers
Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers
UNIT IV
Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a
Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication
Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)
UNIT V
Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written
Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp
minutes
COURSE OUTCOME
To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical
proficiency in the development of exposition and argument
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wren amp Martin
K Madhukar- Business Communication
VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication
Asha Laul- Business Communication
Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH
SEMESTER III
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotte
d
Credit
s
Course Code Course
Type
Course
Title
Total
Mark
s
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subjec
t wise
Distrib
ution
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA301
Ability
Enhancement
IT Tool for Business
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA302
Core Course
Introduction to Marketing
Management
100 50 17 20 7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA303 Core
Course
Business
Law
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA304 Core
Course
Business
statistics for
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA305
Core
Course
Retail
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA304 Practical
Business
statistics for Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill
Enhancemen
t Elective Course-II
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand Total 600 24
IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 301
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software
components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data
base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT
UNIT-I
Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and
Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World
Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept
UNIT-II
Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different
computer generation
UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and
Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming
Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-
principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart
examples
UNIT-IV
Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation
applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)
Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information
System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems
Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human
Resources Management Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations
Understand the hardware and software components of the computer
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford
2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication
3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication
4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill
INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 302
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply
these to a new or existing business
UNIT I
Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept
amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro
environment
UNIT II
Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of
Product Line amp Product- mix
UNIT III
Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing
decisions Overview of pricing process
UNIT IV
Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product
Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage
UNIT V
Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to
marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct
selling
COURSE OUTCOME
To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct
an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an
appropriate format
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Philip Kotler
2 TN Chabra
3 TK Panda
4 SH Kazmi
5 Arun Kumar
BUSINESS LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 303
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal
environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with
knowledge of legal principles
UNIT-I
Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration
capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts
Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp
Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency
UNIT-II
Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp
Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales
UNIT-III
Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -
Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a
negotiable instrument
UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of
non-registration Dissolution of a firm
UNIT-V
Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of
Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013
COURSE OBJECTIVE
On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to
individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context
Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 ND Kapoor
2 Tulsian
3 MC Kuchhal
4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business
BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 304
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management
UNIT I
Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance
Scope and Limitation of Statistic
UNIT II
Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar
Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive
UNIT III
Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic
Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures
of dispersion
UNIT IV
Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and
Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index
number CPI WPI IIP
UNIT V
Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank
Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series
COURSE OUTCOME
Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically
discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons
2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication
3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication
RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in
India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone
Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT
FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan
Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process
UNIT II
FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail
Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors
Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing
MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer
Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design
and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication
UNIT III
STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty
Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors
UNIT IV
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management
IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service
Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM
Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying
UNIT V
MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at
Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems
at Retail Centers
Course Outcome-
Reference Books
bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education
bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A
Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education
The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge
about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various
aspects of retail operations
After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with
the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the
entire retail operations
SEMESTER IV
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code Course
Type Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subject
wise
Distributio
n
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mark
s
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-401
Ability
Enhanceme
nt
Introduction to
soft skill amp
Team Building
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA-402 Core Course
Introduction to
financial
management
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-403 Core Course
Advertising
and Sales
Promotion
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-404 Core Course
Management
of Human resource
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of
Business
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group
Term End
Practical
Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-404 Practical
Management
of Human
resource
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-405 Practical
Macro
Economics of Business
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
Grand Total 550 22
INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 401
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate
students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners
by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are
learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for
their own learning
UNIT ndash I
General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of
Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences
Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making
Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of
communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of
Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation
UNIT ndash II
Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing
skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice
modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements
General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral
skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive
Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style
UNIT ndash III
Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format
and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in
Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active
Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD
UNIT ndash IV
Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction
Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview
Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing
Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of
Conversation
UNIT ndash V
Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional
Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers
COURSE OUTCOME
To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills
and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin
bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar
INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 402
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital
decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and
raising long-term finance
UNIT I
Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives
Role of finance manager
UNIT II
Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of
investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return
Comparison between NPV amp IRR
UNIT III
Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of
Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning
capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure
UNIT IV
The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage
Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating
Leverage
UNIT V
Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital
estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of
inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order
Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy
COURSE OUTCOME
Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial
manager in the current competitive business scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 IM Pandey
2 P Chandra
3 SP Gupta
4 MY Khan
ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 403
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may
review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos
homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions
UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising
budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for
Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising
UNIT II
Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy
Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role
types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council
of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)
UNIT III
Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring
awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of
design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet
advertising and evaluation of advertising
UNIT IV
Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors
influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option
Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of
consumer schemes and other methods of promotion
UNIT V
Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs
Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales
personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion
COURSE OUTCOME
Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how
these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its
relation to todaylsquos marketplace
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall
Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi
Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi
Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications
MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 404
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource
management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational
setting
UNIT-I
Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with
special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in
strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management
UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge
workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)
Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)
UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of
human resource department and the role of human resource manager
UNITndashIV
Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification
rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation
UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection
(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction
COURSE OUTCOME
To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training
Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical
Behaviour
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi
Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New
Delhi
Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York
HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications
A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications
MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the
important indicators of the economy and their significance
UNIT I
Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of
Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income
Personal and Personal disposable income
UNIT II
Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income
Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and
Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator
Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate
demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy
UNIT III
Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate
demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government
expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary
and fiscal policy
UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary
policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production
Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation
monetary measures fiscal measures
UNIT V
Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and
corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in
open economy
COURSE OUTCOME
To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the
role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson
2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill
3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers
4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson
SEMESTER V
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment
Internal Assessment Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-501
Ability Enhancement
Public Relation amp Corporate Image
50
25
8
10
4
15
6
2
-
-
2
1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and
small Business
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-503
Core Course Principle of
Economics
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-502
Practical Entrepreneurship and
small Business
50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics
50
25 08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Skill Course
Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill Enhancement
Elective Course-III
50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2
Grand Total
600
24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication
1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management
1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India
1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation
1Y3BBA509 Organization Development
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision
1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management
1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA513 Database Management System
1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service
1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy
1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management
1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management
1Y3BBA520 Stores Management
1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA522 Technology Management
1Y3BBA523 Productivity
1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept
1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management
1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System
1Y3BBA529 Health Economics
1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management
(Rural Management Group )
1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity
1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment
1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management
SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES
Non-Technical
Elective No Department Faculty Name
Faculty of Information Technology
I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)
II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)
IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)
V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Management
I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)
II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)
III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development
Faculty of Commerce
I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)
II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Humanities
I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)
II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)
III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Science
I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)
II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)
III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)
IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)
V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Education
I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)
II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)
PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA501
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts
of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling
and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization
UNIT- I
Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash
Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy
Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors
ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public
Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations
UNIT- II
Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service
Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social
Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy
for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation
Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event
Management
UNIT- III
Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash
Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public
Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of
Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control
UNIT IV
Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies
Components of an Individual Image
Advertising and Corporate Image
Public Relations of an Institutions
UNIT V
The Grapevine and Rumours
Stereotype
Propaganda
Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations
applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different
entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling
REFERENCE BOOKS
Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House
Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House
Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University
Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill
This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning
ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-
The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding
processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to
those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic
environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide
evidence which informs those debates
UNIT I
Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of
Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its
environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship
UNIT II
Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship
development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the
Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making
UNIT III
Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that
enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in
Social context Start Up
UNIT IV
Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional
source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital
UNIT V
Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication
2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd
3 Vasant Desai
4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH
PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 503
COURSE OBJECTIVES-
To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production
UNIT- I
Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits
UNIT-II
Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus
movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts
of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications
of demand and supply price rationing price floors
Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price
elasticity cross and income elasticity
UNIT-III
Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility
Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp
Producer surplus
UNIT-IV
Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant
and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue
and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale
UNIT-V
Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of
the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run
equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment
concept
COURSE OUTCOME-
To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011
bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th
edition
2007
bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA
bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press
Oxford
bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore
MARKETING GROUP
INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so
that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to
enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications
UNIT-I
Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC
in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising
appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion
relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship
between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods
Interactive Internet Marketing
UNIT-II
Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach
establishing and allocating promotional budget
UNIT-III
IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different
forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning
creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design
considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client
Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork
UNIT-IV
Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering
key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and
media research
Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration
client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc
UNIT-V
Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing
Communications
COURSE OUTCOME-
To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches
and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to
communicating to target audiences
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc
Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard
D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois
Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing
House
Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and
Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication
Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH
Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing
Communications Pearson Education Limited
Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc
Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House
Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning
Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc
Homewood Illinois
Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic
Approach Cengage Learning
Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India
Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education
SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT
Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE
It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and
distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and
distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners
UNIT-I
Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies
Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling
objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring
Procedure Socialization
UNIT-II
Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program
Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation
Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial
Evaluation of Contest
UNIT-III
Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel
Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales
Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process
UNIT-IV
Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key
tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market
Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation
UNIT-V
Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners
Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict
Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International
Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales
COURSE OUTCOME
Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the
sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans
participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables
REFERENCE BOOKS
Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres
Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books
Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI
L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills
Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets
Greenwood Publishing Group
Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub
ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH
Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing
consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing
research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students
within a course project
UNIT-I
Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing
Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research
Process Marketing Research Designs
UNIT-II
The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques
Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of
Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic
Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical
Analysis Tools
UNIT-III
Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)
ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor
Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental
Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores
Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-
hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number
UNIT-IV
Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product
Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant
Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification
Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing
Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and
their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity
UNIT-V
Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning
in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report
and class presentation of the same
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from
analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor
analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis
REFERENCE BOOKS
Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi
William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi
Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi
Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill
Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research
Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey
Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning
Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp
Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced
in the class
HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP
LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA
Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of
Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity
objectivity and understandings
UNIT-I
The Factories Act 1948
The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923
The Employees State Insurance Act 1948
UNIT-II
The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952
The Payment of gratuity Act 1972
UNIT-III
The Maternity Benefit Act 1961
The Minimum Wages act 1948
UNIT-IV
The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946
The Payment of Bonus Act 1965
UNIT-V
The Apprentices Act 1969
The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959
COURSE OUTCOME ndash
To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour
Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the
organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to
follow the Laws applicable to the establishment
REFERENCE BOOKS
S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications
S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi
Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot
V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House
N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons
INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE
In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our
country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of
Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be
acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the
concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India
UNIT-I
Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors
affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial
relation programme
Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact
of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes
lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry
UNIT-II
Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal
Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective
bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective
collective bargaining collective bargaining in India
UNIT-III
Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education
scheme in India- objectives functions and problems
Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation
schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India
UNIT-IV
Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India
major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions
registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union
UNIT-V
Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery
Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation
submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court
industrial tribunals
Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power
of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute
COURSE OUTCOME
Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective
bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute
resolution
REFERENCE BOOKS
Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts
IIPM Personnel Management in India
Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business
Publication Ltd
Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India
Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India
Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication
Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co
Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law
ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational
culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the
human values in individuals
UNIT-I
Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational
Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development
Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining
and survey research amp feedback methodology
UNIT-II
Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in
organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief
systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development
UNIT-III
Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component
interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief
of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action
UNIT-IV
OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team
building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process
interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions
important for successful OD efforts
UNIT ndash V
HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational
implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional
Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have
improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi
Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York
McGrawhill
Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in
addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a
good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company
UNIT-I
Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm
Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-
Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of
Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering
UNIT-II
Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the
analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount
of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a
Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and
Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis
UNIT-III
Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues
and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements
medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings
Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project
finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing
UNIT-IV
Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of
financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing
Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect
cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization
UNIT-V
Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value
Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic
indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added
Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total
Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)
COURSE OUTCOME
Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and
corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts
REFERENCE BOOKS
Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill
Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons
INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial
environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a
multinational corporation
UNIT-I
Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation
functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial
management International monetary system
UNIT-II
Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories
ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible
exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer
Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options
Currency swaps and interest rate swaps
UNIT-III
Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction
transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction
exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The
national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International
capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)
UNIT-IV
International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic
considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)
Financial risk and cost of capital
Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of
capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-
20 subsidiaries and tax havens
UNIT-V
International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their
comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets
Recent developments in the Euro bond market
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations
and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley
PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall
Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall
Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis
Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co
Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall
Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers
Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath
FINANCIAL INCLUSION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion
such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss
the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to
promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models
UNIT-I
Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting
Access to Financial Services
Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive
Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators
UNIT-II
Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey
Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional
Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card
UNIT-III
Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India
Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations
Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor
UNIT-IV
SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of
microfinance evolved in India
Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial
Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for
Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for
Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People
UNIT-V
Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises
Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion
and Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account
initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage
Publication
Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House
Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech
Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications
Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications
Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing
Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI
Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI
Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag
Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion
Academic Foundation
IT GROUP
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to
manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the
hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment
UNIT-I
The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures
File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base
Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial
Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness
UNIT-II
Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface
with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database
Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design
UNIT-III
Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database
Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database
Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases
UNIT-IV
DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance
Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues
UNIT-V
Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the
field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective
faculty during the coverage of syllabus
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic
concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational
algebra and SQL
REFERENCE BOOKS
Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs
Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan
Press
McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co
MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It
aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing
implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services
UNIT-I
The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development
Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The
Enabling Environment for ITES
UNIT-II
Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled
Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of
Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services
UNIT-III
Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support
Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions
UNIT-IV
International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting
Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in
facilitating Trade in ITESTITES
UNIT-V
Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of
Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of
Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace
Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations
and integrate the learning in handling these complexities
REFERENCE BOOKS
Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat
E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information
technology with various aspects of Software Project Management
UNIT-I
Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision
and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM
Framework
UNIT-II
Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning
Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan
Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration
and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning
UNIT-III
Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an
Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques
Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule
Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools
UNIT-IV
Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance
Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior
Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review
UNIT-V
Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks
Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk
COURSE OUTCOME
Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business
context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business
scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson
Education Ltd
P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp
Tsinghua University Press
R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance
Management Concepts Pub
Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group
B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science
Press
A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications
G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on
understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business
UNIT I
Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm
production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country
UNIT II
Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms
and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business
sector
UNIT III
Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations
relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries
UNIT IV
Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment
and policy
UNIT V
Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies
COURSE OUTCOME
Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper
and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain
REFERENCE BOOKS
Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons
Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ
Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 517
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies
strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms
UNIT I
Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market
structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp
significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of
marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour
UNIT II
Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash
significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product
product life cycle
UNIT III
Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies
and pricing methods
UNIT IV
Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and
standardization
UNIT V
Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural
products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in
agribusiness
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better
understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for
agricultural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH
Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall
Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control
Pearson Edu
Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu
Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India
FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 518
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food
marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen
and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural
political and economic forces over time
UNIT I
Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade
Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of
Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic
factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer
UNIT II
Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling
food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing
in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions
across the chain in food retail food service marketing
UNIT III
4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing
Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system
Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement
Strategies for food retailers
UNIT IV
Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling
Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food
Products
UNIT V
Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training
Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in
retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze
Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing
REFERENCE BOOKS
Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of
India
Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu
Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill
RETAIL GROUP
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in
the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it
UNIT- I
Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management
Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain
networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain
Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network
UNIT- II
Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer
service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs
multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier
Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants
UNIT- III
Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory
models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system
UNIT- IV
COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip
Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION
TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain
Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management
UNIT- V
Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a
Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance
measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics
quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics
COURSE OUTCOME
After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain
which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House
bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers
bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg
bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi
bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan
STORES MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 520
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different
terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned
areas
UNIT- I
Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the
location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design
UNIT- II
Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual
Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors
UNIT- III
Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at
Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores
Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments
UNIT- IV
Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies
Quick Response System
UNIT- V
Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact
on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space
Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization
COURSE OUTCOME
The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern
and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management
bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing
bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach
bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing
bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing
RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 521
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail
Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail
business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management
UNIT I
Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail
equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail
market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-
Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India
UNIT II
Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development
The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and
Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-
Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on
ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response
marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks
The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management
UNIT III
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM
Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch
points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services
Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM
Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding
Common Barriers
UNIT IV
Services Management
Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the
service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-
Supply relationships vehicle routing
UNIT V
Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising
Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping
the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand
management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-
2nd edition 2006
MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational
edititionUS1798
Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education
New Delhi 2003
JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy
Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi
Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy
Pearson Education New Delhi 2004
KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005
Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007
Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House
Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution
rosenbloom and Education Foundation US
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT
TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 522
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
UNIT- I
Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology
Change Implication
UNIT- II
Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying
UNIT- III
Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology
Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management
UNIT- IV
Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology
Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages
UNIT- V
Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise
Level
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to
manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009
bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009
bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson
PRODUCTIVITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 523
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
UNIT- I
Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and
external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work
Contents and Ineffective Time
UNIT- II
Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram
String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart
UNIT- III
Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart
UNIT- IV
Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be
Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement
UNIT- V
Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International
Labour Office Geneva
bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed
bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill
bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India
QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO
Course Code 1Y3BBA 524
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify
the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and
measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current
issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans
UNIT- I
Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives
UNIT- II
Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect
concept
UNIT- III
Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality
UNIT- IV
Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various
control Charts
UNIT- V
Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification
COURSE OUTCOME-
Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to
explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key
aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for
controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp
communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze
the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise
and evaluate quality implementation plans
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay
bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd
bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas
bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd
bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition
7th
Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012
bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM CONCEPTS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 525
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism
To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash
Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp
Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and
development of Tourism through the ages
UNIT II
COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash
Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism
inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious
Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions
incentives sports and adventure tourism
UNIT III
TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash
Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of
motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash
health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and
push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists
UNIT IV
IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash
Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts
- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism
UNIT V
SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-
Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote
Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable
Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and
experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of
tourism experiences
REFERENCES BOOKS
Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling
Publishers Private Limited New Delhi
Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism
Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited
Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill
International
Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors
New Delhi
Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas
Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New
Delhi
TOURISM MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 526
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the basic concept and various components of management
UNIT I
MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-
Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of
management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)
Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management
UNIT II
PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-
Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of
planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by
objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance
and limitation of decision making
UNIT III
ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash
Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of
staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance
appraisal
UNIT IV
DIRECTING ndash
Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation
(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy
theory)
UNIT V
LEADERSHIP-
Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path
Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to
communication
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives
Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of
tourism as well as the impacts of tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc
Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New
Delhi
Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition
AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing
House New Delhi
Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition
Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations
To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism
industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-
Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing
Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and
Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash
Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New
Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING -
Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION -
Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity
Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in
promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level
which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described
REFERENCES BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson
Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition
Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent
learning
UNIT I
Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health
Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural
History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention
UNIT II
Definition and meaning of hospital ndash
Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing
concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of
Hospitals
UNIT III
Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector
Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in
delivering healthcare in India
UNIT IV
Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural
hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description
UNIT V
The reforms of Healthcare System-
The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare
reforms amp Future of Healthcare System
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding
the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the
management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and
organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services
REFERENCE BOOKS
The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991
Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd
Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers
HEALTH ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 529
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and
understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict
peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different
social actions
UNIT I
Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and
importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below
Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits
UNIT II
Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve
techniques and properties of indifference curve
UNIT III
Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash
Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of
Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of
Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of
demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash
Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue
UNIT IV
Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two
variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves
UNIT V
Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash
Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and
monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market
situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price
determination
COURSE OUTCOME
To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from
an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic
evaluation of a health intervention or program
REFERENCE BOOKS
Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR
Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP
Managerial Economics - Gupta GS
Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani
Business Economics - Sharma NK
Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar
Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi
Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL
HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 530
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions
related to records management in the healthcare environment
UNIT I
Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record
keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records
UNIT II
Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health
Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research
UNIT III
Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics
investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing
Pharmacy etc Audits)
UNIT IV
Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems
associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic
Related Groups (DRG)
UNIT V
Medical Registers ndash
Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various
departments amp common problems faced
COURSE OUTCOME
Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New
Delhi 1999
Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995
Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi
George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003
Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 531
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India
To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India
UNIT I
Rural Society in India
Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-
urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and
subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural
life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion
UNIT II
Rural Society
Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social
institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity
and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of
rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT-III
Village India
Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance
contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and
political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology
Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class
UNIT IV
Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics
Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid
growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope
and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -
Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT-V
Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times
Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social
processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India
Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy
Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms
REFERENCE BOOKS
Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi
Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay
PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House
SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication
House Delhi
ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 532
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To explain the nature of environmental studies
To introduce aspects of Natural resources
To introduce aspects of ecosystems
To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation
To introduce aspects of environmental pollution
To create awareness on social issues and environment
To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
UNIT I
Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for
public awareness
UNIT II
Ecosystems
Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and
decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and
Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the
following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic
Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)
UNIT III
Biodiversity and its Conservation
Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification
of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option
Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports
of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-
Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ
Conservation of biodiversity
UNIT IV
Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil
pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste
Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an
individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods
earthquake cyclone and landslides
20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT V
Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water
Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of
People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible
responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and
holocaust
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the nature of environmental studies
Classify renewable and non-renewable resources
Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues
Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation
Analyze aspects of environmental pollution
Describe aspects of social issues and environment
Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner
Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental
Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai
Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA
RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 533
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts
To familiarize Rural marketing strategy
To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems
To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing
To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages
UNIT I
Overview of Rural Marketing
Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing
and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction
Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class
UNIT II
Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for
rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT III
Rural Distribution Systems
Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche
markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of
Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT IV
ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network
(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction
Methodology Group Project work
UNIT V
Market support
Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role
play
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Market their products
Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products
Choose an appropriate distribution system
Apply ICT in rural marketing
Source the finance for rural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India
Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education
Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi
SEMESTER- VI
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allot
ted
Cred
its
Course
Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mark
s
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-601
Core
Course
E- Commerce
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-602 Core
Course
Customer
Relationship Management
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-603 Practical
Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva
Voce
100
50
17
-
-
50
20
- - 4 4
1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Grand Total
550
22
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one
paper presentation certificate in related discipline
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management
1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing
1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA607 Management of Change
1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management
1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management
1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service
1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business
1Y3BBA614 E- Governance
1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management
1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing
1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour
1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning
1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design
1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control
1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan
1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing
1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management
1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care
1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law
(Rural Management Group)
1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System
1Y3BBA632
Panchayati Raj
1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy
E- COMMERCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 601
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is
designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the
technical foundation for understanding information systems
UNIT I
Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting
online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a
business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-
commerce
UNIT II
Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet
(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A
systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing
vs in-house development of a website)
UNIT III
Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension
definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security
intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)
technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and
protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)
UNIT IV
E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards
e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online
banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house
automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments
UNIT V
Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting
online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of
utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online
services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and
entertainment
COURSE OUTCOME-
Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information
systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Management Information System Jawadekar
bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon
bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana
bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)
bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty
CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 602
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of
Customer Relationship Management in the organizations
UNIT- I
Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature
of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive
and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and
evaluating customer business plans
UNIT- II
Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer
database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing
customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively
Planning and making persuasive presentations
UNIT- III
Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality
Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality
managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and
Cross- sell
UNIT- IV
Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations
Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority
setting Target setting setting standards
UNIT- V
Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction
COURSE OUTCOME-
To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship
Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd
Ed Response Books Sage Publication
Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House
Pvt Ltd
Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books
Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management
V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008
Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management
South Western Cengage Learning
Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press
Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age
International
Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan
Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of
India Private Limted New Delhi 2011
S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private
Limted New Delhi 2008
ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 603
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to
work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn
the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final
semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by
the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a
student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their
analytical capabilities and experience
DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)
Title of the study (Cover Page)
Declaration
Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)
Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)
Acknowledgement
Table of Contents
Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used
1 INTRODUCTION
11 Introduction
12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research
12 Significance of the study
13 Scope of the study
14 Research Problem
15 Objective of the study
17 Hypothesis
18 Limitations of the study
2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students
to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they
learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After
the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is
evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report
should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to
provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also
able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business
operations and come up with the ways to tap the
Opportunities
3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
31 Introduction
32 Population of the study
33 Sampling Design
331 Sampling Technique
332 Sampling Method
333 Sample Size
34 Research Instrument
35 Sources of data
351 Primary Data
352 Secondary Data
4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION
5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION
Bibliography
COURSE OUTCOME-
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able
to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and
come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities
MARKETING GROUP
PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 604
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the
context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product
manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions
UNIT- I
Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused
organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management
Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-
cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product
Development
UNIT- II
Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods
of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in
international Market
UNIT- III
Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity
concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand
Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image
UNIT- IV
Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system
measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement
Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market
segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining
and establishing brand values
UNIT- V
Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand
extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time
Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand
Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation
COURSE OUTCOME
The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of
Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for
Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning
implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer
Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi
Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi
Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi
Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education
New Delhi
Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi
Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata
McGraw Hill New Delhi
Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi
STRATEGIC MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 605
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and
implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and
managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver
superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation
through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills
UNIT- I
Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash
Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of
Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying
Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting
Marketing Objectives
UNIT-II
Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching
Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy
Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle
Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies
UNIT-III
Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp
Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models
UNIT- IV
Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives
Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy
Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing
UNIT- V
Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at
different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by
executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and
interdisciplinary nature
REFERENCE BOOKS
Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt
D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin
OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage
Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill
Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp
Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson
Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann
Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India
George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press
J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and
Programs McGraw-Hill Companies
Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub
Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon
P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave
E-MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 606
COURSE OBJECTIVE
It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance
enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns
UNIT- I
Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics
Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan
Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing
UNIT- II
Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in
India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within
communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing
UNIT- III
Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet
as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet
User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-
branding
UNIT- IV
Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-
marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools
Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent
Trends in e-customer service
UNIT- V
Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web
Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing
campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising
Course Outcome
Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics
online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its
implication on marketing strategy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a
networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill
Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall
Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning
Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books
Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial
Times
HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 607
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be
Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students
Understand the importance of managing change
UNIT- I
Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-
Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of
human resource strategies in implementing Change
UNIT-II
Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR
implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation
and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions
UNIT-III
HR Processes amp Change
Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned
change
Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change
UNIT- IV
Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in
employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management
of change implications of downsizing
UNIT- V
Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to
promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and
feedback
Course Outcome
Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more
effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change
process
REFERENCE BOOKS
A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human
Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education
Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill
Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage
South Asia Edition
K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation
Response Books
VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books
CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 608
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical
relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand
anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions
to ensure the organizational and individual success
UNIT-I
Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of
organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business
environment
UNIT-II
Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars
Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations
UNIT- III
Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock
Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system
(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)
UNIT- IV
Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and
repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally
appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural
negotiation and conflicts management
UNIT- V
Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual
countries Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development
of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning
Private Limited
G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill
Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley
Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing
Co
Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell
Business
Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times
McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp
Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation
Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson
Education India
GROUP DYNAMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 609
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group
dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group
effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of
resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding
UNIT-I
Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group
dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B
UNIT-II
Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group
Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash
Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress
UNIT-III
Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group
decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash
conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict
UNIT- IV
Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De
individuation theory
UNIT- V
Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources
of Change in groups
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups
REFERENCE BOOKS
Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley
Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass
Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co
Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE
Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and
application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax
along with basic concepts of VAT
UNIT-I
Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of
Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment
of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-II
Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature
and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax
planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business
UNIT-III
Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net
Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and
Penalties (Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-IV
Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for
service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of
Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)
UNIT- V
VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview
of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT
Law)
COURSE OUTCOME
Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields
REFERENCE BOOKS
Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications
Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub
Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House
T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India
BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson
S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann
R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _
INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 611
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important
components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO
Analysis etc
UNIT-I
INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian
Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role
in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)
UNIT-II
FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different
Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players
Different types of Instruments
UNIT-III
CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI
Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank
UNIT- IV
COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp
Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A
REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA
UNIT- V
NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies
Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture
Capital Funds
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment
Banking companies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication
Financial Services MY Khan TMH
Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication
S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran
ML Seth
FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 612
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and
prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of
uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding
of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role
of internal audit assessments
UNIT I
Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview
UNIT II
Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax
fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and
inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds
UNIT III
Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion
investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports
UNIT IV
Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using
Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)
UNIT V Case Study
1 Two Indian
2 Two international cases
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread
nature of fraud and its economic impact
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation
Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination
Cengage Learning
IT GROUP
INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 613
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security
managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues
in the information assurance field
UNIT I
Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian
Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its
application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law
Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour
Laws E-Media and Print Media
UNIT II
E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security
Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature
UNIT III
Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil
Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-
detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of
Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA
UNIT IV
IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal
issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base
UNIT V
Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of
Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules
COURSE OUTCOME-
Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House
Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co
John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River
Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher
Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University
E-GOVERNANCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 614
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information
Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an
awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the
issues concerning the Cyber security
UNIT I
Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National
E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status
UNIT II
E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process
Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges
UNIT III
E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-
Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics
UNIT IV
Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic
data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber
audit implications for e-governance
Unit V
Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and
construction of a joining table
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill
Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing
Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in
India ICFAI Press Hyderabad
B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill
H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications
V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd
IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 615
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization
UNIT I
IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT
Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo
Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for
IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library
UNIT II
Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service
Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support
Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change
Management Release Management
UNIT III
Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve
Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine
Recovery Data Retention
UNIT IV
Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security
Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection
UNIT V
IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and
Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and
Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of
Internet on Technical Support
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology
REFERENCE BOOKS
Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce
(OGC) TSO UK
Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos
Management Tata McGraw Hill
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 616
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques
and their management
UNIT I
Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations
of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and
distribution
UNIT II
Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and
factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging
of foods
UNIT III
Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food
industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO
etc
UNIT IV
Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products
cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking
confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of
fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH
Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie
Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing
Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH
MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 617
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing
concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs
UNIT I
Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution
channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-
farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing
UNIT II
Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds
Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of
NSC and State Seed Corporation
UNIT III
Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers
Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash
marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer
marketing
UNIT IV
Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash
marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of
electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity
UNIT V
Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm
machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines
implementsEquipmentlsquos
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with
various functional areas of agribusiness
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp
IBH
Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management
Kalyani
Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ
House
FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 618
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis
of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions
UNIT I
Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management
decisions farm management problems
UNIT II
Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle
principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc
UNIT III
Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm
records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement
farm efficiency measures
UNIT IV
Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc
UNIT V
Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to
counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks
and uncertainty
COURSE OUTCOME
Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses
REFERENCE BOOKS
Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall
Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ
Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ
Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ
RETAIL GROUP
BUYER BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA 619
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer
decisions making
UNIT-I
A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic
Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market
Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making
UNIT-II
Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles
of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer
Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and
Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product
Relationship
UNIT-III
Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to
information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-
Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors
Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications
UNIT-IV
Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing
Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-
Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions
Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy
UNIT-V
Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics
lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they
experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and
impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour
COURSE OUTCOME
Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the
choices consumers make
REFERENCE BOOKS
JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata
Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006
Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context
Excel Books NewDelhi-2001
Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous
DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing
Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi
Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining
Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005
Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000
RETAIL PLANNING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 620
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational
decision-making processes in the organized retail
UNIT I
Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail
Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-
Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative
methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management
UNIT II
Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics
Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp
non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion
designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting
Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-
Management of Obsolete goods
UNIT III
Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer
psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical
Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices
UNIT IV
Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-
Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp
Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective
Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer
Rights- Consumer Protection Acts
UNIT V
Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing
Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-
Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels
REFERENCE BOOKS
Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies
Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies
Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson
Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund
amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson
Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice
Hall of India New Delhi
Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies
Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best
People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd
RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 621
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the
value it creates
UNIT I
Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When
How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience
Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency
UNIT II
Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated
Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-
Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-
UNIT III
Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on
Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-
Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display
Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-
UNIT IV
Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium
Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and
Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-
Trade Dealing
UNIT V
Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-
Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating
Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing
to act in ways that increase loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -
Prentice-Hall
Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology
Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales
Promotion Techniques
Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate
Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page
Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books
George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing
Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill
PRODUCTION GROUP
PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL
Course Code 1Y3BBA 622
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a
basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of
facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality
control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an
understanding of the concept of aggregate planning
UNIT- I
Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors
Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-
requisites of PPC
UNIT- II
Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in
Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining
Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control
Models)
UNIT- III
Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection
Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master
production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of
software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II
UNIT- IV
Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n
job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling
Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)
UNIT- V
Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control
function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications
bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi
Deep and Deep Publications
PROCESS REENGINEERING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 623
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of
business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering
projects
UNIT- I
Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp
pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR
UNIT- II
Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering
project organizing for process reengineering
UNIT- III
Process analysis and design
a) Process analysis
(b) Process design
UNIT- IV
Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition
tracking and measuring process performance
UNIT- V
Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology
Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact
measurement
COURSE OUTCOME
To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the
considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-
engineering project
REFERENCE BOOKS
Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata
McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater
Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester
John Wiley amp Sons
WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn
the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time
standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering
to design of work systems
UNIT- I
Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos
productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity
Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time
Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities
Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was
developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph
UNIT- II
Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting
up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion
Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand
Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and
Design of Tools amp Equipment
UNIT- III
Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard
from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and
Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work
Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling
UNIT- IV
Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage
Incentive Plans
The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for
Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action
UNIT-V
Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion
Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System
Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts
Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional
including understanding the need for quality
REFERENCE BOOKS
iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill
ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation
Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp
Sons
Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall
Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall
Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press
Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall
Mall East and London
Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN
Course Code 1Y3BBA 625
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in
it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative
impacts of tourism development
UNIT I
Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism
Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of
Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in
Tourism Development
UNIT II
Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning
system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos
Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-
Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in
learning system
UNIT III
Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable
development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist
Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash
The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash
Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities
UNIT IV
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage
of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment
UNIT IV
Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the
Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National
Policy on Ecology and Environment
COURSE OUTCOME
To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global
perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international
tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for
sustainable tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash
Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications
Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers
Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William
Heinemann Ltd
Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices
London Pitman Publishing
Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York
Kendall Hunt Publishing Company
Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan
Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman
Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford
University Press
New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable
Development Approach VNR and New York
TOURISM MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 626
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism
and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing
that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products
before the stakeholders of tourism industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing
Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and
Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market
Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing
Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for
different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing
Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales
promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital
communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future
It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are
needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be
a part of this growth
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar
Thomson Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd
edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of
Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry
UNIT I
HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of
Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads
ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and
marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents
UNIT II
RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief
History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway
Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway
station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains
express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world
heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes
UNIT III
AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth
Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled
Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature
Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players
Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and
performance marketing strategies of Air India
UNIT IV
WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover
crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going
traffic) ndash National waterways
UNIT V
CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing
stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and
Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation
COURSE OUTCOME
Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of
the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management
REFERENCE BOOKS
RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 628
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of
its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing
knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital
Management
UNIT I
Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its
impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need
principles purpose
UNIT II
Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and
their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply
department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health
and patient safety
UNIT III
Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of
biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules
standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging
transportation amp storage
UNIT IV
Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier
methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal
decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of
wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan
UNIT V
Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party
insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash
meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural
disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague
typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics
COURSE OUTCOME
To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost
containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges
arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs
and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its
various components
REFERENCE BOOKS
Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication
First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn
Park k - Preventive and social medicine
Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot
MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 629
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted
advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public
relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any
potential crisis that may arise
UNIT I
Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches
to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of
marketing functions of marketing
UNIT II
Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment
Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market
segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash
positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing
UNIT III
Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior
(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying
decision process
UNIT IV
Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp
deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product
development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling
UNIT V
Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing
policies and strategies
Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management
decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels
COURSE OUTCOME
Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an
integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare
professionals and the public
REFERENCE BOOKS
Philip Kotler - marketing management
Wiliam jStanton - marketing management
Sherleker S A - marketing management
J C Gandhi - marketing management
Davar - modern marketing management
Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub
P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research
Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research
HOSPITALS RELATED LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 630
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of
common-law development
UNIT ndash I
Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties
sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance
act trust act societies registration act
UNIT ndashII
Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of
human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act
1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971
mental health act patient consent
UNIT ndash III
Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948
narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods
act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration
UNIT ndash IV
Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act
1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916
maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing
order) act trade union act industrial disputes act
UNIT ndashV
Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in
hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical
negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical
establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal
pronouncements rulings and regulations
REFERENCE BOOKS
Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer
Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law
Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 631
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India
To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural
Production system in India
To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India
To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development
UNIT -1
Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions
ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology
Case analysis and discussion
UNIT II
Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash
Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture
UNIT III
Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-
Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India
UNIT IV
Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of
holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus
land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas
UNIT V
Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash
Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and
schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM
COURSE OUTCOMES
Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management
Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India
Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development
REFERENCE BOOKS
Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution
Can We Make London Department for International Development
Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House
PANCHAYATI RAJ
Course Code 1Y3BBA632
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration
To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites
To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance
To provide insights on Rural Administration
To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes
UNIT I
Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction
Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges
Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration
(Official and non-official) and report submission
UNIT III
Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission
UNIT IV
Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and
Block- Panchayat relationship
Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play
UNIT V
Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government
Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan
Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
COURSE OUTCOMES
Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village
Development interventions
Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its
power Structure
Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and
Plans
Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes
32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959
Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise
Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi
Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New
Delhi
RURAL ECONOMY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 633
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy
To help students understand their role in rural economic development
To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources
To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation
To create awareness on rural economic development
UNIT I
Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-
Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries
(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in
agriculture individual production other production services
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-
Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash
Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land
Reforms
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
UNIT III
Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation
programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs
UNIT IV
Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work
UNIT V
Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing
ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for
the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy
Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village
Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues
Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation
Facilities
Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi
Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi
Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic
Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New
Delhi
INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER
Mid Semester Examination (MSE)
There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5
descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered
End Semester Examination (ESE)
There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks
each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of
10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered
Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations
The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment
Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be
applicable
(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )
Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type
End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA105
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to
articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate
effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the
consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and
quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods
UNIT-I
Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of
Management Functions of the Manager
UNIT- II
Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of
Planning
Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and
type of Policies
Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems
involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques
UNIT- III
Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of
Units and committees
Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship
UNIT- IV
Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training
Directing Nature and purpose and directing
UNIT- V
Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control
process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies
COURSE OUTCOME-
Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques
managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of
managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify
and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own
position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied
audiences
Reference Books
bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher
bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson
Education
bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt
Ltd 4th Ed
bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill
Publications
SEMESTER II
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distributio
n
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor
Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distribu
tion Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Ma
x
Ma
rks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme
nt
Compulsory
Course
English
communication
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA202 Core Course
Management concept amp
Principle
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA203 Core
Course
Environmental
Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA204 Core
Course
Monetary
Economics and
Indian Banking
100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
1Y3BBA205 Core
Course
Business
Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA205 Business
Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhanceme
nt
Skill Enhancement
Elective
Course-I
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand
Total 600 21 5 - 24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
ENGLISH COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA201
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English
language teaching and content writing sectors
UNIT I
Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning
Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening
UNIT II
Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive
writing expansion of an idea
UNIT III
Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing
(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume
writing covering letter
UNIT IV
Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases
UNIT V
Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb
agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions
(Advanced)
COURSE OUTCOME
To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill
Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul
Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan
Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das
Orient Blackswan
Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press
Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication
MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 202
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and
process of effective controlling in the organization
UNIT I
Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science
Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)
UNIT II
School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and
Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)
Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management
UNIT III
Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing
Staffing Directing and Coordinating
UNIT IV
Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command
Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control
UNIT V
Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure
determination Forms- formal amp informal organization
Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations
COURSE OUTCOME
Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial
functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management
REFERENCE BOOKS
LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management
VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management
James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB
Fred Luthans- OB
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 203
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links
between human and natural systems
UNIT I
Introduction to environmental studies
Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability
and sustainable development
UNIT II
Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an
ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following
ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds
streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)
Unit III
Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to
mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and
over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international
ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate
energy sources growing energy needs case studies
UNIT IV
Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem
diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots
Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and
Informational value
UNIT V
Environmental Pollution
Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution
Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and
Industrial waste Pollution case studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social
and environmental processes
REFERENCE BOOKS
California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London
Routledge
Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security
Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press
Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of
ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006
Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37
McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books
McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the
Twentieth Century
Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders
Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic
Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt
Ltd
Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons
Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi
1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP
Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation
S Chand Publishing New Delhi
MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING
Course Code 1Y3BBA204
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using
statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills
within the contest of subject matter of economics
UNIT I
Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of
Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value
of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income
theory of Money
UNIT II
Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people
Money Market
UNIT III
Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial
Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks
UNIT IV
Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control
methods and Tools of Monetary Policy
UNIT V
RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative
Banks and Rural Banks
COURSE OUTCOME
Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and
mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of
economics
REFERENCE BOOKS
MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi
LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi
Crowther- An Out Line of Money
Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant
KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ
BUSINESS COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA205
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative
scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication
UNIT I
Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports
OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)
UNIT II
Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other
words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis
UNIT III
Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers
Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers
UNIT IV
Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a
Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication
Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)
UNIT V
Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written
Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp
minutes
COURSE OUTCOME
To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical
proficiency in the development of exposition and argument
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wren amp Martin
K Madhukar- Business Communication
VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication
Asha Laul- Business Communication
Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH
SEMESTER III
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotte
d
Credit
s
Course Code Course
Type
Course
Title
Total
Mark
s
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subjec
t wise
Distrib
ution
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA301
Ability
Enhancement
IT Tool for Business
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA302
Core Course
Introduction to Marketing
Management
100 50 17 20 7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA303 Core
Course
Business
Law
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA304 Core
Course
Business
statistics for
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA305
Core
Course
Retail
Management
100 50 17 20
7
30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam Sessional
1Y3BBA304 Practical
Business
statistics for Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management
50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2
Skill Course Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill
Enhancemen
t Elective Course-II
50 - - - - 50 20
1 - 1 2
Grand Total 600 24
IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 301
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software
components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data
base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT
UNIT-I
Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and
Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World
Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept
UNIT-II
Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different
computer generation
UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and
Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming
Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-
principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart
examples
UNIT-IV
Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation
applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)
Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information
System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems
Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human
Resources Management Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations
Understand the hardware and software components of the computer
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford
2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication
3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication
4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill
INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 302
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply
these to a new or existing business
UNIT I
Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept
amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro
environment
UNIT II
Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of
Product Line amp Product- mix
UNIT III
Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing
decisions Overview of pricing process
UNIT IV
Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product
Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage
UNIT V
Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to
marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct
selling
COURSE OUTCOME
To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct
an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an
appropriate format
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Philip Kotler
2 TN Chabra
3 TK Panda
4 SH Kazmi
5 Arun Kumar
BUSINESS LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 303
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal
environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with
knowledge of legal principles
UNIT-I
Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration
capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts
Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp
Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency
UNIT-II
Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp
Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales
UNIT-III
Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -
Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a
negotiable instrument
UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of
non-registration Dissolution of a firm
UNIT-V
Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of
Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013
COURSE OBJECTIVE
On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to
individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context
Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 ND Kapoor
2 Tulsian
3 MC Kuchhal
4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business
BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 304
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management
UNIT I
Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance
Scope and Limitation of Statistic
UNIT II
Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar
Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive
UNIT III
Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic
Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures
of dispersion
UNIT IV
Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and
Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index
number CPI WPI IIP
UNIT V
Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank
Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series
COURSE OUTCOME
Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically
discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons
2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication
3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication
RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in
India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone
Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT
FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan
Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process
UNIT II
FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail
Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors
Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing
MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer
Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design
and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication
UNIT III
STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty
Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors
UNIT IV
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management
IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service
Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM
Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying
UNIT V
MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at
Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems
at Retail Centers
Course Outcome-
Reference Books
bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education
bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A
Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education
The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge
about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various
aspects of retail operations
After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with
the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the
entire retail operations
SEMESTER IV
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years)
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code Course
Type Course Title
Total
Mar
ks
Major Minor Sessional
L T P
Subject
wise
Distributio
n
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mark
s
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Mar
ks
Min
Mar
ks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-401
Ability
Enhanceme
nt
Introduction to
soft skill amp
Team Building
50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2
1Y3BBA-402 Core Course
Introduction to
financial
management
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-403 Core Course
Advertising
and Sales
Promotion
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-404 Core Course
Management
of Human resource
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of
Business
100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4
Practical Group
Term End
Practical
Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-404 Practical
Management
of Human
resource
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-405 Practical
Macro
Economics of Business
50
25 08 - - 25 10
- - 2 2
Grand Total 550 22
INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 401
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate
students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners
by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are
learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for
their own learning
UNIT ndash I
General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of
Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences
Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making
Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of
communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of
Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation
UNIT ndash II
Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing
skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice
modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements
General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral
skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive
Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style
UNIT ndash III
Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format
and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in
Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active
Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD
UNIT ndash IV
Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction
Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview
Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing
Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of
Conversation
UNIT ndash V
Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional
Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers
COURSE OUTCOME
To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills
and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin
bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar
INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 402
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital
decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and
raising long-term finance
UNIT I
Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives
Role of finance manager
UNIT II
Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of
investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return
Comparison between NPV amp IRR
UNIT III
Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of
Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning
capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure
UNIT IV
The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage
Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating
Leverage
UNIT V
Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital
estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of
inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order
Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy
COURSE OUTCOME
Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial
manager in the current competitive business scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 IM Pandey
2 P Chandra
3 SP Gupta
4 MY Khan
ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 403
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may
review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos
homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions
UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising
budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for
Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising
UNIT II
Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy
Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role
types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council
of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)
UNIT III
Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring
awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of
design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet
advertising and evaluation of advertising
UNIT IV
Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors
influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option
Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of
consumer schemes and other methods of promotion
UNIT V
Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs
Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales
personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion
COURSE OUTCOME
Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how
these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its
relation to todaylsquos marketplace
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall
Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi
Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi
Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications
MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 404
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource
management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational
setting
UNIT-I
Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with
special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in
strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management
UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge
workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)
Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)
UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of
human resource department and the role of human resource manager
UNITndashIV
Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification
rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation
UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection
(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction
COURSE OUTCOME
To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training
Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical
Behaviour
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi
Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New
Delhi
Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York
HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications
A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications
MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the
important indicators of the economy and their significance
UNIT I
Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of
Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income
Personal and Personal disposable income
UNIT II
Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income
Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and
Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator
Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate
demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy
UNIT III
Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate
demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government
expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary
and fiscal policy
UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary
policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production
Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation
monetary measures fiscal measures
UNIT V
Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and
corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in
open economy
COURSE OUTCOME
To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the
role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson
2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill
3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers
4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson
SEMESTER V
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment
Internal Assessment Credit
Distribution
Allotted
Credits
Course Code
Course Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Marks
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-501
Ability Enhancement
Public Relation amp Corporate Image
50
25
8
10
4
15
6
2
-
-
2
1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and
small Business
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-503
Core Course Principle of
Economics
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-502
Practical Entrepreneurship and
small Business
50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics
50
25 08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Skill Course
Sessional
Skill
Enhancement
Skill Enhancement
Elective Course-III
50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2
Grand Total
600
24
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D
L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of
course structure
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication
1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management
1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India
1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation
1Y3BBA509 Organization Development
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision
1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management
1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA513 Database Management System
1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service
1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy
1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management
1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management
1Y3BBA520 Stores Management
1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA522 Technology Management
1Y3BBA523 Productivity
1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept
1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management
1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System
1Y3BBA529 Health Economics
1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management
(Rural Management Group )
1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity
1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment
1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management
SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES
Non-Technical
Elective No Department Faculty Name
Faculty of Information Technology
I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)
II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)
IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)
V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Management
I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)
II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)
III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development
Faculty of Commerce
I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)
II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)
III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Humanities
I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)
II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)
III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Science
I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)
II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)
III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)
IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)
V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)
Faculty of Education
I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)
II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)
PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA501
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts
of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling
and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization
UNIT- I
Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash
Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy
Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors
ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public
Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations
UNIT- II
Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service
Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social
Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy
for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation
Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event
Management
UNIT- III
Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash
Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public
Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of
Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control
UNIT IV
Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies
Components of an Individual Image
Advertising and Corporate Image
Public Relations of an Institutions
UNIT V
The Grapevine and Rumours
Stereotype
Propaganda
Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations
applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different
entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling
REFERENCE BOOKS
Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House
Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House
Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University
Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill
This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning
ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-
The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding
processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to
those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic
environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide
evidence which informs those debates
UNIT I
Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of
Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its
environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship
UNIT II
Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship
development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the
Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making
UNIT III
Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that
enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in
Social context Start Up
UNIT IV
Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional
source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital
UNIT V
Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries
COURSE OUTCOME-
Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication
2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd
3 Vasant Desai
4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH
PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 503
COURSE OBJECTIVES-
To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production
UNIT- I
Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits
UNIT-II
Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus
movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts
of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications
of demand and supply price rationing price floors
Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price
elasticity cross and income elasticity
UNIT-III
Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility
Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp
Producer surplus
UNIT-IV
Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant
and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue
and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale
UNIT-V
Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of
the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run
equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment
concept
COURSE OUTCOME-
To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011
bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th
edition
2007
bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA
bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press
Oxford
bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore
MARKETING GROUP
INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so
that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to
enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications
UNIT-I
Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC
in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising
appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion
relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship
between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods
Interactive Internet Marketing
UNIT-II
Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach
establishing and allocating promotional budget
UNIT-III
IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different
forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning
creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design
considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client
Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork
UNIT-IV
Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering
key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and
media research
Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration
client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc
UNIT-V
Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing
Communications
COURSE OUTCOME-
To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches
and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to
communicating to target audiences
REFERENCE BOOKS
Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc
Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard
D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois
Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing
House
Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and
Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication
Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH
Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing
Communications Pearson Education Limited
Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc
Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House
Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning
Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc
Homewood Illinois
Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic
Approach Cengage Learning
Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India
Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education
SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT
Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE
It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and
distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and
distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners
UNIT-I
Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies
Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling
objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring
Procedure Socialization
UNIT-II
Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program
Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation
Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial
Evaluation of Contest
UNIT-III
Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel
Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales
Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process
UNIT-IV
Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key
tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market
Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation
UNIT-V
Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners
Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict
Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International
Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales
COURSE OUTCOME
Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the
sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans
participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables
REFERENCE BOOKS
Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres
Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books
Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI
L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills
Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets
Greenwood Publishing Group
Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub
ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH
Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing
consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing
research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students
within a course project
UNIT-I
Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing
Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research
Process Marketing Research Designs
UNIT-II
The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques
Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of
Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic
Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical
Analysis Tools
UNIT-III
Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)
ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor
Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental
Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores
Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-
hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number
UNIT-IV
Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product
Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant
Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification
Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing
Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and
their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity
UNIT-V
Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning
in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report
and class presentation of the same
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from
analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor
analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis
REFERENCE BOOKS
Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi
William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi
Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi
Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill
Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research
Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey
Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning
Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp
Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced
in the class
HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP
LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA
Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of
Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity
objectivity and understandings
UNIT-I
The Factories Act 1948
The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923
The Employees State Insurance Act 1948
UNIT-II
The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952
The Payment of gratuity Act 1972
UNIT-III
The Maternity Benefit Act 1961
The Minimum Wages act 1948
UNIT-IV
The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946
The Payment of Bonus Act 1965
UNIT-V
The Apprentices Act 1969
The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959
COURSE OUTCOME ndash
To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour
Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the
organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to
follow the Laws applicable to the establishment
REFERENCE BOOKS
S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications
S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi
Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot
V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House
N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons
INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE
In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our
country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of
Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be
acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the
concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India
UNIT-I
Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors
affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial
relation programme
Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact
of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes
lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry
UNIT-II
Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal
Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective
bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective
collective bargaining collective bargaining in India
UNIT-III
Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education
scheme in India- objectives functions and problems
Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation
schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India
UNIT-IV
Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India
major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions
registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union
UNIT-V
Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery
Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation
submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court
industrial tribunals
Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power
of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute
COURSE OUTCOME
Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective
bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute
resolution
REFERENCE BOOKS
Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts
IIPM Personnel Management in India
Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business
Publication Ltd
Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India
Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India
Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication
Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co
Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law
ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational
culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the
human values in individuals
UNIT-I
Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational
Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development
Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining
and survey research amp feedback methodology
UNIT-II
Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in
organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief
systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development
UNIT-III
Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component
interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief
of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action
UNIT-IV
OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team
building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process
interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions
important for successful OD efforts
UNIT ndash V
HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational
implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional
Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have
improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi
Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York
McGrawhill
Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE
To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in
addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a
good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company
UNIT-I
Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm
Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-
Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of
Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering
UNIT-II
Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the
analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount
of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a
Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and
Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis
UNIT-III
Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues
and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements
medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings
Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project
finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing
UNIT-IV
Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of
financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing
Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect
cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization
UNIT-V
Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value
Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic
indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added
Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total
Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)
COURSE OUTCOME
Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and
corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts
REFERENCE BOOKS
Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill
Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin
Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons
INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial
environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a
multinational corporation
UNIT-I
Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation
functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial
management International monetary system
UNIT-II
Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories
ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible
exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer
Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options
Currency swaps and interest rate swaps
UNIT-III
Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction
transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction
exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The
national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International
capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)
UNIT-IV
International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic
considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)
Financial risk and cost of capital
Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of
capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-
20 subsidiaries and tax havens
UNIT-V
International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their
comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets
Recent developments in the Euro bond market
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations
and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley
PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education
Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall
Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall
Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis
Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co
Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall
Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers
Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath
FINANCIAL INCLUSION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion
such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss
the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to
promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models
UNIT-I
Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting
Access to Financial Services
Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive
Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators
UNIT-II
Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey
Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional
Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card
UNIT-III
Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India
Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations
Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor
UNIT-IV
SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of
microfinance evolved in India
Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial
Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for
Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for
Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People
UNIT-V
Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises
Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion
and Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account
initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage
Publication
Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House
Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech
Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications
Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications
Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing
Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI
Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI
Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag
Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion
Academic Foundation
IT GROUP
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to
manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the
hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment
UNIT-I
The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures
File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base
Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial
Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness
UNIT-II
Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface
with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database
Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design
UNIT-III
Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database
Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database
Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases
UNIT-IV
DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance
Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues
UNIT-V
Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the
field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective
faculty during the coverage of syllabus
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic
concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational
algebra and SQL
REFERENCE BOOKS
Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs
Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan
Press
McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co
MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It
aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing
implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services
UNIT-I
The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development
Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The
Enabling Environment for ITES
UNIT-II
Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled
Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of
Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services
UNIT-III
Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support
Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions
UNIT-IV
International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting
Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in
facilitating Trade in ITESTITES
UNIT-V
Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of
Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of
Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace
Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations
and integrate the learning in handling these complexities
REFERENCE BOOKS
Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat
E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information
technology with various aspects of Software Project Management
UNIT-I
Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision
and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM
Framework
UNIT-II
Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning
Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan
Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration
and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning
UNIT-III
Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an
Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques
Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule
Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools
UNIT-IV
Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance
Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior
Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review
UNIT-V
Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks
Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk
COURSE OUTCOME
Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business
context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business
scenario
REFERENCE BOOKS
R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson
Education Ltd
P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp
Tsinghua University Press
R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance
Management Concepts Pub
Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group
B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science
Press
A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications
G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on
understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business
UNIT I
Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm
production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country
UNIT II
Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms
and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business
sector
UNIT III
Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations
relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries
UNIT IV
Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment
and policy
UNIT V
Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies
COURSE OUTCOME
Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper
and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain
REFERENCE BOOKS
Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons
Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ
Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 517
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies
strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms
UNIT I
Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market
structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp
significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of
marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour
UNIT II
Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash
significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product
product life cycle
UNIT III
Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies
and pricing methods
UNIT IV
Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and
standardization
UNIT V
Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural
products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in
agribusiness
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better
understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for
agricultural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH
Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall
Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control
Pearson Edu
Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu
Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India
FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 518
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food
marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen
and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural
political and economic forces over time
UNIT I
Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade
Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of
Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic
factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer
UNIT II
Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling
food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing
in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions
across the chain in food retail food service marketing
UNIT III
4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing
Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system
Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement
Strategies for food retailers
UNIT IV
Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling
Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food
Products
UNIT V
Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training
Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in
retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze
Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing
REFERENCE BOOKS
Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of
India
Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu
Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill
RETAIL GROUP
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE
The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in
the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it
UNIT- I
Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management
Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain
networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain
Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network
UNIT- II
Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer
service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs
multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier
Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants
UNIT- III
Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory
models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system
UNIT- IV
COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip
Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION
TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain
Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management
UNIT- V
Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a
Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance
measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics
quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics
COURSE OUTCOME
After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain
which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House
bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers
bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg
bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi
bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan
STORES MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 520
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different
terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned
areas
UNIT- I
Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the
location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design
UNIT- II
Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual
Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors
UNIT- III
Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at
Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores
Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments
UNIT- IV
Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies
Quick Response System
UNIT- V
Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact
on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space
Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization
COURSE OUTCOME
The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern
and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management
bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing
bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach
bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing
bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing
RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 521
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail
Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail
business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management
UNIT I
Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail
equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail
market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-
Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India
UNIT II
Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development
The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and
Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-
Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on
ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response
marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks
The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management
UNIT III
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM
Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch
points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services
Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM
Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding
Common Barriers
UNIT IV
Services Management
Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the
service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-
Supply relationships vehicle routing
UNIT V
Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising
Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping
the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand
management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-
2nd edition 2006
MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational
edititionUS1798
Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education
New Delhi 2003
JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy
Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi
Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy
Pearson Education New Delhi 2004
KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005
Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007
Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House
Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution
rosenbloom and Education Foundation US
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT
TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 522
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
UNIT- I
Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology
Change Implication
UNIT- II
Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying
UNIT- III
Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology
Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management
UNIT- IV
Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology
Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages
UNIT- V
Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise
Level
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to
manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology
management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009
bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009
bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson
PRODUCTIVITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 523
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
UNIT- I
Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and
external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work
Contents and Ineffective Time
UNIT- II
Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram
String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart
UNIT- III
Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart
UNIT- IV
Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be
Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement
UNIT- V
Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying
work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by
elimination of waste and unnecessary operation
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International
Labour Office Geneva
bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed
bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill
bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India
QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO
Course Code 1Y3BBA 524
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify
the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and
measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current
issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans
UNIT- I
Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives
UNIT- II
Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect
concept
UNIT- III
Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality
UNIT- IV
Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various
control Charts
UNIT- V
Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification
COURSE OUTCOME-
Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to
explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key
aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for
controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp
communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze
the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise
and evaluate quality implementation plans
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay
bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd
bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas
bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd
bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition
7th
Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012
bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM CONCEPTS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 525
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism
To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash
Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp
Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and
development of Tourism through the ages
UNIT II
COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash
Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism
inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious
Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions
incentives sports and adventure tourism
UNIT III
TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash
Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of
motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash
health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and
push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists
UNIT IV
IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash
Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts
- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism
UNIT V
SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-
Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote
Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable
Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and
experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of
tourism experiences
REFERENCES BOOKS
Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling
Publishers Private Limited New Delhi
Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism
Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited
Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill
International
Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors
New Delhi
Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas
Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi
Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New
Delhi
TOURISM MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 526
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the basic concept and various components of management
UNIT I
MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-
Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of
management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)
Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management
UNIT II
PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-
Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of
planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by
objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance
and limitation of decision making
UNIT III
ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash
Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of
staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance
appraisal
UNIT IV
DIRECTING ndash
Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation
(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy
theory)
UNIT V
LEADERSHIP-
Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path
Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to
communication
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives
Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of
tourism as well as the impacts of tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc
Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New
Delhi
Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition
AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing
House New Delhi
Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition
Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi
TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations
To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism
industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-
Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing
Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and
Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash
Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New
Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING -
Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION -
Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity
Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in
promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level
which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described
REFERENCES BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson
Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition
Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism
6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent
learning
UNIT I
Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health
Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural
History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention
UNIT II
Definition and meaning of hospital ndash
Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing
concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of
Hospitals
UNIT III
Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector
Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in
delivering healthcare in India
UNIT IV
Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural
hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description
UNIT V
The reforms of Healthcare System-
The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare
reforms amp Future of Healthcare System
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding
the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the
management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and
organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services
REFERENCE BOOKS
The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991
Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd
Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers
HEALTH ECONOMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 529
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and
understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict
peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different
social actions
UNIT I
Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and
importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below
Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits
UNIT II
Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve
techniques and properties of indifference curve
UNIT III
Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash
Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of
Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of
Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of
demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash
Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue
UNIT IV
Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two
variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves
UNIT V
Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash
Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and
monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market
situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price
determination
COURSE OUTCOME
To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from
an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic
evaluation of a health intervention or program
REFERENCE BOOKS
Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR
Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP
Managerial Economics - Gupta GS
Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani
Business Economics - Sharma NK
Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar
Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi
Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL
HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 530
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions
related to records management in the healthcare environment
UNIT I
Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record
keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records
UNIT II
Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health
Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research
UNIT III
Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics
investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing
Pharmacy etc Audits)
UNIT IV
Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems
associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic
Related Groups (DRG)
UNIT V
Medical Registers ndash
Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various
departments amp common problems faced
COURSE OUTCOME
Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New
Delhi 1999
Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995
Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi
George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003
Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 531
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India
To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India
UNIT I
Rural Society in India
Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-
urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and
subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural
life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion
UNIT II
Rural Society
Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social
institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity
and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of
rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT-III
Village India
Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance
contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and
political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology
Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class
UNIT IV
Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics
Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid
growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope
and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -
Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT-V
Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times
Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social
processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India
Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life
Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India
Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy
Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms
REFERENCE BOOKS
Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi
Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay
PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House
SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication
House Delhi
ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 532
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To explain the nature of environmental studies
To introduce aspects of Natural resources
To introduce aspects of ecosystems
To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation
To introduce aspects of environmental pollution
To create awareness on social issues and environment
To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
UNIT I
Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for
public awareness
UNIT II
Ecosystems
Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and
decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and
Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the
following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic
Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)
UNIT III
Biodiversity and its Conservation
Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification
of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option
Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports
of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-
Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ
Conservation of biodiversity
UNIT IV
Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil
pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste
Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an
individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods
earthquake cyclone and landslides
20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
UNIT V
Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water
Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of
People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible
responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and
holocaust
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Describe the nature of environmental studies
Classify renewable and non-renewable resources
Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues
Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation
Analyze aspects of environmental pollution
Describe aspects of social issues and environment
Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment
REFERENCE BOOKS
Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner
Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental
Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai
Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA
RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 533
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts
To familiarize Rural marketing strategy
To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems
To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing
To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages
UNIT I
Overview of Rural Marketing
Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing
and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction
Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class
UNIT II
Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for
rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT III
Rural Distribution Systems
Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche
markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of
Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and
discussion
UNIT IV
ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network
(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction
Methodology Group Project work
UNIT V
Market support
Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role
play
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Market their products
Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products
Choose an appropriate distribution system
Apply ICT in rural marketing
Source the finance for rural products
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India
Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education
Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi
SEMESTER- VI
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass
COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER
Course Details External
Assessment Internal Assessment
Credit
Distribution
Allot
ted
Cred
its
Course
Code
Course
Type
Course Title
Total
Marks
Major Minor Sessional
L
T
P
Subject
wise
Distributi
on
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mar
ks
Max
Marks
Min
Marks
Max
Mark
s
Min
Mark
s
Theory Group
1Y3BBA-601
Core
Course
E- Commerce
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
1Y3BBA-602 Core
Course
Customer
Relationship Management
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific
Elective-I
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Core
Course
Discipline Specific Elective-II
100
50
17
20
7
30
12
4
-
-
4
Practical Group Term End
Practical Exam
Sessional
1Y3BBA-603 Practical
Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva
Voce
100
50
17
-
-
50
20
- - 4 4
1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50
25
08
-
-
25
10
- - 2 2
Grand Total
550
22
Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical
Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam
Minor- Pre University Test
Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50
Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one
paper presentation certificate in related discipline
Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two
paper from the following
(Marketing Group)
1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management
1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing
1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing
(HR Group)
1Y3BBA607 Management of Change
1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management
1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic
(Finance Group)
1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management
1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service
1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation
(IT Group)
1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business
1Y3BBA614 E- Governance
1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management
(Agri Business Group)
1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management
1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing
1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management
(Retail Group)
1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour
1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning
1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion
(Production Group)
1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design
1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control
1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering
(Travel amp Tourism Group)
1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan
1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing
1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management
( Hospital Administration Group)
1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management
1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care
1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law
(Rural Management Group)
1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System
1Y3BBA632
Panchayati Raj
1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy
E- COMMERCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 601
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is
designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the
technical foundation for understanding information systems
UNIT I
Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting
online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a
business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-
commerce
UNIT II
Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet
(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A
systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing
vs in-house development of a website)
UNIT III
Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension
definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security
intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)
technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and
protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)
UNIT IV
E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards
e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online
banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house
automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments
UNIT V
Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting
online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of
utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online
services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and
entertainment
COURSE OUTCOME-
Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information
systems
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull Management Information System Jawadekar
bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon
bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana
bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)
bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty
CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 602
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of
Customer Relationship Management in the organizations
UNIT- I
Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature
of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive
and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and
evaluating customer business plans
UNIT- II
Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer
database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing
customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively
Planning and making persuasive presentations
UNIT- III
Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality
Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality
managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and
Cross- sell
UNIT- IV
Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations
Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority
setting Target setting setting standards
UNIT- V
Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction
COURSE OUTCOME-
To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship
Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd
Ed Response Books Sage Publication
Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House
Pvt Ltd
Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books
Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management
V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008
Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management
South Western Cengage Learning
Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press
Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age
International
Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan
Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of
India Private Limted New Delhi 2011
S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private
Limted New Delhi 2008
ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 603
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to
work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn
the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final
semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by
the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a
student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their
analytical capabilities and experience
DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)
Title of the study (Cover Page)
Declaration
Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)
Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)
Acknowledgement
Table of Contents
Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used
1 INTRODUCTION
11 Introduction
12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research
12 Significance of the study
13 Scope of the study
14 Research Problem
15 Objective of the study
17 Hypothesis
18 Limitations of the study
2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)
After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students
to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or
research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they
learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After
the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is
evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report
should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to
provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also
able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business
operations and come up with the ways to tap the
Opportunities
3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
31 Introduction
32 Population of the study
33 Sampling Design
331 Sampling Technique
332 Sampling Method
333 Sample Size
34 Research Instrument
35 Sources of data
351 Primary Data
352 Secondary Data
4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION
5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION
Bibliography
COURSE OUTCOME-
After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research
process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able
to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and
come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities
MARKETING GROUP
PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 604
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the
context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product
manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions
UNIT- I
Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused
organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management
Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-
cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product
Development
UNIT- II
Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods
of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in
international Market
UNIT- III
Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity
concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand
Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image
UNIT- IV
Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system
measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement
Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market
segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining
and establishing brand values
UNIT- V
Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand
extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time
Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand
Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation
COURSE OUTCOME
The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of
Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for
Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning
implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer
Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi
Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi
Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi
Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education
New Delhi
Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi
Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata
McGraw Hill New Delhi
Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi
STRATEGIC MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 605
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and
implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and
managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver
superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation
through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills
UNIT- I
Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash
Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of
Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying
Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting
Marketing Objectives
UNIT-II
Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching
Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy
Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle
Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies
UNIT-III
Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp
Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models
UNIT- IV
Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives
Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy
Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing
UNIT- V
Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at
different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies
COURSE OUTCOME
Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by
executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and
interdisciplinary nature
REFERENCE BOOKS
Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt
D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin
OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage
Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill
Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp
Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson
Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann
Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India
George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press
J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and
Programs McGraw-Hill Companies
Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub
Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon
P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave
E-MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 606
COURSE OBJECTIVE
It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance
enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns
UNIT- I
Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics
Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan
Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing
UNIT- II
Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in
India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within
communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing
UNIT- III
Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet
as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet
User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-
branding
UNIT- IV
Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-
marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools
Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent
Trends in e-customer service
UNIT- V
Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web
Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing
campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising
Course Outcome
Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics
online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its
implication on marketing strategy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a
networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill
Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall
Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning
Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books
Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial
Times
HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 607
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be
Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students
Understand the importance of managing change
UNIT- I
Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-
Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of
human resource strategies in implementing Change
UNIT-II
Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR
implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation
and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions
UNIT-III
HR Processes amp Change
Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned
change
Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change
UNIT- IV
Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in
employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management
of change implications of downsizing
UNIT- V
Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to
promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and
feedback
Course Outcome
Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more
effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change
process
REFERENCE BOOKS
A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human
Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education
Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill
Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage
South Asia Edition
K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation
Response Books
VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books
CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 608
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical
relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand
anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions
to ensure the organizational and individual success
UNIT-I
Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of
organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business
environment
UNIT-II
Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars
Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations
UNIT- III
Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock
Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system
(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)
UNIT- IV
Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and
repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally
appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural
negotiation and conflicts management
UNIT- V
Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual
countries Case Studies
COURSE OUTCOME
Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development
of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning
Private Limited
G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill
Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley
Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing
Co
Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell
Business
Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times
McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp
Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation
Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson
Education India
GROUP DYNAMICS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 609
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group
dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group
effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of
resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding
UNIT-I
Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group
dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B
UNIT-II
Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group
Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash
Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress
UNIT-III
Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group
decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash
conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict
UNIT- IV
Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De
individuation theory
UNIT- V
Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources
of Change in groups
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups
REFERENCE BOOKS
Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley
Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass
Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co
Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing
FINANCE GROUP
CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE
Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and
application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax
along with basic concepts of VAT
UNIT-I
Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of
Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment
of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-II
Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature
and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax
planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business
UNIT-III
Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net
Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and
Penalties (Theory amp Problems)
UNIT-IV
Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for
service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of
Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)
UNIT- V
VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview
of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT
Law)
COURSE OUTCOME
Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields
REFERENCE BOOKS
Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications
Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub
Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House
T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India
BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson
S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann
R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _
INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES
Course Code 1Y3BBA 611
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important
components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO
Analysis etc
UNIT-I
INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian
Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role
in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)
UNIT-II
FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different
Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players
Different types of Instruments
UNIT-III
CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI
Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank
UNIT- IV
COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp
Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A
REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA
UNIT- V
NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies
Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture
Capital Funds
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment
Banking companies
REFERENCE BOOKS
Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication
Financial Services MY Khan TMH
Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication
S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran
ML Seth
FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION
Course Code 1Y3BBA 612
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and
prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of
uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding
of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role
of internal audit assessments
UNIT I
Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview
UNIT II
Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax
fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and
inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds
UNIT III
Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion
investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports
UNIT IV
Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using
Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)
UNIT V Case Study
1 Two Indian
2 Two international cases
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread
nature of fraud and its economic impact
REFERENCE BOOKS
Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation
Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination
Cengage Learning
IT GROUP
INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 613
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security
managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues
in the information assurance field
UNIT I
Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian
Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its
application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law
Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour
Laws E-Media and Print Media
UNIT II
E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security
Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature
UNIT III
Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil
Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-
detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of
Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA
UNIT IV
IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal
issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base
UNIT V
Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of
Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules
COURSE OUTCOME-
Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization
REFERENCE BOOKS
Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House
Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co
John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River
Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher
Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University
E-GOVERNANCE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 614
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information
Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an
awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the
issues concerning the Cyber security
UNIT I
Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National
E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status
UNIT II
E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process
Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges
UNIT III
E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-
Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics
UNIT IV
Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic
data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber
audit implications for e-governance
Unit V
Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and
construction of a joining table
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill
Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing
Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in
India ICFAI Press Hyderabad
B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill
Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill
H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications
V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd
IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 615
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization
UNIT I
IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT
Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo
Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for
IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library
UNIT II
Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service
Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support
Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change
Management Release Management
UNIT III
Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve
Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine
Recovery Data Retention
UNIT IV
Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security
Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection
UNIT V
IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and
Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and
Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of
Internet on Technical Support
COURSE OUTCOME
Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology
REFERENCE BOOKS
Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce
(OGC) TSO UK
Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos
Management Tata McGraw Hill
AGRIBUSINESS GROUP
FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 616
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques
and their management
UNIT I
Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations
of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and
distribution
UNIT II
Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and
factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging
of foods
UNIT III
Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food
industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO
etc
UNIT IV
Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products
cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking
confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of
fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc
COURSE OUTCOME
Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH
Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie
Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing
Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH
MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 617
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing
concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs
UNIT I
Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution
channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-
farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing
UNIT II
Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds
Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of
NSC and State Seed Corporation
UNIT III
Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers
Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash
marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer
marketing
UNIT IV
Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash
marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of
electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity
UNIT V
Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm
machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines
implementsEquipmentlsquos
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with
various functional areas of agribusiness
REFERENCE BOOKS
Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp
IBH
Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management
Kalyani
Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ
House
FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 618
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis
of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions
UNIT I
Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management
decisions farm management problems
UNIT II
Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle
principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc
UNIT III
Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm
records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement
farm efficiency measures
UNIT IV
Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc
UNIT V
Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to
counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks
and uncertainty
COURSE OUTCOME
Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses
REFERENCE BOOKS
Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall
Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ
Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ
Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ
RETAIL GROUP
BUYER BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 1Y3BBA 619
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer
decisions making
UNIT-I
A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic
Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market
Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making
UNIT-II
Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles
of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer
Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and
Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product
Relationship
UNIT-III
Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to
information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-
Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors
Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications
UNIT-IV
Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing
Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-
Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions
Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy
UNIT-V
Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics
lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they
experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and
impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour
COURSE OUTCOME
Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the
choices consumers make
REFERENCE BOOKS
JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata
Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006
Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context
Excel Books NewDelhi-2001
Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous
DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing
Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi
Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining
Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005
Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000
RETAIL PLANNING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 620
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational
decision-making processes in the organized retail
UNIT I
Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail
Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-
Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative
methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management
UNIT II
Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics
Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp
non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion
designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting
Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-
Management of Obsolete goods
UNIT III
Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer
psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical
Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices
UNIT IV
Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-
Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp
Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective
Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer
Rights- Consumer Protection Acts
UNIT V
Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing
Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-
Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels
REFERENCE BOOKS
Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies
Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies
Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson
Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund
amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson
Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice
Hall of India New Delhi
Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies
Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best
People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd
RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 621
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the
value it creates
UNIT I
Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When
How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience
Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency
UNIT II
Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated
Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-
Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-
UNIT III
Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on
Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-
Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display
Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-
UNIT IV
Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium
Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and
Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-
Trade Dealing
UNIT V
Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-
Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating
Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions
COURSE OUTCOME
Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing
to act in ways that increase loyalty
REFERENCE BOOKS
Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -
Prentice-Hall
Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology
Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales
Promotion Techniques
Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate
Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page
Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books
George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing
Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill
PRODUCTION GROUP
PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL
Course Code 1Y3BBA 622
COURSE OBJECTIVE-
Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a
basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of
facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality
control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an
understanding of the concept of aggregate planning
UNIT- I
Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors
Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-
requisites of PPC
UNIT- II
Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in
Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining
Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control
Models)
UNIT- III
Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection
Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master
production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of
software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II
UNIT- IV
Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n
job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling
Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)
UNIT- V
Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control
COURSE OUTCOME
At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control
function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people
REFERENCE BOOKS
bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications
bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi
Deep and Deep Publications
PROCESS REENGINEERING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 623
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of
business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering
projects
UNIT- I
Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp
pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR
UNIT- II
Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering
project organizing for process reengineering
UNIT- III
Process analysis and design
a) Process analysis
(b) Process design
UNIT- IV
Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition
tracking and measuring process performance
UNIT- V
Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology
Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact
measurement
COURSE OUTCOME
To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the
considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-
engineering project
REFERENCE BOOKS
Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata
McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater
Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester
John Wiley amp Sons
WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624
COURSE OBJECTIVE
This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn
the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time
standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering
to design of work systems
UNIT- I
Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos
productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity
Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time
Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities
Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was
developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph
UNIT- II
Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting
up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion
Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand
Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and
Design of Tools amp Equipment
UNIT- III
Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard
from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and
Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work
Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling
UNIT- IV
Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage
Incentive Plans
The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for
Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action
UNIT-V
Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion
Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System
Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts
Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation
COURSE OUTCOME
Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional
including understanding the need for quality
REFERENCE BOOKS
iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill
ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation
Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp
Sons
Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall
Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall
Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press
Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall
Mall East and London
Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York
TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP
TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN
Course Code 1Y3BBA 625
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in
it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative
impacts of tourism development
UNIT I
Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism
Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of
Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in
Tourism Development
UNIT II
Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning
system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos
Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-
Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in
learning system
UNIT III
Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable
development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist
Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash
The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash
Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities
UNIT IV
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage
of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment
UNIT IV
Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the
Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National
Policy on Ecology and Environment
COURSE OUTCOME
To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global
perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international
tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for
sustainable tourism
REFERENCE BOOKS
Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash
Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications
Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers
Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William
Heinemann Ltd
Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices
London Pitman Publishing
Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York
Kendall Hunt Publishing Company
Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan
Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman
Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford
University Press
New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable
Development Approach VNR and New York
TOURISM MARKETING
Course Code 1Y3BBA 626
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism
and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing
that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products
before the stakeholders of tourism industry
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing
Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and
Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing
UNIT II
MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation
Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market
Positioning
UNIT III
PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing
Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for
different stages of life cycle
UNIT IV
PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing
Strategiestypes
UNIT V
PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales
promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital
communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products
COURSE OUTCOME
Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future
It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are
needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be
a part of this growth
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru
Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar
Thomson Publications Florence
Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd
edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland
Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling
Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi
Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and
Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi
Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education
University Press New Delhi
TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of
Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry
UNIT I
HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of
Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads
ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and
marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents
UNIT II
RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief
History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway
Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway
station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains
express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world
heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes
UNIT III
AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth
Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled
Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature
Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players
Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and
performance marketing strategies of Air India
UNIT IV
WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover
crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going
traffic) ndash National waterways
UNIT V
CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing
stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and
Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation
COURSE OUTCOME
Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of
the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management
REFERENCE BOOKS
RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi
HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP
HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT
Course Code 1Y3BBA 628
COURSE OBJECTIVE
To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of
its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing
knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital
Management
UNIT I
Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its
impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need
principles purpose
UNIT II
Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and
their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply
department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health
and patient safety
UNIT III
Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of
biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules
standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging
transportation amp storage
UNIT IV
Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier
methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal
decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of
wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan
UNIT V
Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party
insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash
meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural
disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague
typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics
COURSE OUTCOME
To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost
containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges
arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs
and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its
various components
REFERENCE BOOKS
Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication
First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn
Park k - Preventive and social medicine
Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot
MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE
Course Code 1Y3BBA 629
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted
advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public
relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any
potential crisis that may arise
UNIT I
Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches
to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of
marketing functions of marketing
UNIT II
Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment
Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market
segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash
positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing
UNIT III
Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior
(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying
decision process
UNIT IV
Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp
deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product
development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling
UNIT V
Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing
policies and strategies
Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management
decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels
COURSE OUTCOME
Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an
integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare
professionals and the public
REFERENCE BOOKS
Philip Kotler - marketing management
Wiliam jStanton - marketing management
Sherleker S A - marketing management
J C Gandhi - marketing management
Davar - modern marketing management
Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub
P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research
Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research
HOSPITALS RELATED LAW
Course Code 1Y3BBA 630
COURSE OBJECTIVE
Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of
common-law development
UNIT ndash I
Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties
sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance
act trust act societies registration act
UNIT ndashII
Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of
human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act
1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971
mental health act patient consent
UNIT ndash III
Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948
narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods
act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration
UNIT ndash IV
Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act
1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916
maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing
order) act trade union act industrial disputes act
UNIT ndashV
Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in
hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical
negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical
establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act
COURSE OUTCOME
Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal
pronouncements rulings and regulations
REFERENCE BOOKS
Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer
Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law
Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George
RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP
RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS
Course Code 1Y3BBA 631
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India
To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural
Production system in India
To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India
To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development
UNIT -1
Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions
ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology
Case analysis and discussion
UNIT II
Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash
Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture
UNIT III
Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-
Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India
UNIT IV
Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of
holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus
land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas
UNIT V
Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash
Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and
schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM
COURSE OUTCOMES
Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management
Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India
Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development
REFERENCE BOOKS
Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution
Can We Make London Department for International Development
Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House
PANCHAYATI RAJ
Course Code 1Y3BBA632
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration
To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites
To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance
To provide insights on Rural Administration
To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes
UNIT I
Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction
Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges
Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration
(Official and non-official) and report submission
UNIT III
Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission
UNIT IV
Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and
Block- Panchayat relationship
Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play
UNIT V
Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government
Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan
Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
COURSE OUTCOMES
Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village
Development interventions
Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its
power Structure
Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and
Plans
Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes
32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959
Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise
Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi
Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New
Delhi
RURAL ECONOMY
Course Code 1Y3BBA 633
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy
To help students understand their role in rural economic development
To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources
To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation
To create awareness on rural economic development
UNIT I
Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-
Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries
(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in
agriculture individual production other production services
Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching
UNIT II
Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-
Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash
Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land
Reforms
Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion
UNIT III
Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation
programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs
UNIT IV
Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work
UNIT V
Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing
ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for
the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts
Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student will be able to
Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy
Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village
Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues
Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation
Facilities
Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy
REFERENCE BOOKS
Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi
Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi
Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic
Publishers and Distributors New Delhi
Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New
Delhi
INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER
Mid Semester Examination (MSE)
There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5
descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered
End Semester Examination (ESE)
There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks
each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of
10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered
Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations
The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment
Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be
applicable
(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )
Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type
End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size